MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARD FOR LINE PIPE FOURTH ...

This Standard is the property of Iranian Ministry of Petroleum. All rights

Neither whole nor any part of this document may be disclosed to any third party, reproduced, stored in

any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written consent of

the Iranian Ministry of Petroleum.

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARD

IPS

This Standard is the property of Iranian Ministry of Petroleum. All rights are reserved to the owner.



Iranian Ministry of Petroleum.

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARD

FOR

LINE PIPE

FOURTH EDITION

DECEMBER 2020

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

are reserved to the owner.



FOREWORD

The Iranian Petroleum Standards (IPS) reflect the views of the Iranian Ministry of Petroleum and are

intended for use in the oil and gas production facilities, oil refineries, chemical a

plants, gas handling and processing installations and other such facilities.

IPS are based on internationally acceptable standards and include selections from the items

stipulated in the referenced standards. They are also supplemented by

and/or modifications based on the experience acquired by the Iranian Petroleum Industry and the

local market availability. The options which are not specified in the text of the standards are itemized

in data sheet/s, so that, the user can select his appropriate preferences therein.

The IPS standards are therefore expected to be sufficiently flexible so that the users can adapt

these standards to their requirements. However, they may not cover every requirement of each

project. For such cases, an addendum to IPS Standard shall be prepared by the user which

elaborates the particular requirements of the user. This addendum together with the relevant IPS

shall form the job specification for the specific project or work.

The IPS is reviewed and up-dated approximately every five years. Each standards are subject to

amendment or withdrawal, if required, thus the latest edition of IPS shall be applicable

The users of IPS are therefore requested to send their views and comments, including any

addendum prepared for particular cases to the following address. These comments and

recommendations will be reviewed by the relevant technical committee and in case of approval will

be incorporated in the next revision of the standard.

Deputy of Standardization, Administrative of Technical, Execution and Evaluation of Projects Affairs, No.17, St. 14th, North Kheradmand, Karimkhan Blvd., Tehran, Iran.

Postal Code-1585886851

Tel: 88810459-60 & 66153055

Fax: 88810462

Email: Standards@ nioc.ir

Dec. 2020 IPS


intended for use in the oil and gas production facilities, oil refineries, chemical a

plants, gas handling and processing installations and other such facilities.


stipulated in the referenced standards. They are also supplemented by additional requirements



ser can select his appropriate preferences therein.



uch cases, an addendum to IPS Standard shall be prepared by the user which


shall form the job specification for the specific project or work.

dated approximately every five years. Each standards are subject to





be incorporated in the next revision of the standard.

zation, Administrative of Technical, Execution and Evaluation of Projects Affairs, No.17, St. 14th, North Kheradmand, Karimkhan Blvd., Tehran, Iran.

IPS-M-PI-190 (4)


intended for use in the oil and gas production facilities, oil refineries, chemical and petrochemical


additional requirements





uch cases, an addendum to IPS Standard shall be prepared by the user which


dated approximately every five years. Each standards are subject to





zation, Administrative of Technical, Execution and Evaluation of Projects Affairs,

CONTENTS

PART I ................................................................

1. INTRODUCTION ................................

1.1 Scope ................................

2. GENERAL DEFINITIONS ................................

PART II ................................................................

2. NORMATIVE REFERENCES

3. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS, AND ABBREVIATIONS

3.1.23 HFW Pipe ................................

3.1.60 Test Unit ................................

4. CONFORMITY ................................

4.1 Units of Measurement

4.2 Rounding ................................

5. COMPLIANCE TO THIS SPECIFICATION

5.1 Quality ................................

5.3 References to Annexes

5.4 Minimum Inspection Requirements

6. PIPE GRADE, STEEL GRADE

7. INFORMATION TO BE SUPP

7.1 General Information

7.2 Additional Informati

8. MANUFACTURING ................................

8.1 Process of Manufac

8.4 Tack Welds ................................

8.6 Weld Seams in SAW Pipe

8.8 Treatment of Weld Seams in EW Pipe

8.8.2 PSL 2 HFW Pipe ................................

8.9 Cold Sizing and Co

8.11 Jointers ................................

8.12 Heat Treatment ................................

8.13 Traceability ................................

8.14 Preparation of Edges

9. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ................................

9.2 Chemical Compositi

9.6 Flattening Test ................................

9.8 CVN Impact Test for

9.10 Surface Conditions,

9.11 Dimensions, Mass

9.12 Finish of Pipe Ends

9.13 Tolerances for the

9.14 Tolerances for Mass

9.15 Weldability of PSL 2 pipe

9.16 Crack Tip Opening Displacement (CTOD) Test (for Fracture Toughness Evaluation) ................................

9.17 Hardness Survey ................................

Dec. 2020 IPS

CONTENTS

................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................

................................................................................................

NORMATIVE REFERENCES ................................................................................................

TERMS AND DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS, AND ABBREVIATIONS ................................

................................................................................................

................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................

Measurement ................................................................................................

................................................................................................

SPECIFICATION ................................................................

................................................................................................................................

5.3 References to Annexes................................................................................................

5.4 Minimum Inspection Requirements ................................................................

GRADE AND DELIVERY CONDITION ................................

SUPPLIED BY THE PURCHASER ................................

on ................................................................................................

tion ................................................................................................

................................................................................................

acture ................................................................................................

................................................................................................

8.6 Weld Seams in SAW Pipe ...............................................................................................

8.8 Treatment of Weld Seams in EW Pipe................................................................

................................................................................................

Cold Expansion ................................................................

................................................................................................

................................................................................................

................................................................................................

Edges for Welding ................................................................

................................................................................................

ition ................................................................................................

................................................................................................

or PSL 2 Pipe ................................................................

ons, Imperfections and Defects ................................

and Tolerances ................................................................

9.12 Finish of Pipe Ends ................................................................................................

the Weld Seam................................................................

9.14 Tolerances for Mass................................................................................................

lity of PSL 2 pipe ..............................................................................................

9.16 Crack Tip Opening Displacement (CTOD) Test (for Fracture Toughness ................................................................................................

................................................................................................

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

CONTENTS PAGE No.

............................................ 1

.............................. 1

................................... 1

................................................ 1

............................................ 3

.......................................... 3

................................................ 4

........................................................ 4

......................................................... 5

................................. 5

........................................ 5

............................................................. 5

..................................................... 6

................................. 6

...................................... 6

................................................. 6

...................................................... 7

........................................................... 7

........................................ 7

....................................... 7

.......................................................... 7

.................................... 7

........................................................ 10

............................... 11

........................................... 11

............................................ 11

................................................... 11

........................................................... 12

............................................... 12

..................................................... 13

........................................... 13

............................................. 13

................................... 13

.................................................. 15

..................................................... 15

......................................................... 17

.............................................. 18

........................................ 20

...................................................... 20

....................................... 22

.............................. 22

9.16 Crack Tip Opening Displacement (CTOD) Test (for Fracture Toughness ...................................................... 22

............................................ 23

9.18 Spring-back Ring Test for Residual Stress Evaluation

10. INSPECTION ................................

10.1 Types of Inspection and Inspection Documents

10.2 Specific Inspection

11. MARKING ................................

11.2 Pipe Marking ................................

14. PIPE LOADING ................................

14.1 General ................................

14.2 Shipping ................................

14.3 Handling ................................

14.4 Storage ................................

ANNEX B (Normative) Manufacturing Procedure Qualification for PSL 2 Pipe

ANNEX C (Normative) Treatment of Surface Imperfections and Defects

ANNEX D (Normative) Repair Welding Procedure

ANNEX E (Normative) Nondestructive Inspection for Pipe Not Required to Meet Annex H, J, or N ................................

ANNEX H (Normative) PSL 2 Pipe Ordered for Sour Service

ANNEX K (Normative) Nondestructive Inspection for Pipe Ordered for Sour Service,Offshore Service, and/or Service Requiring Longitudinal Plastic Strain Capacity

APPENDIX 1 (Informative) Welding Consumables

APPENDIX 2 (Informative) Weldability Test

APPENDIX 3 (Informative) Qualification of NDT at Plate/Coil and Pipe Mills

APPENDIX 4 (Informative) Procedure Requirements for NDT

APPENDIX 5 (Informative) Minimum Requirements to Order Sour

APPENDIX 6 (Informative) Typical MPS/QCP

Dec. 2020 IPS

back Ring Test for Residual Stress Evaluation ................................

................................................................................................................................

10.1 Types of Inspection and Inspection Documents ................................

on ................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................

................................................................................................

................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................

Manufacturing Procedure Qualification for PSL 2 Pipe

Treatment of Surface Imperfections and Defects ................................

Repair Welding Procedure ................................................................

Nondestructive Inspection for Pipe Not Required to Meet Annex H, J, ................................................................................................................................

PSL 2 Pipe Ordered for Sour Service ................................

Nondestructive Inspection for Pipe Ordered for Sour Service,Offshore Service, and/or Service Requiring Longitudinal Plastic Strain Capacity

Welding Consumables ................................................................

Weldability Test ................................................................

Qualification of NDT at Plate/Coil and Pipe Mills ............................

Procedure Requirements for NDT ................................

Minimum Requirements to Order Sour-Service Plate

Typical MPS/QCP-ITP document ................................

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

.............................................. 23

................................ 25

........................................................... 25

........................................ 26

.................................... 34

.................................................. 34

............................ 36

............................ 36

.......................................................... 36

.......................................................... 37

............................ 37

Manufacturing Procedure Qualification for PSL 2 Pipe ....................... 38

................................. 48

....................................... 50

Nondestructive Inspection for Pipe Not Required to Meet Annex H, J, ................................... 53

..................................................... 65

Nondestructive Inspection for Pipe Ordered for Sour Service,Offshore Service, and/or Service Requiring Longitudinal Plastic Strain Capacity ................. 75

..................................... 80

................................................. 83

............................ 87

................................................... 92

Service Plate ................... 98

................................................... 100

PART I

1. INTRODUCTION

This Standard specification gives the Edition-2018) “Specification for Line Pipe

The amendments/supplements to API to the equivalent sections or clauses in API numbering of API Spec 5L has been used as far as possible.referenced within this Standard, it shall mean those clauses are amended by this Standard. Clauses in API Spec 5L that are not amended by this Standard shall remain valid as this standard, there are two conditionsCOMPANY discretion, as the following:

a) Unless otherwise specified by the purchaserpurchaser specified another requirement in purchase orderMPS/QCP-ITP etc.) with Company approval

b) If specified by the purchaser:purchaser specified it in purchase order or manufacturer documents (i.ewith COMPANY approval.

Unless defined otherwise in the purchase order, the order of precedence (highest authority listed first) of the documents shall be:

a) Regulatory requirements.

b) Contract documentation (e.g. Purchase order

c) This specification.

d) The parent standard.

Note 1:

This is a revised version of this standard, which is issued as revision (4)the said standard specification is withdrawn.

1.1 Scope

This standard specifies requirements for seamless and welded pipe (including SAWthe petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries.

2. GENERAL DEFINITIONS

The users of this Standard shall consider the following definitions:

COMPANY (means PURCHASER

Refers to one of the related and/or affiliated companies of the Iranian Ministry of National Iranian Oil Company, National Iranian Gas Company, National Petrochemical Company and National Iranian Oil Refinery And Distribution Company that is requirements for a product purchase order

VENDOR (means MANUFACTURER)

Refers to mill that will fabricate the

Dec. 2020 IPS

1

tandard specification gives the amendments and supplements to API Spec 5L (FortyLine Pipe” named parent standard.

The amendments/supplements to API Spec 5L given in PART II of this Standard are directly related to the equivalent sections or clauses in API Spec 5L. For clarity, the section and paragraph

has been used as far as possible. Where clauses in APIreferenced within this Standard, it shall mean those clauses are amended by this Standard. Clauses

that are not amended by this Standard shall remain valid as written.this standard, there are two conditions which will be selected based on the service

following:

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser: It means the clause shall be carried outpurchaser specified another requirement in purchase order or manufacturer documents (i.e

ITP etc.) with Company approval.

If specified by the purchaser: It means the clause is not mandatory to carry out, unless the ed it in purchase order or manufacturer documents (i.e. MPS/QCP

Unless defined otherwise in the purchase order, the order of precedence (highest authority listed first) of the documents shall be:

documentation (e.g. Purchase order, Approved MPS/QCP-ITP or Data sheet).

This is a revised version of this standard, which is issued as revision (4)-2020. Revision (3)standard specification is withdrawn.

This standard specifies requirements for manufacturing of product specification level PSL 2 of (including SAW and HFW) for use in pipeline transportation

and natural gas industries.

shall consider the following definitions:

PURCHASER):

Refers to one of the related and/or affiliated companies of the Iranian Ministry of National Iranian Oil Company, National Iranian Gas Company, National Petrochemical Company

finery And Distribution Company that is responsible for the definition of requirements for a product purchase order and for payment of that order.

(means MANUFACTURER):

will fabricate the product.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

API Spec 5L (Forty-Sixth

this Standard are directly related . For clarity, the section and paragraph

Where clauses in API Spec 5L are referenced within this Standard, it shall mean those clauses are amended by this Standard. Clauses

written. Furthermore, in based on the service condition at the

It means the clause shall be carried out, unless the or manufacturer documents (i.e.

to carry out, unless the MPS/QCP-ITP etc.)

Unless defined otherwise in the purchase order, the order of precedence (highest authority listed

ITP or Data sheet).

. Revision (3)-2014 of

of product specification level PSL 2 of for use in pipeline transportation systems in

Refers to one of the related and/or affiliated companies of the Iranian Ministry of Petroleum such as National Iranian Oil Company, National Iranian Gas Company, National Petrochemical Company

responsible for the definition of

CONTRACTOR (means SUPPLIER

Refers to the persons, firm or company whose tender has been accepted by the who will supply the product.

INSPECTOR:

The Inspector referred to in this Standard is a person/persons or a body appointed in writing by the COMPANY for the inspection of fabrication and installation work.

SHALL:

Is used where a provision is mandatory.

SHOULD:

Is used where a provision is advisory only.

WILL:

Is normally used in connection with the action by the future decisions or actions, rather than by a contractor, supplier or vendor.

MAY:

Is used where a provision is completely discretionary.

Dec. 2020 IPS

2

SUPPLIER):

Refers to the persons, firm or company whose tender has been accepted by the

to in this Standard is a person/persons or a body appointed in writing by the for the inspection of fabrication and installation work.

Is used where a provision is mandatory.

where a provision is advisory only.

Is normally used in connection with the action by the COMPANY or its representative in order to future decisions or actions, rather than by a contractor, supplier or vendor.

completely discretionary.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

Refers to the persons, firm or company whose tender has been accepted by the COMPANY and

to in this Standard is a person/persons or a body appointed in writing by the

representative in order to

PART II

2. NORMATIVE REFERENCES

Add to this clause the following

API Specification 5L:2018

API RP 5L1

API RP 5LT

API RP 5LW

ASME BPVC Section II - Part C

ASME BPVC Section VIII - Div 1

ASTM E9

ASTM E45

ASTM E112

ASTM E384

ASTM E1180

ASTM E1268

ASTM E1928

AWS A4.4M

AWS A5.01/A5.01M

AWS A5.1/A5.1M

AWS A5.5/A5.5M

AWS A5.17/A5.17M

AWS A5.18/A5.18M

Dec. 2020 IPS

3

NORMATIVE REFERENCES

following:

“Line Pipe”

“Recommended Practice for Railroad Transportation of Line Pipe”

“Recommended Practice for Truck Transportation of Line Pipe

“Recommended Practice for Transportation of Line Pipe on Barges and Marine Vessels”

Part C “Specifications for welding rods, electrodes and filler metals

Div 1 “Rules for construction of pressure vessel”

“Standard Test Methods of Compression Testing of Metallic Materials at Room Temperature”

“Standard Test Methods for Determining the Inclusion Content of Steel”

“Standard Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size

“Standard Test Method for Knoop and Vickers Hardness of Materials”

“Standard Practice For Preparing Sulfur Prints For Macrostructural Evaluation”

“Standard Practice For Assessing The Degree Of Banding Or Orientation Of Microstructures”

“Standard Practice for Estimating the Approximate Residual Circumferential Stress in Straight Thin-walled Tubing

“Standard Procedures for Determination of Moisture ContentWelding Fluxes and Welding Electrode Flux Coverings

“Filler metal – Procurement guidelines”

“Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding”

“Specification for Low Alloy Steel Covered Arc Welding Electrodes”

“Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding”

Specification for Carbon Steel Filler Metal for Gas Shielded Arc Welding.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

Recommended Practice for Railroad Transportation of Line

Transportation of Line Pipe”

Recommended Practice for Transportation of Line Pipe on

Specifications for welding rods, electrodes and filler metals”

Standard Test Methods of Compression Testing of Metallic

Standard Test Methods for Determining the Inclusion Content

Methods for Determining Average Grain Size”

Standard Test Method for Knoop and Vickers Hardness of

Standard Practice For Preparing Sulfur Prints For

g The Degree Of Banding Or

Standard Practice for Estimating the Approximate Residual walled Tubing”

Standard Procedures for Determination of Moisture Content of Welding Fluxes and Welding Electrode Flux Coverings”

Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal

Steel Covered Arc Welding

Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for

Specification for Carbon Steel Filler Metal for Gas Shielded Arc

AWS A5.23/A5.23M

AWS A5.28/A5.28M

AWS A5.32/A5.32M

BS 8701

DNVGL-ST -F101

EFC Publication 16

ISO 3183:2019

ISO 3690

ISO 5817

ISO 10005

ISO 14732

ISO 17637

ISO 17639

ISO 17640

IPS-E-GN-100

NACE MR0175/ ISO 15156

NACE TM0316

3. TERMS AND DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS, AND ABBREVIATIONS

3.1.23 HFW Pipe

High-frequency welded pipe

The existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following

Dec. 2020 IPS

4

“Specification for Low Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding”

“Specification for Low Alloy Steel Filler Metal for Gas Shielded Arc Welding”

“Specification for Welding Shielded Gases”

“Full ring ovalization test for determining the susceptibility to cracking of line pipe steels in sour service -

“Submarine Pipelines Systems”

“Guidelines on Materials Requirements for Carbon and Low Alloy Steels for H2S-Containing Environments in Oil and Gas Production”

“Petroleum and natural gas industries - Steel pipe for pipeline transportation systems”

“Welding and allied processes - Determination of hydrogen content in arc weld metal”

“Welding — Fusion-welded joints in steel, nickel, titanium and their alloys (beam welding excluded) — imperfections”

“Quality management-Guidelines for quality plans

“Welding personnel - Qualification testing of welding operators and weld setters for mechanized and automatic welding of metallic materials”

“Non-destructive testing of welds - Visual testing of fusionwelded joints”

“Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials and microscopic examination of welds”

“Non-destructive testing of welds-Ultrasonic testing Techniques, testing levels, and assessment

“Engineering Standard for Units”

“Petroleum and natural gas industries - Materials for use in H2S containing environments in oil and gas production

“Four-Point Bend Testing of Materials for Oil and Gas Applications”

TERMS AND DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS, AND ABBREVIATIONS

pipe

The existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

Specification for Low Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for

Specification for Low Alloy Steel Filler Metal for Gas Shielded

l ring ovalization test for determining the susceptibility to Test method”

Guidelines on Materials Requirements for Carbon and Low Containing Environments in Oil and Gas

Steel pipe for pipeline

Determination of hydrogen

welded joints in steel, nickel, titanium and Quality levels for

Guidelines for quality plans”

Qualification testing of welding operators and weld setters for mechanized and automatic welding of

Visual testing of fusion-

metallic materials - Macroscopic

Ultrasonic testing - Techniques, testing levels, and assessment”

Materials for use in S containing environments in oil and gas production”

Point Bend Testing of Materials for Oil and Gas

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, equal to or greater than 150 KHZ

3.1.60 Test Unit


Prescribed quantity of finished specified wall thickness, from strip(applicable to welded pipe), from the same pipeunder the same pipe-manufacturing conditions. According to each of requires the creation of a new test unit

I. Changing pipe-manufacturing process and conditions.

II. The pipes subject to any reprocessing.

III. Changing each Heat No.

IV. An increase or decrease in the cold

V. Producing pipes with the same conditions:

• Not more than 200 pipes with OD

• Not more than 100 pipes with 6" < OD < 20".

• Not more than 50 pipes with OD

Add to clause 3, the following

3.1.66 Tolerance: Allowable plus or minus amount for a

3.1.67 Variation: A total allowab

3.1.68 Datum: A basis amount

3.1.69 MPS: Manufacturing Procedure

3.1.70 QCP: Quality Control Plan.

3.1.71 ITP: Inspection and Testing Plan.

3.1.72 MPQT: Manufacturing Procedure Q

3.1.73 PIM: Pre-Inspection Meeting.

3.1.74 NCR: Nonconformance request.

3.1.75 Charge: The product produced by a single cycle of process (e.g. heat treatmentsequence/strand

4. CONFORMITY

4.1 Units of Measurement


This Standard is based on International System of Units (SI), as per otherwise specified.

4.2 Rounding


Unless otherwise stated in this Standard, to determine conformance with the specified requirements, observed or calculated values shall be rounded to the nearest unit in the last hand place of figures used in expressing the limiting value, in accordance with

Dec. 2020 IPS

5

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, EW pipe produced with a welding KHZ.


finished pipe that is made to the same specified outside diameter and strip(coils)/plates/billets produced by the same hot

applicable to welded pipe), from the same pipe-manufacturing process from the samemanufacturing conditions. According to each of the following

requires the creation of a new test unit unless otherwise specified in this standard

manufacturing process and conditions.

The pipes subject to any reprocessing.

ase in the cold-expansion ratio of more than 0.002.

Producing pipes with the same conditions:

pipes with OD ≤ 6".

Not more than 100 pipes with 6" < OD < 20".

more than 50 pipes with OD ≥ 20".

the following:

Allowable plus or minus amount for a specific value.

A total allowable range for a value.

for a value.

rocedure Specification.

Quality Control Plan.

Inspection and Testing Plan.

Manufacturing Procedure Qualification Tests (may be first day production testing

Inspection Meeting.

Nonconformance request.

The product produced by a single cycle of process (e.g. heat treatmentstrand).


This Standard is based on International System of Units (SI), as per IPS-E-GN


Unless otherwise stated in this Standard, to determine conformance with the specified observed or calculated values shall be rounded to the nearest unit in the last

used in expressing the limiting value, in accordance with

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

ipe produced with a welding current frequency

pipe that is made to the same specified outside diameter and /plates/billets produced by the same hot rolling practice (as

manufacturing process from the same heat and following conditions,

specified in this standard:

may be first day production testing).

The product produced by a single cycle of process (e.g. heat treatment, casting

GN-100 except where

Unless otherwise stated in this Standard, to determine conformance with the specified observed or calculated values shall be rounded to the nearest unit in the last right-

IPS-E-GN-100, part

5.6 "Guide for the Rounding of N

5. COMPLIANCE TO THIS SPECIFICATION

5.1 Quality


The manufacturer shall be previously audited or accepted by the purchaser.

All sub-contractors (e.g. raw material supplier, NDT supplier, etc.) shall be clearly identified defined otherwise at the bid stage

Quality plans and inspection and test plans, developed as outputs to operational planning and control for the products and services, shall define the specific controls to be implemented by the manufacturer and when applicable subrequirements. Controls shall address both internally and externally sourced processes products and services.

5.3 References to Annexes


Note 1: Informative Appendixes as the following may be used:

a) Welding consumables, see Appendix 1.

b) Weldability test, see Appendix 2.

c) Qualification of NDT at plate/

d) NDT procedure minimum content, see Appendix 4.

e) Minimum requirements to order sour

f) Typical MPS/QCP-ITP document, see Appendix 6.


Add this clause as the following

The manufacturer shall notify the purchaser and inspector with a sufficient notice period to enable their attendance at qualification tests, and at all other tests or stages of manufacture which are subject to acceptance in accordance with this specificatishall be agreed at the Pre-Inspection Meeting (PIM).

The manufacturer shall ensure that the purchaser and the inspector have full and free access to all parts of the mill during all manufacturing and inspectioproduction.

Where the mill country language is not English, all procedure required for review and all tests certificates shall be written in two languages, i.e. the native language of the country in which the is located and English.

If during the main production more than 10 % of the pipes are rejected in any single day’s production or re-routed for repairs or reto instruct the manufacturer to imaintain it at that level until the causes of the defective quality are identified and eliminated. A corrective action request will be sent by the inspector to the manufacturer. Productionaccepted until a response with positive results is accepted by inspector.

If the above reaches 15 %, the purchaser or inspector may require the main production to be stopped. In such a case, the purchaser is entitled to require a program of ithe root cause of the defective quality. This program will be established in mutual agreement

Dec. 2020 IPS

6

Numbers".

COMPLIANCE TO THIS SPECIFICATION

Add to this clause the following:

The manufacturer shall be previously audited or accepted by the purchaser.

contractors (e.g. raw material supplier, NDT supplier, etc.) shall be clearly identified at the bid stage) and accepted by the purchaser.

plans and inspection and test plans, developed as outputs to operational planning and control for the products and services, shall define the specific controls to be implemented by the manufacturer and when applicable sub-manufacturers to ensure conformance with the specified requirements. Controls shall address both internally and externally sourced processes products and


Informative Appendixes as the following may be used:

ng consumables, see Appendix 1.

eldability test, see Appendix 2.

Qualification of NDT at plate/ strip (coil) and pipe mill, see Appendix 3.

NDT procedure minimum content, see Appendix 4.

Minimum requirements to order sour-service plate, see Appendix 5.

ITP document, see Appendix 6.


as the following:

The manufacturer shall notify the purchaser and inspector with a sufficient notice period to enable their attendance at qualification tests, and at all other tests or stages of manufacture which are subject to acceptance in accordance with this specification. The notice period for intervention points

Inspection Meeting (PIM).

The manufacturer shall ensure that the purchaser and the inspector have full and free access to all parts of the mill during all manufacturing and inspection stages, without interfering with normal mill

Where the mill country language is not English, all procedure required for review and all tests certificates shall be written in two languages, i.e. the native language of the country in which the

If during the main production more than 10 % of the pipes are rejected in any single day’s routed for repairs or re-processing, the purchaser or inspector shall have the right

to instruct the manufacturer to increase his quality control program to an appropriate level, and to maintain it at that level until the causes of the defective quality are identified and eliminated. A corrective action request will be sent by the inspector to the manufacturer. Productionaccepted until a response with positive results is accepted by inspector.

If the above reaches 15 %, the purchaser or inspector may require the main production to be stopped. In such a case, the purchaser is entitled to require a program of investigation to determine the root cause of the defective quality. This program will be established in mutual agreement

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

contractors (e.g. raw material supplier, NDT supplier, etc.) shall be clearly identified (unless

plans and inspection and test plans, developed as outputs to operational planning and control for the products and services, shall define the specific controls to be implemented by the

ce with the specified requirements. Controls shall address both internally and externally sourced processes products and

The manufacturer shall notify the purchaser and inspector with a sufficient notice period to enable their attendance at qualification tests, and at all other tests or stages of manufacture which are

on. The notice period for intervention points

The manufacturer shall ensure that the purchaser and the inspector have full and free access to all n stages, without interfering with normal mill

Where the mill country language is not English, all procedure required for review and all tests certificates shall be written in two languages, i.e. the native language of the country in which the mill

If during the main production more than 10 % of the pipes are rejected in any single day’s processing, the purchaser or inspector shall have the right

ncrease his quality control program to an appropriate level, and to maintain it at that level until the causes of the defective quality are identified and eliminated. A corrective action request will be sent by the inspector to the manufacturer. Production will not be

If the above reaches 15 %, the purchaser or inspector may require the main production to be nvestigation to determine

the root cause of the defective quality. This program will be established in mutual agreement

between the purchaser and the manufacturer. The rest of production shall be put on hold until the investigations are concluded and the p

Note 1: An indication found but later cleared by additional NDT checks shall not be part of the above repair rate ratio.

At the end of the manufacturing activities and tests, the manufacturer shall prographs for hydrotest and heat treatment) giving the results information.prepare a final book of all manufacturing activities and tests associated with product certificate

Any work performance or test result not in conformance with the purchaser’s specifications or agreed procedure shall be subject to a nonconformance request (NCR), to be issued by the manufacturer for the purchaser’s acceptance. Each NCR report shall state proposed by the manufacturer. A agreed at the Pre-Inspection Meeting (PIM).

6. PIPE GRADE, STEEL GRADE


6.1.4 Intermediate grades are not acceptable

7. INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED

7.1 General Information


i) Minimum and maximum design temperature

7.2 Additional Information

Add to item b of this clause, the following

17) The requirement for bevel protector

8. MANUFACTURING

8.1 Process of Manufacture


Any change to the essential manufacturing MPQT shall require requalification (see Annex B).

Note 1: Type of pipes including COW, COWL, COWH, LFW, LW,seam COWL are not acceptable and all related clauses shall be ignored.

Note 2: COW may be acceptable only for making a continuous tack weld in SAW pipe.

Note 3: HFW pipe is generally limited to a maximum wall thickness 20 mm.

Note 4: For type of pipe end, only

Note 5: For using of SAWH pipes design principles shall be considered and specified by the purchaser based on the service conditiondiameter is equal and above 24" (610 mm).

Unless otherwise specified by the pumanufacturing process (i.e. helical twowith continuous tack welding followed by submerged arc welding.

SAWH line pipe shall not be used for

a) Where the seam welds are at risk of

Dec. 2020 IPS

7

between the purchaser and the manufacturer. The rest of production shall be put on hold until the investigations are concluded and the purchaser has accepted that production can be resumed.

An indication found but later cleared by additional NDT checks shall not be part of the above repair rate ratio.

At the end of the manufacturing activities and tests, the manufacturer shall provide a test report (for hydrotest and heat treatment) giving the results information. Finally,

manufacturing activities and tests associated with product certificate

Any work performance or test result not in conformance with the purchaser’s specifications or agreed procedure shall be subject to a nonconformance request (NCR), to be issued by the manufacturer for the purchaser’s acceptance. Each NCR report shall state the corrective action proposed by the manufacturer. A NCR process including lead times for issue and response shall be

Inspection Meeting (PIM).

GRADE AND DELIVERY CONDITION


grades are not acceptable and all related clauses shall be ignored.

SUPPLIED BY THE PURCHASER

o this clause the following:

design temperature.

the following:

requirement for bevel protector.


Any change to the essential manufacturing process parameters beyond the limit MPQT shall require requalification (see Annex B).

Type of pipes including COW, COWL, COWH, LFW, LW, Double-seam SAWL and Doubleseam COWL are not acceptable and all related clauses shall be ignored.

COW may be acceptable only for making a continuous tack weld in SAW pipe.

HFW pipe is generally limited to a maximum wall thickness 20 mm.

nly plain end and beveled end are acceptable.

For using of SAWH pipes design principles shall be considered and specified by the purchaser based on the service condition. SAWH pipe is generally manufactured

is equal and above 24" (610 mm).

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, SAWH pipes shall be manufactured by offline manufacturing process (i.e. helical two-step (HTS)); this process is split into pipe forming combined with continuous tack welding followed by submerged arc welding.

SAWH line pipe shall not be used for any of the following applications:

here the seam welds are at risk of corrosion due to water drop out.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

between the purchaser and the manufacturer. The rest of production shall be put on hold until the urchaser has accepted that production can be resumed.

An indication found but later cleared by additional NDT checks shall not be part of the

vide a test report (and Finally, manufacturer shall

manufacturing activities and tests associated with product certificates.

Any work performance or test result not in conformance with the purchaser’s specifications or agreed procedure shall be subject to a nonconformance request (NCR), to be issued by the

the corrective action NCR process including lead times for issue and response shall be

and all related clauses shall be ignored.

parameters beyond the limit qualification of the

seam SAWL and Double-

COW may be acceptable only for making a continuous tack weld in SAW pipe.

For using of SAWH pipes design principles shall be considered and specified by the SAWH pipe is generally manufactured where the outer

rchaser, SAWH pipes shall be manufactured by offline process is split into pipe forming combined

b) In sour service.

8.3.2 The existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following

The ingots, blooms, billets, slab,pipe shall be made in a basic oxygen or electric arc furnace

Slitting of mother plate/ strip (coil) or slabs should not carried out.

Note 1: If slitting allowed by the purchaser based on the precautions shall be considered

• Metallographic investigations (including e.g. micro and if required macro and hardness) shall be applied to determine the wide of segregation zone throughout full wide of mother plate/ strip (coil) or slabs.

• Center slitting of mother plate/ stripare not permitted (due to adverse effects of probable segregations).

• Slitting may be performed such that a suitable distance between "weld area (including seam and HAZ)(i.e. 5t). The suitable distance may be varied at the metallographic investigations and service condition.

• If there is no observable segregation zone through metallographic investigations, the suitable distance (i.e. 5t or specified by the purchaser) shall be applied between center line of "mother plate/ strip

• Metallographic investigations shall be carried out at least once for each slitting.

Note 2: Strip (coil)/plate end welds are not permitted and related clauses shall be ignored.


The manufacturer shall demonstrate that clean steel making practices are used and specific treatment to control inclusions size, shape and distribution are employed to produce the quality steel required to manufacture the pipes according to this specificatwith respect to content, distribution and shape shall be performed by deeither calcium injection or rare earth metal treatment.

The manufacturer shall record details of the casting sequenceheats, tons, scrapping lengths). These parameters shall be available for inspector review, if requested.

In addition, the following requirements shall be considered and reported, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser:

a) If steel scrap is used, delivered scrap

b) The steel shall be fully killed.

c) The gas content of Oxygen, Hydrogen and Nitrogen within molten steel checked online (and documented) and be respectively.

The inspection frequency shall be at least one sample per heatmanufacturing conditions.

d) Sulfur print testing should be carried out to ASTM E1180 to reveal theuniformity of productions. The test results shall not exhibit long continuoussegregations d) Any other acceptance criteria or sulfur print pattern (or method) shall be specified

by the purchaser if required based on the service condition

Suitable inspection frequency shall be specified by the purchaser based on the

Dec. 2020 IPS

8

existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

slab, strip (coil) or plates used as starting material for the manufacture shall be made in a basic oxygen or electric arc furnace.

(coil) or slabs should not carried out.

If slitting allowed by the purchaser based on the service condition, at least the followingprecautions shall be considered:

Metallographic investigations (including e.g. micro and if required macro and hardness) shall be applied to determine the wide of segregation zone throughout full wide of mother

(coil) or slabs.

Center slitting of mother plate/ strip (coil) or slabs and slitting through segregation zone are not permitted (due to adverse effects of probable segregations).

Slitting may be performed such that a suitable distance between "segregation zoneweld area (including seam and HAZ)" be at least 5 times of nominal wall thickness of pipe

The suitable distance may be varied at the COMPANY discretion based on metallographic investigations and service condition.

vable segregation zone through metallographic investigations, the suitable distance (i.e. 5t or specified by the purchaser) shall be applied between center

mother plate/ strip (coil) or slabs" and "weld area (including seam and HAZ)".

Metallographic investigations shall be carried out at least once for each slitting.

ate end welds are not permitted and related clauses shall be ignored.


The manufacturer shall demonstrate that clean steel making practices are used and specific treatment to control inclusions size, shape and distribution are employed to produce the quality steel required to manufacture the pipes according to this specification. For HFW pipes, inclusion control with respect to content, distribution and shape shall be performed by desulfurizing,either calcium injection or rare earth metal treatment.

The manufacturer shall record details of the casting sequences (e.g. casting strand, number of heats, tons, scrapping lengths). These parameters shall be available for inspector review, if

In addition, the following requirements shall be considered and reported, unless otherwise specified

delivered scrap shall be checked for radioactivity; no radiation is permitted.

The steel shall be fully killed.

The gas content of Oxygen, Hydrogen and Nitrogen within molten steel documented) and be equal or less than 30 ppm, 5

The inspection frequency shall be at least one sample per heat No. under the same

be carried out for the slab used for the manufacture of pipe1180 to reveal the segregation and distribution of sulfide inclusions to ensu

The test results shall not exhibit long continuousacceptance criteria or sulfur print pattern (or method) shall be specified

by the purchaser if required based on the service condition.

Suitable inspection frequency shall be specified by the purchaser based on the

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

plates used as starting material for the manufacture of

service condition, at least the following

Metallographic investigations (including e.g. micro and if required macro and hardness) shall be applied to determine the wide of segregation zone throughout full wide of mother

(coil) or slabs and slitting through segregation zone

segregation zone" and be at least 5 times of nominal wall thickness of pipe

discretion based on

vable segregation zone through metallographic investigations, the suitable distance (i.e. 5t or specified by the purchaser) shall be applied between center

d area (including seam and HAZ)".

Metallographic investigations shall be carried out at least once for each slitting.

ate end welds are not permitted and related clauses shall be ignored.

The manufacturer shall demonstrate that clean steel making practices are used and specific treatment to control inclusions size, shape and distribution are employed to produce the quality steel

ion. For HFW pipes, inclusion control sulfurizing, degassing, and

s (e.g. casting strand, number of heats, tons, scrapping lengths). These parameters shall be available for inspector review, if

In addition, the following requirements shall be considered and reported, unless otherwise specified

radiation is permitted.

The gas content of Oxygen, Hydrogen and Nitrogen within molten steel or product shall be ppm and 120 ppm,

No. under the same

used for the manufacture of pipe, according distribution of sulfide inclusions to ensure the

The test results shall not exhibit long continuous or accumulated acceptance criteria or sulfur print pattern (or method) shall be specified

Suitable inspection frequency shall be specified by the purchaser based on the service condition;

unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, tsample per each ten heat No. or charge No.manufacturing conditions (For sour service frequency, see H.3.2.1).

Segregation analysis shall be carried outsection chemical analysis at leastcomposition shall be within the

Suitable inspection frequency shall be specified by the purchaser based on the service condition; unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency sample per each ten heat No. or charge No. (whichever applicable)manufacturing conditions (For sour service frequency, see H.3.2.1)

Note 1: Macrographic and micrographic methodsand criteria to evaluate the uniformity of productions may be specified by the purchaserbased on the service condition.

e) The steel used for the manufacture of pipe shall beor finer, as defined in ASTM Epearlite microstructures; and for other microstructures (as primary austenite grain size in a full martensitic microstructure steel, etc.), the grain size criteria shall be specified by trequired.

Suitable inspection frequency shall be specified by the purchaser based on the service condition; unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency sample per each ten heat No. or charge manufacturing conditions.

Note 1: Grain size measurementmechanical and thermal processes of pipe manufacturing, to enNo.8 or finer.

f) The steel used for the manufacture of pipe thickness for a banded structure in terms of pearlite/martensite, etc" and qualified under the responsibility of the pipe manufacturer.Assessing the nature, extent and degree of banding or orientation for singleand two or more phases (constituents) microstructures shall be carried out as stereological omicroindentation hardness procedures whichever is applicable as defined in ASTM E1268 to ensure the uniformity of productions. the purchaser if required based on the service condition.

Suitable inspection frequency shall be specified by the purchaser based on the service condition; unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency sample per each ten heat No. or charge No. (whichever applicable)manufacturing conditions. (For sour service frequency, see

Note 1: Bidirectional mechanical testwith a suitable inspection frequencyservice condition to ensure achieving fairly isotropic mechanical propertieswithin the tolerance of target mechanical properties.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency shall be at least oper each ten heat No. or charge No. (whichever applicable) under the same manufacturing conditions.

Note 2: The degree of banding or orientation of microstructure mechanical tests, if required by the purchaser)after final mechanical and thermal processes of pipe manufacturingcriteria.

g) The steel used for the manufacture of pipe shall not havefollowing considerations. The inclusion rating shall be performed in accordance with the

Dec. 2020 IPS

9

otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency shalleat No. or charge No. (whichever applicable)

manufacturing conditions (For sour service frequency, see H.3.2.1).

shall be carried out for the slab used for the manufacture of pipe,at least at the surface, ¼ and ½ product thickness.

composition shall be within the variation of target chemical composition (See B.5.2.1)

Suitable inspection frequency shall be specified by the purchaser based on the service condition; otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency shall be at least one

sample per each ten heat No. or charge No. (whichever applicable)(For sour service frequency, see H.3.2.1).

Macrographic and micrographic methods associated with a suitable inspection frequency to evaluate the uniformity of productions may be specified by the purchaser

used for the manufacture of pipe shall be fine grained with a grain size ofor finer, as defined in ASTM E112. Generally, this grain size criteria is for steel

s; and for other microstructures (as primary austenite grain size in a full martensitic microstructure steel, etc.), the grain size criteria shall be specified by t

Suitable inspection frequency shall be specified by the purchaser based on the service condition; otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency shall be at least one

sample per each ten heat No. or charge No. (whichever applicable)

Grain size measurement for SMLS and welded pipes shall also be carried out mechanical and thermal processes of pipe manufacturing, to ensure achieving a grain size of

used for the manufacture of pipe shall be examined at least at location ¼banded structure in terms of "carbon / carbides segregation

and qualified under the responsibility of the pipe manufacturer.Assessing the nature, extent and degree of banding or orientation for singleand two or more phases (constituents) microstructures shall be carried out as stereological omicroindentation hardness procedures whichever is applicable as defined in ASTM E1268 to ensure the uniformity of productions. Furthermore, the acceptance criteria may be specified by the purchaser if required based on the service condition.

spection frequency shall be specified by the purchaser based on the service condition; otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency shall be at least one

sample per each ten heat No. or charge No. (whichever applicable)(For sour service frequency, see H.3.2.1)

Bidirectional mechanical test (including at least tensile and CVN impact tests)with a suitable inspection frequency may be specified by the purchaser if required

ensure achieving fairly isotropic mechanical properties; The results shall within the tolerance of target mechanical properties.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency shall be at least oper each ten heat No. or charge No. (whichever applicable) under the same manufacturing

The degree of banding or orientation of microstructure measurementmechanical tests, if required by the purchaser) for SMLS and welded pipes shall also be carried out after final mechanical and thermal processes of pipe manufacturing to ensure achieving

used for the manufacture of pipe shall not have detrimental inclusions contentsThe inclusion rating shall be performed in accordance with the

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

shall be at least one (whichever applicable) under the same

used for the manufacture of pipe, by cross-product thickness. The chemical

(See B.5.2.1).

Suitable inspection frequency shall be specified by the purchaser based on the service condition; shall be at least one

sample per each ten heat No. or charge No. (whichever applicable) under the same

associated with a suitable inspection frequency to evaluate the uniformity of productions may be specified by the purchaser if required

fine grained with a grain size of ASTM No.8 for steels including ferrite-

s; and for other microstructures (as primary austenite grain size in a full martensitic microstructure steel, etc.), the grain size criteria shall be specified by the purchaser if

Suitable inspection frequency shall be specified by the purchaser based on the service condition; shall be at least one

No. (whichever applicable) under the same

be carried out after final sure achieving a grain size of ASTM

shall be examined at least at location ¼ and ½ product carbon / carbides segregation" and "ferrite or

and qualified under the responsibility of the pipe manufacturer. -phase (constituent)

and two or more phases (constituents) microstructures shall be carried out as stereological or microindentation hardness procedures whichever is applicable as defined in ASTM E1268 to

Furthermore, the acceptance criteria may be specified by

spection frequency shall be specified by the purchaser based on the service condition; shall be at least one

sample per each ten heat No. or charge No. (whichever applicable) under the same

(including at least tensile and CVN impact tests) associated if required based on the

The results shall be

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency shall be at least one sample per each ten heat No. or charge No. (whichever applicable) under the same manufacturing

measurement (and bidirectional for SMLS and welded pipes shall also be carried out

to ensure achieving acceptance

detrimental inclusions contents with the The inclusion rating shall be performed in accordance with the

microscopical test method of ASTM E45 (Method D: Low Inclusion Content) and shall not be higher than severity 1.5 for all types of heavy and thin inclusions inclusions). Any other acceptance criteria (severity) may be specified by the purchaser for each type of inclusions or even all of them if required based on the service condition.

Suitable inspection frequency shall be specified bUnless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency shall be at least one sample per each ten heat No. or charge No. (whsour service frequency, see H.3.2.1)

Note 1: The microscopical test method D for shall also be carried out after final mechanical and thermal ensure achieving acceptance criteria.


Any lubricant or contamination on the weld bevel or the surrounding areas [minimum 100 mm (3.9in.)] shall be removed before making the seam welds (tack weld and SAW weld). The weld bevel shall be clean and completely dry.

8.3.10 Add this clause as the following

Regarding to inspection documents for plate/inspection certificate in accordance with ISO 10474 or EN 10204.

Alternatively, if specified by the purchaser,or EN 10204 shall be issued.

Format of mill certificates shall be agreed between the purchaser and the manufacturer prior to the start of production. The mill certificates shall identify the heat a(coil) was produced. Mill certificates shall clearly indicate the asnormalized, controlled rolled with accelerated cooling).

In all cases, reports of all tests and inspections carprepared. The reports shall include results of the following:

a) Heat and product analyses.

b) Mechanical tests.

c) Through thickness metallographic examination.

d) Visual inspection.

e) Thickness measurements.

f) Ultrasonic inspection.

8.4 Tack Welds


Manual welding is allowed but shall be restricted to pipe ends.

8.4.1 e: The existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following

Shielded metal arc welding using low hydrogen electrodes from which the diffusible hydrogen content of the resulting weldment shall not exceed

Dec. 2020 IPS

10

microscopical test method of ASTM E45 (Method D: Low Inclusion Content) and shall not be higher than severity 1.5 for all types of heavy and thin inclusions (i.e. types Ainclusions). Any other acceptance criteria (severity) may be specified by the purchaser for each type of inclusions or even all of them if required based on the service condition.

Suitable inspection frequency shall be specified by the purchaser based on the service condition; Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency shall be at least one sample per each ten heat No. or charge No. (whichever applicable) under the same manufacturing conditionssour service frequency, see H.3.2.1).

microscopical test method D for inclusion rating of steel for SMLS and welded pipes shall also be carried out after final mechanical and thermal processes of pipe manufacturing

acceptance criteria.


ontamination on the weld bevel or the surrounding areas [minimum 100 mm (3.9in.)] shall be removed before making the seam welds (tack weld and SAW weld). The weld bevel shall be clean and completely dry.

as the following:

tion documents for plate/strip (coil), the manufacturer shall issue ainspection certificate in accordance with ISO 10474 or EN 10204.

by the purchaser, a 3.2 inspection certificate in accordance with ISO 10474

Format of mill certificates shall be agreed between the purchaser and the manufacturer prior to the start of production. The mill certificates shall identify the heat and slab from which each plate or

was produced. Mill certificates shall clearly indicate the as-delivered condition of product (e.g. normalized, controlled rolled with accelerated cooling).

In all cases, reports of all tests and inspections carried out on plates and strip (prepared. The reports shall include results of the following:

ess metallographic examination.


Manual welding is allowed but shall be restricted to pipe ends.


hielded metal arc welding using low hydrogen electrodes from which the diffusible hydrogen content of the resulting weldment shall not exceed 5 ml/100g of deposited metal.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

microscopical test method of ASTM E45 (Method D: Low Inclusion Content) and shall not be (i.e. types A, B, C and D

inclusions). Any other acceptance criteria (severity) may be specified by the purchaser for each type of inclusions or even all of them if required based on the service condition.

y the purchaser based on the service condition; Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency shall be at least one sample per each ten

ichever applicable) under the same manufacturing conditions (For

for SMLS and welded pipes processes of pipe manufacturing to

ontamination on the weld bevel or the surrounding areas [minimum 100 mm (3.937 in.)] shall be removed before making the seam welds (tack weld and SAW weld). The weld bevel

the manufacturer shall issue a 3.1

a 3.2 inspection certificate in accordance with ISO 10474

Format of mill certificates shall be agreed between the purchaser and the manufacturer prior to the nd slab from which each plate or strip

delivered condition of product (e.g.

strip (coils) shall be


hielded metal arc welding using low hydrogen electrodes from which the diffusible hydrogen ml/100g of deposited metal.

8.4.3 Add this clause as the following

Repair of a tack weld by manual welding isthickness of the automatic pass.

8.6 Weld Seams in SAW Pipe


For the production of weld seams in SAW pipe, the first pass shall be made on the inside of the pipe and at least one submerged-arc welding pass shall be made on the outside of the pipe.

Unless otherwise agreed by the purchaser, runand run-off tabs shall be grooved to match the seam weld groove geometry. If not grooved, the ends shall be cropped off. Tabs length shall be sufficient to establish the arc regime and ensure completion of welding outside thrun-on and run-off tabs shall be removed. Mechanical breaking of tabs is not allowed.

Note 1: For SAW pipe:

Welding equipment shall include a weld seam tracking system to ensure complete and overlap of the inside and outside welds.

Note 2: Flux coverage:

a) Flux coverage of all arcs is mandatory. Visible arcs are not permitted.

b) If specified by the purchaser, t

8.8 Treatment of Weld Seams in EW Pipe

8.8.2 PSL 2 HFW pipe


For each grade which is not subjected to quench and temper processing, the full thickness of the weld seam and HAZ shall be normalized above the upper critical transformation temperature of the steel.

The heat treatment area shall be extended to the base twice the pipe wall thickness measured on the internal surface.

Cooling by water is permitted when this area has a temperature of 250 °C (482 °F) or below, unless qualified to allow a higher temperature prior to

Weld seam heat-treating equipment shall include a weld seam tracking system to ensure full coverage of the weld:

a) This system shall be reviewed and accepted by the purchaser.

b) Heat treatment temperature shall be

c) The records shall be available for review by the thirdthe order is shipped.

Failure or abnormal operation of the seam heat treatment equipment, including the seam trackiand heating elements, shall trigger an alarm and automatic pipe marking.

If the seam heat treatment temperature does not meet the control range, such portions shall be discarded.

8.9 Cold Sizing and Cold Expans


The sizing ratio shall be recorded for three pipes per shift (at the beginning, middle and end of shift) or every 20 pipes per shift, whichever is lesser and also on the MPQ

Dec. 2020 IPS

11

as the following:

Repair of a tack weld by manual welding is permitted provided that the weld is ground down to the thickness of the automatic pass.


For the production of weld seams in SAW pipe, the first pass shall be made on the inside of the pipe arc welding pass shall be made on the outside of the pipe.

Unless otherwise agreed by the purchaser, run-on and run-off tabs shall always be used. Runoff tabs shall be grooved to match the seam weld groove geometry. If not grooved, the

Tabs length shall be sufficient to establish the arc regime and ensure completion of welding outside the pipe seam. After completion of the longitudinal seam weld, the

off tabs shall be removed. Mechanical breaking of tabs is not allowed.

Welding equipment shall include a weld seam tracking system to ensure complete and overlap of the inside and outside welds.

Flux coverage of all arcs is mandatory. Visible arcs are not permitted.

If specified by the purchaser, the flux shall meet the requirements of Appendix 1.

atment of Weld Seams in EW Pipe


For each grade which is not subjected to quench and temper processing, the full thickness of the weld seam and HAZ shall be normalized above the upper critical transformation temperature of the

The heat treatment area shall be extended to the base metal by the lesser of 30 mm (1.18 in.) or twice the pipe wall thickness measured on the internal surface.

Cooling by water is permitted when this area has a temperature of 250 °C (482 °F) or below, unless qualified to allow a higher temperature prior to water cooling by purchaser approval

treating equipment shall include a weld seam tracking system to ensure full

This system shall be reviewed and accepted by the purchaser.

Heat treatment temperature shall be continuously monitored and recorded.

The records shall be available for review by the third-party inspector during production and until

Failure or abnormal operation of the seam heat treatment equipment, including the seam trackiand heating elements, shall trigger an alarm and automatic pipe marking.

If the seam heat treatment temperature does not meet the control range, such portions shall be

Expansion


sizing ratio shall be recorded for three pipes per shift (at the beginning, middle and end of shift) or every 20 pipes per shift, whichever is lesser and also on the MPQT pipe used for qualification of

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

permitted provided that the weld is ground down to the

For the production of weld seams in SAW pipe, the first pass shall be made on the inside of the pipe arc welding pass shall be made on the outside of the pipe.

all always be used. Run-on off tabs shall be grooved to match the seam weld groove geometry. If not grooved, the pipe

Tabs length shall be sufficient to establish the arc regime and ensure e pipe seam. After completion of the longitudinal seam weld, the

off tabs shall be removed. Mechanical breaking of tabs is not allowed.

Welding equipment shall include a weld seam tracking system to ensure complete interpenetration

Appendix 1.

For each grade which is not subjected to quench and temper processing, the full thickness of the weld seam and HAZ shall be normalized above the upper critical transformation temperature of the

metal by the lesser of 30 mm (1.18 in.) or

Cooling by water is permitted when this area has a temperature of 250 °C (482 °F) or below, unless by purchaser approval.

treating equipment shall include a weld seam tracking system to ensure full

party inspector during production and until

Failure or abnormal operation of the seam heat treatment equipment, including the seam tracking

If the seam heat treatment temperature does not meet the control range, such portions shall be

sizing ratio shall be recorded for three pipes per shift (at the beginning, middle and end of shift) pipe used for qualification of

the MPS.

8.9.2 The existing clause shall be deleted

The sizing ratio for cold-expanded

Note 1: Non-expanded SAW pipe shall not be supplied unless explicitly stated on the purchase order together with any supplementary

Note 2: Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, nonor roll bending processes are not acceptable unless full body heat treatment is performed.

Note 3: Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser,

8.11 Jointers


Jointers shall not be supplied and all related clauses shall be ignored.

8.12 Heat Treatment


Heat treatments shall be performed based on documented procedures and reported with a chart.

Furnace surveys shall be done at least once per year in accordance with an industry standard e.g. NORSOK, ISO, API, ASTM, etcunless otherwise specified by the

a) For austenitizing furnaces, temperature uniformity shall be ±14 °C (±25 °F).

b) For tempering furnaces, temperature uniformity shall be ±8 °C (±15 °F).

Furnaces shall be equipped with recording sensors that are calibrated at least quarterly.quenching facilities, the coolant temperature shall be continuously monitored and remain°C (104 °F).

Essential variables including nozzle size, water flow rate and quenching conveyor speed shall be controlled for each production size.

Note 1: Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, p

relief heat treatment; otherwisewith COMPANY's approval (see B.5.2.5

Note 2: MPQT shall be performed in the stress relief condition.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, sheating the pipe in accordance with the following:

a) 20 °C (68 °F) lower than the mill tempering temperature for pipe with delivery condition QT or NT;

b) The temperature should not be above (Regarding Clause 3.1.61). the strength values, the temperature 595 °C (1103 °F).

Note 3: See ASME Section VIIIvariables and tolerances.

Note 4: Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, fquenching by spraying is not recommended.

Dec. 2020 IPS

12


panded pipe shall not be less than 0.008 or more than

pipe shall not be supplied unless explicitly stated on the purchase order together with any supplementary test requirements. HFW shall not be cold expanded.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, non-expanded pipes manufactured by press or roll bending processes are not acceptable unless full body heat treatment is performed.

wise specified by the purchaser, HFW and SAWH shall not be cold expanded.


ed and all related clauses shall be ignored.



Furnace surveys shall be done at least once per year in accordance with an industry g. NORSOK, ISO, API, ASTM, etc provided a certificate including at least the following,

nless otherwise specified by the purchaser:

For austenitizing furnaces, temperature uniformity shall be ±14 °C (±25 °F).

naces, temperature uniformity shall be ±8 °C (±15 °F).

Furnaces shall be equipped with recording sensors that are calibrated at least quarterly.quenching facilities, the coolant temperature shall be continuously monitored and remain

Essential variables including nozzle size, water flow rate and quenching conveyor speed shall be controlled for each production size.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, pipe with �� ≤ 20 shall be subject

otherwise, an strain-ageing test shall be carried out according to a procedure (see B.5.2.5).

shall be performed in the stress relief condition.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, stress relief heat treatment should be performed by heating the pipe in accordance with the following:

20 °C (68 °F) lower than the mill tempering temperature for pipe with delivery condition QT or NT;

The temperature should not be above 580 °C (1076 °F) for pipe with delivery condition M. If manufacturer demonstrated that higher temperature

the strength values, the temperature may be above 580 °C (1076 °F) but should not be above

ASME Section VIII - Division 1- UCS-56 for details of stress relieve heat treatment

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, for sour service and demanding applications,quenching by spraying is not recommended.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

han 0.015.

pipe shall not be supplied unless explicitly stated on the purchase test requirements. HFW shall not be cold expanded.

expanded pipes manufactured by press or roll bending processes are not acceptable unless full body heat treatment is performed.

HFW and SAWH shall not be cold expanded.


Furnace surveys shall be done at least once per year in accordance with an industry recognized provided a certificate including at least the following,

Furnaces shall be equipped with recording sensors that are calibrated at least quarterly. For quenching facilities, the coolant temperature shall be continuously monitored and remain below 40

Essential variables including nozzle size, water flow rate and quenching conveyor speed shall be

20 shall be subject to stress

according to a procedure

tress relief heat treatment should be performed by

20 °C (68 °F) lower than the mill tempering temperature for pipe with delivery condition QT or NT;

°F) for pipe with delivery condition M If manufacturer demonstrated that higher temperature cannot lower

may be above 580 °C (1076 °F) but should not be above

56 for details of stress relieve heat treatment

or sour service and demanding applications,

8.13 Traceability


The manufacturer shall record the following heat identity properties, as applicable:

a) Date of production.

b) Casting sequence number.

c) Heat number.

d) Casting strand number.

e) Billet/slab sequence number.

f) Mother billet/slab (If applicable)

g) Daughter billet/slab (If applicable)

h) Mother pipe/plate (If applicable)

i) Test unit identity.

j) Pipe numbering.

8.14 Preparation of Edges for


The edges of the plates or stripmm or 1.5 times the wall thickness, whichever is greater shall be removed from each side of the plate or strip either by machining or shearing.not within the steel manufacturer’s scope, it shall be carried out by pipe manufacturer.edges of the plate or strip (coil)to ensure that the alignment is maintained during the progress of the welding operation and that any root gap is controlled within limits approved in the procedure test. All surfaces to be welded shall be thoroughly cleaned of scale, oil and other foreign matter before weldinof uniform width and profile and shall merge smoothly into the surface of the stripappreciable deviation from the line of the joint. The forming procedure must ensure that there is a minimum of peaking and this shall be demonstrated in the procedure test to be within the acceptable limits defined in Clause

9. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

9.2 Chemical Composition


For PSL 2 pipe with t ≤ 25.0 mm (0.984 in.), the chemical composition for standard grades shall be as specified in Table 5

Note 1: The weight percentage of elements

S ≤ 0.010 P ≤ 0.020

Unless otherwise specified by the

Unless otherwise specified by the

Note 2: In footnote "a" of Table 5equivalent limits shall be 0.43, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser.

Note 3: Footnotes "c", "e", "f", "g", "h", "i" andspecified by the purchaser.

Note 4: In footnote "l" of Table 5

Dec. 2020 IPS

13


he manufacturer shall record the following heat identity properties, as applicable:

number.

(If applicable).

(If applicable).

(If applicable).

for Welding

the following:

strip (coil) to be welded shall be profiled by machining and at least 10 1.5 times the wall thickness, whichever is greater shall be removed from each side of the

plate or strip either by machining or shearing. If the removing each side of the plate or stripnot within the steel manufacturer’s scope, it shall be carried out by pipe manufacturer.

(coil) shall be aligned for welding and adequate provision shall be made lignment is maintained during the progress of the welding operation and that any

root gap is controlled within limits approved in the procedure test. All surfaces to be welded shall be thoroughly cleaned of scale, oil and other foreign matter before welding is started. The weld shall be of uniform width and profile and shall merge smoothly into the surface of the stripappreciable deviation from the line of the joint. The forming procedure must ensure that there is a

is shall be demonstrated in the procedure test to be within the Clause 9.10.5.


≤ 25.0 mm (0.984 in.), the chemical composition for standard grades shall be

The weight percentage of elements for all pipes:

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser: For S ≥ 15 ppm: Ca/S = 2 to 5 with Ca

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser: For S < 15 ppm: 0.001 ≤ Ca ≤ 0.004

ootnote "a" of Table 5, for seamless pipe with t > 20.0 mm (0.787 in), the carbon be 0.43, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser.

s "c", "e", "f", "g", "h", "i" and "k" of Table 5 shall be carried out

of Table 5, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser: B

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

he manufacturer shall record the following heat identity properties, as applicable:

to be welded shall be profiled by machining and at least 10 1.5 times the wall thickness, whichever is greater shall be removed from each side of the

of the plate or strip (coil) is not within the steel manufacturer’s scope, it shall be carried out by pipe manufacturer. The abutting

shall be aligned for welding and adequate provision shall be made lignment is maintained during the progress of the welding operation and that any

root gap is controlled within limits approved in the procedure test. All surfaces to be welded shall be g is started. The weld shall be

of uniform width and profile and shall merge smoothly into the surface of the strip (coil) without appreciable deviation from the line of the joint. The forming procedure must ensure that there is a

is shall be demonstrated in the procedure test to be within the

≤ 25.0 mm (0.984 in.), the chemical composition for standard grades shall be

Ca/S = 2 to 5 with Ca ≤ 0.004

≤ Ca ≤ 0.004

20.0 mm (0.787 in), the carbon

Table 5 shall be carried out unless otherwise

B ≤ 0.0005.

The manufacturer shall declare the target chemical composition and proposed rangeplacement. Permissible range variationschemical composition be outwith the limitations of Table be subject to the purchaser’s acceptance.

The chemical composition of the MPQT and the product analysis shall be within the target composition declared by the manufacturer.first-day production testing (i.e. MPQT) shall set the datum CE. listed chemical elements even if the elements are considered as not intentionally added.

Elements not intentionally added shall be declared; maximum working percentages of residual elements shall be as follows (ladle and product check

Sn ≤ 0.015 Pb ≤ 0.005

Sb ≤ 0.010 As ≤ 0.015

Bi ≤ 0.005 B ≤ 0.0005 (i.e. no deliberate addition)

Where any of the elements in Table maximum values for approval by the purchaser.specified in Table 28 and Table 5

Product analysis shall be performed under the responsibility of the pipe manufacturer.

Table 28 - Chemical Composition Allowable Range variations (Weight Percentage)

Element Allowable Range variation

C

Mn

Si

Ni

Cu

V

Nb

Al

Ti

Mo

a. For CEIIW and CEPcm the range shall be split equally around the datum CE (agreed target value).

(Allowable range: Target CEIIW ± 0.030 and CE


For PSL 2 pipe with t > 25.0 mm (0.984purchaser, this standard and with the requirements of Table

Dec. 2020 IPS

14

The manufacturer shall declare the target chemical composition and proposed rangePermissible range variations are stated in Table 28, however in no case shall the

twith the limitations of Table 5. After order placement, any change shall be subject to the purchaser’s acceptance.

The chemical composition of the MPQT and the product analysis shall be within the target composition declared by the manufacturer. The chemical composition recorded for the pipes used in

day production testing (i.e. MPQT) shall set the datum CE. The manufacturer shall control the listed chemical elements even if the elements are considered as not intentionally added.

not intentionally added shall be declared; unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, tmaximum working percentages of residual elements shall be as follows (ladle and product check

(i.e. no deliberate addition)

Where any of the elements in Table 28 are not intentionally added, the manufacturer may propose maximum values for approval by the purchaser. The intentionally added elements that are not

and Table 5 are not permitted without COMPANY’s approval


Chemical Composition Allowable Range variations (Weight Percentage)

Allowable Range variation Element Allowable Range variation

0.040 Cr

0.200 P

0.250 S

0.100 Ca

0.060 B

0.030 O

0.020 H

0.040 N

0.014 CEIIW a

0.100 CEPCM a

the range shall be split equally around the datum CE (agreed target value).

± 0.030 and CEPcm ± 0.020)


For PSL 2 pipe with t > 25.0 mm (0.984 in.), the chemical composition shall be agreed with the with the requirements of Table 5 being amended as appropriate.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

The manufacturer shall declare the target chemical composition and proposed range prior to order , however in no case shall the

After order placement, any change shall

The chemical composition of the MPQT and the product analysis shall be within the target The chemical composition recorded for the pipes used in

The manufacturer shall control the listed chemical elements even if the elements are considered as not intentionally added.

specified by the purchaser, the maximum working percentages of residual elements shall be as follows (ladle and product check):

are not intentionally added, the manufacturer may propose The intentionally added elements that are not

COMPANY’s approval.


Chemical Composition Allowable Range variations (Weight Percentage)

Allowable Range variation

0.100

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

0.060

0.040

in.), the chemical composition shall be agreed with the being amended as appropriate.

9.2.5 Add to this clause the following

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the carbon and L555Q or X80Q of seamless pipes shall be CE

9.3 Tensile Properties


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, mfrom B to X65 shall be changed

Add to footnote f in Table 7, the following

The specified minimum elongation, A

Add footnote i to Table 7:

Footnote i: Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, not exceed the minimum values

Note 1: If specified by the purchaser, tensile testing shall be performed at maximum design temperature and the acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with specified given value and the design code.

9.6 Flattening Test

The existing clauses shall be deleted and replaced with

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, afollowing:

a) No cracks or breaks shall occur in either weld or parent metal during flattening of the test specimen to 50 % of the original ou

b) The specimen shall be further flattened to 33 % of original outside diameter without cracks or breaks, other than in the weld.

c) There shall be no evidence of lamination or burnt metal during the entire test before opposite walls of the pipe meet.

9.8 CVN Impact Test for PSL 2

9.8.1.2 The existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following

Individual test values for any testthree test pieces) absorbed eneone is allowed to be below the specified average value and shall meet the minimum single value requirement.

9.8.2 Pipe body tests


For a set of three test pieces, the minimum average absorbed energy for each pipe body test shall be as given in Table 8, based upon fullTable 29.

Dec. 2020 IPS

15


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the carbon equivalent limits for grades L415Neamless pipes shall be CEIIW=0.43 and CEPcm=0.25 .


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, maximum ratio Rt0.5 / Rm in Table 7ed to 0.90.

, the following:

The specified minimum elongation, Af, not be less than 20%.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the measured yield strength values shalnot exceed the minimum values which are indicated in Table 7, by more than 120 MPa

purchaser, tensile testing shall be performed at maximum design temperature and the acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with specified given value and the

The existing clauses shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, acceptance criteria for flattening tests shall be as

No cracks or breaks shall occur in either weld or parent metal during flattening of the test specimen to 50 % of the original outside diameter.

The specimen shall be further flattened to 33 % of original outside diameter without cracks or breaks, other than in the weld.

There shall be no evidence of lamination or burnt metal during the entire test before opposite

2 Pipe


est piece shall be ≥ 80% of the required minimum energy value. From the set of three Charpy V-notch specimens, only

one is allowed to be below the specified average value and shall meet the minimum single value

shall be deleted and replaced with the following

For a set of three test pieces, the minimum average absorbed energy for each pipe body test shall be as given in Table 8, based upon full-size test pieces and a test temperature as specified in

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

equivalent limits for grades L415N or X60N

Table 7, for pipe grades

yield strength values shall 120 MPa.

purchaser, tensile testing shall be performed at maximum design temperature and the acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with specified given value and the

tening tests shall be as

No cracks or breaks shall occur in either weld or parent metal during flattening of the test

The specimen shall be further flattened to 33 % of original outside diameter without cracks or

There shall be no evidence of lamination or burnt metal during the entire test before opposite


average (of a set of notch specimens, only

one is allowed to be below the specified average value and shall meet the minimum single value

shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

For a set of three test pieces, the minimum average absorbed energy for each pipe body test shall size test pieces and a test temperature as specified in

Table 29

Nominal Wall Thickness (mm)

t ≤ 20

20 < t ≤ 30

30 < t

a. A lower test temperature may be specified by b. " T " is the minimum design temperature, which shall be specified in the purchase order. If no

minimum design temperature is indicated, it shall be taken as 0

The existing Table 8 shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

Table 8- CVN minimum average absorbed energy for pipe body

Specified Outside

Diameter D

mm (in.) ≤ L390 or X56

> L390 or X56 to

≤ L415 or X60

≤ 508 (20.000)

40 (30) 45 (34)

> 508 (20.000) to

762 (30.000)

40 (30) 45 (34)

> 762 (30.000) to

914 (36.000)

40 (30) 45 (34)

> 914 (36.000) to

1219 <(48.000)

40 (30) 45 (34)

≥ 1219 (48.000) to

1422 (56.000)

40 (30) 45 (34)

> 1422 (56.000) to

2134 (84.000)

40 (30) 45 (34)

9.8.2.2 The existing clause shall be deleted

For a set of three test pieces, the minimum average and individual shear fracture area for each test shall be at least 85 % and 75 % respectively, at the test temperature specified in Table 29.

9.8.3 Pipe weld and HAZ tests


The minimum average (of a set of three test pieces) absorbed energy for each pipe weld and HAZ test shall be as specified in Table 8in Table 29.

Dec. 2020 IPS

16

Table 29 - CVN impact testing temperature.

ess Test Temperature a

(°C) Maximum Test T

(°C)

T b

0 T-10 0 T-20 0

A lower test temperature may be specified by the purchaser " T " is the minimum design temperature, which shall be specified in the purchase order. If no

minimum design temperature is indicated, it shall be taken as 0 °C.

able 8 shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

average absorbed energy for pipe body, weld and HAZ

Full-size CVN Absorbed Energy

Min. Avg. KV

J (ft·lbf)

Grade

L390 or

L415 or

> L415 or X60 to

≤ L450 or X65

> L450 or X65 to

≤ L485 or X70

> L485 or X70 to

≤ L555 or X80

> L555 or X80 to

≤ L625 or X90

>

≤ L690 or

45 (34) 54 (40) 54 (40) 60 (44)

45 (34) 54 (40) 54 (40) 60 (44)

45 (34) 54 (40) 54 (40) 60 (44)

45 (34) 54 (40) 54 (40) 60 (44)

54 (40) 68 (50) 68 (50) 68 (50)

68 (50) 81 (60) 81 (60) 81 (60)



s


The minimum average (of a set of three test pieces) absorbed energy for each pipe weld and HAZ able 8, based upon full-size test pieces and test temperature

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

Temperature

" T " is the minimum design temperature, which shall be specified in the purchase order. If no

, weld and HAZ of PSL 2 pipe

> L625 or X90 to

≤ L690 or X100

> L690 or X100 to

≤ L830 or X120

60 (44) 60 (44)

60 (44) 60 (44)

60 (44) 60 (44)

60 (44) 68 (50)

68 (50) 81 (60)

95 (70) 108 (80)

and replaced with the following:


The minimum average (of a set of three test pieces) absorbed energy for each pipe weld and HAZ temperature specified

If specified by the purchaser, for a set of three test pieces, the minimum average and individual shear fracture area for each test shall be at least 75 % in the HAZ and 50 % in the weld, at the test temperature specified in Table 29.

9.9 DWT Test For PSL 2 Pipe


DWT test shall be carried out for purchaser, DWT test may be performed on

For each test (of a set of two test pieces), the average shear fracture area shall be on 0 °C or minimum design temperature whichever is lesservalue shall be at least 75%.

Full wall thickness specimens shall be used, as far as possible; thickness specimen due to capacity limitation of testing equipmentadjusted in accordance with API 5L3.greater than 39.7 mm shall be specified by

9.10 Surface Conditions, Imper

9.10.1.1 Add to this clause the followings

The external surface of all seamless pipes shall be free metallurgical tears and sharp edged discontinuities that may interfere with the application of thin film [e.g. fusion bonded epoxy (FBE)] coatings, and multi

9.10.1.4 Add this clause as the following

The pipe shall be substantially free of loose scale as assessed by the inspector.

9.10.2 Undercuts

The existing paragraphs shall be deleted and replaced with the followings

Undercuts in SAW pipe shall be investigated,

a) Undercuts that have a depth be treated in accordance with

b) Undercuts that have a depth > 0.provided they are treated in accordance with

1) their individual lengths are

2) their individual depths are

3) there are no more than two such undercuts in any 300 mm

c) Undercuts that exceed the limits specified in item treated in accordance with Clause

Note 1: Undercuts can best be located visually.

Note 2: Undercuts which are coincident at inside a

Note 3: Undercut repairs after pipe expansion is not accepted.

9.10.4 Lamination

The existing paragraph shall be deleted and replaced with the following

Any laminations or inclusions extending into the face or bevel of the pipe shall be classified as a

Dec. 2020 IPS

17

If specified by the purchaser, for a set of three test pieces, the minimum average and individual shear fracture area for each test shall be at least 75 % in the HAZ and 50 % in the weld, at the test

in Table 29.


DWT test shall be carried out for all welded pipes with D ≥ 406 mm (16 in.). If specified by the purchaser, DWT test may be performed on seamless pipes.

For each test (of a set of two test pieces), the average shear fracture area shall be C or minimum design temperature whichever is lesser. The minimum individual shear area

Full wall thickness specimens shall be used, as far as possible; Where it is not possible to test a full due to capacity limitation of testing equipment, the test temperature shall be

adjusted in accordance with API 5L3. DWT temperature reduction for a specimen with a thickness specified by the purchaser.

mperfections and Defects

Add to this clause the followings:

The external surface of all seamless pipes shall be free from scabs, laps, shells, slivers, burrs, metallurgical tears and sharp edged discontinuities that may interfere with the application of thin film [e.g. fusion bonded epoxy (FBE)] coatings, and multi-layer coatings where FBE forms the first layer.

Add this clause as the following:

The pipe shall be substantially free of loose scale as assessed by the inspector.

The existing paragraphs shall be deleted and replaced with the followings:

Undercuts in SAW pipe shall be investigated, classified, and treated as following:

Undercuts that have a depth ≤ 0.4 mm (0.008 in.) are acceptable, regardless of length, and shall be treated in accordance with Clause C.1.

Undercuts that have a depth > 0.4 mm (0.008 in.) but ≤ 0.8 mm (0.031 in.)they are treated in accordance with Clause C.2 and provided that:

1) their individual lengths are ≤ 0.5t,

2) their individual depths are ≤ 0.1t, and

3) there are no more than two such undercuts in any 300 mm (11.811 in.) length of weld.

Undercuts that exceed the limits specified in item "b" shall be classified as defects and shall be Clause C.3.

Undercuts can best be located visually.

Undercuts which are coincident at inside and outside weld are not permitted.

Undercut repairs after pipe expansion is not accepted.

The existing paragraph shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

ny laminations or inclusions extending into the face or bevel of the pipe shall be classified as a

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

If specified by the purchaser, for a set of three test pieces, the minimum average and individual shear fracture area for each test shall be at least 75 % in the HAZ and 50 % in the weld, at the test

≥ 406 mm (16 in.). If specified by the

For each test (of a set of two test pieces), the average shear fracture area shall be ≥ 85 %, based The minimum individual shear area

Where it is not possible to test a full , the test temperature shall be

reduction for a specimen with a thickness

from scabs, laps, shells, slivers, burrs, metallurgical tears and sharp edged discontinuities that may interfere with the application of thin film

layer coatings where FBE forms the first layer.

ssified, and treated as following:

are acceptable, regardless of length, and shall

(0.031 in.) are acceptable

length of weld.

shall be classified as defects and shall be

nd outside weld are not permitted.

ny laminations or inclusions extending into the face or bevel of the pipe shall be classified as a

defect. Pipes that contain such defects shall be rejected or cut back until no such lamination or inclusion is present at the pipe ends.

9.10.5 Geometric deviations


Other than for dents, geometric deviations from the normal cylindrical contour of the pipe (e.g. flat spots and peaks) that occur as a result of the pipe forming processhall be considered defects and treated in accordance withapplies only to those deviations that exceed:

a) 3.2 mm (0.126 in.) in depth (measured as the gap between the extand the prolongation of the normal contour of the pipe); or

b) 25 % of pipe diameter or 300 mm


For dents, the length in any direction shall be 300 mm (11.811 in.). The depth, measured as the gap between the extreme point of the dent and the prolongation of the normal contour of the pipe, shall

a) No sharp-bottom dents are acceptable. For sharp bottom gouges, see 9.10.7.

b) Cold formed dents without sharp bottom gouges are acceptable to a maximum depth(0.126 in.).

c) Dents > 1.6 mm (0.063 in.) (3.937 in.) at each of the pipe extremities.

Dents that exceed the specified limits shall be considered defects and shall be treated in accordance with subclauses "b" or "c" of Clause C.3

9.10.6 Hard spots


The hardness is limited to 27 Pipes that contain such defectsC.3.

Note 1: If specified by the purchaser, automatic online methods (e.g. eddy current, ...) should be used to detect hard spots as full

Note 2: Rolling marks (with a suitable frequency not more than once per each ten test unit)surface imperfections (when occurreddevice; Destructive sampling may be requested by ins

9.10.7 Other surface imperfections


d) All sharp-bottom imperfections shall be considered as unacceptable defects, regardless of

9.11 Dimensions, mass and to

9.11.3.2 The existing clause shall be deleted and

The tolerances for wall thickness

Dec. 2020 IPS

18

contain such defects shall be rejected or cut back until no such lamination or pipe ends.


ther than for dents, geometric deviations from the normal cylindrical contour of the pipe (e.g. flat spots and peaks) that occur as a result of the pipe forming process or manufacturing operations, shall be considered defects and treated in accordance with subclauses "b" or "c" ofapplies only to those deviations that exceed:

in depth (measured as the gap between the extreme pointhe prolongation of the normal contour of the pipe); or

25 % of pipe diameter or 300 mm (11.811 in.) in length, in any direction whichever is smaller.


or dents, the length in any direction shall be ≤ 25 % of the pipe diameter with a maximum length of . The depth, measured as the gap between the extreme point of the dent and

the prolongation of the normal contour of the pipe, shall be in accordance with the following:

bottom dents are acceptable. For sharp bottom gouges, see 9.10.7.

Cold formed dents without sharp bottom gouges are acceptable to a maximum depth

are not acceptable at the pipe ends i.e. within a length of 100 mmat each of the pipe extremities.

Dents that exceed the specified limits shall be considered defects and shall be treated in subclauses "b" or "c" of Clause C.3.


HRC, 275 HV10 or 260 HBW, based upon indis shall be treated in accordance with subclauses "b" or "c" of Clause

purchaser, automatic online methods (e.g. eddy current, ...) should be full-body inspection.

(with a suitable frequency not more than once per each ten test unit)occurred) should be checked for hardness with a portable hardness

device; Destructive sampling may be requested by inspector with COMPANY's approval.

surface imperfections


bottom imperfections shall be considered as unacceptable defects, regardless of

olerances


The tolerances for wall thickness shall be as given in Table 11.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

contain such defects shall be rejected or cut back until no such lamination or


ther than for dents, geometric deviations from the normal cylindrical contour of the pipe (e.g. flat s or manufacturing operations,

subclauses "b" or "c" of Clause C.3. This

reme point of the deviation

any direction whichever is smaller.


≤ 25 % of the pipe diameter with a maximum length of . The depth, measured as the gap between the extreme point of the dent and

be in accordance with the following:

bottom dents are acceptable. For sharp bottom gouges, see 9.10.7.

Cold formed dents without sharp bottom gouges are acceptable to a maximum depth of 3.2 mm

are not acceptable at the pipe ends i.e. within a length of 100 mm

Dents that exceed the specified limits shall be considered defects and shall be treated in

ividual indentations. subclauses "b" or "c" of Clause

purchaser, automatic online methods (e.g. eddy current, ...) should be

(with a suitable frequency not more than once per each ten test unit) and hardness with a portable hardness

pector with COMPANY's approval.

bottom imperfections shall be considered as unacceptable defects, regardless of depth.

replaced with the following:

9.11.3.3 Add to this clause the followings

For 12 m random length pipes (in Table 12), minimum requirements shall be considered as follows:

Unless otherwise specified by tless than 11.6 m with a minimum of 95% of pipes between 11 and 12.2 m in length. No pipe shall be less than 10 m in length. No pipe shall be greater than 12.3 m in length.

Note 1: Unless otherwise specified by purchaser,

Note 2: Purchaser may be accept a specified quantity of pipes (generally equal and less than 0.5% of all pipes or others at COMPANY's discretion) with lengths minimum 10 m to maximum 12.3 m).

Note 3: For heavy wall seamless pipe, where supply of the pipe lengths stated above may not be possible, the purchaser and the manufacturer shall agree on an alternative pipe length.


The tolerances for straightness shall be as following:

a) The total deviation from a straight line, over the entire pipe length, shall be length, as shown in Figure 1.

b) The local deviation from a straight line at each end of 1 m (4 ft) portion at each pipe end shall be ≤ 3.0 mm (0.12 in) as shown in Figure 2.

The existing Table 11 shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

Table

Wall Thickness (t)

≤ 4.0 (0.157)

> 4.0 (0.157) to <

≥ 25.0 (0.984)

≤ 5.0 (0.197

> 5.0 (0.197) to <

> 10.0 (0.394) to

≥ 15.0 (0.591)

a. If the purchase order specifies a minus tolerance for wall thickness smaller than the applicable value given in this table, the plusby an amount sufficient to maintain the applicable tolerance range.

b. For pipe with D ≥ 355.6 mm (14.000 in.) and tolerance locally may exceed the plusprovided that the plus tolerance for mass (see 9.14) is not exceeded.

c. The plus tolerance for wall thickness does not apply to the weld area.

d. See 9.13.2 for additional restrictions

Dec. 2020 IPS

19

Add to this clause the followings:


by the purchase, the average length of pipes in one order shall be not less than 11.6 m with a minimum of 95% of pipes between 11 and 12.2 m in length. No pipe shall be less than 10 m in length. No pipe shall be greater than 12.3 m in length.

se specified by purchaser, 12 m random length pipes shall be ordered.

Purchaser may be accept a specified quantity of pipes (generally equal and less than 0.5% of all pipes or others at COMPANY's discretion) with lengths outside the above limits (i.e minimum 10 m to maximum 12.3 m).

For heavy wall seamless pipe, where supply of the pipe lengths stated above may not be possible, the purchaser and the manufacturer shall agree on an alternative pipe length.


The tolerances for straightness shall be as following:

The total deviation from a straight line, over the entire pipe length, shall be 1.

The local deviation from a straight line at each end of 1 m (4 ft) portion at each pipe end shall ≤ 3.0 mm (0.12 in) as shown in Figure 2.


able 11 - Tolerances for wall thickness

(t) mm (in) Tolerances a

mm (in

SMLS Pipe b

157) - 0.5 (0.020) to + 0.6 (0.024)

< 25.0 (0.984) - 0.10 t to + 0.150 t

984) ± 0.10 t

Welded Pipe c,d

0.197) ± 0.5 (0.020)

< 10.0 (0.394) ± 0.10 t

o < 15.0 (0.591) - 1 (0.039) to + 0.10

591) - 1 (0.039) to + 1.5 (0.059)

the purchase order specifies a minus tolerance for wall thickness smaller than the applicable value given in this table, the plus tolerance for wall thickness shall be increased by an amount sufficient to maintain the applicable tolerance range.

355.6 mm (14.000 in.) and t ≥ 25.0 mm (0.984 in.), the wall thickness tolerance locally may exceed the plus tolerance for wall thickness by an additional 0.05provided that the plus tolerance for mass (see 9.14) is not exceeded.

The plus tolerance for wall thickness does not apply to the weld area.

See 9.13.2 for additional restrictions.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)


chase, the average length of pipes in one order shall be not less than 11.6 m with a minimum of 95% of pipes between 11 and 12.2 m in length. No pipe shall be

12 m random length pipes shall be ordered.

Purchaser may be accept a specified quantity of pipes (generally equal and less than outside the above limits (i.e

For heavy wall seamless pipe, where supply of the pipe lengths stated above may not be possible, the purchaser and the manufacturer shall agree on an alternative pipe length.


≤ 0.15% of the pipe

The local deviation from a straight line at each end of 1 m (4 ft) portion at each pipe end shall

in)

024)

t

0 t

(0.059)

the purchase order specifies a minus tolerance for wall thickness smaller than the tolerance for wall thickness shall be increased

25.0 mm (0.984 in.), the wall thickness tolerance for wall thickness by an additional 0.05t,

9.12 Finish of Pipe Ends

9.12.5.2 Add to this clause the following

a) Beveling shall be carried out by machining only.

b) Any repair by grinding on the bevel edge, further to machine beveling, shall require fullre-beveling.


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaserends shall be beveled as shown in

Figure.10 - End preparation for pipe with a thickness over than 22 mm (7/8 in)

9.13 Tolerances for the Weld

9.13.1 Radial offset of strip/plate

The existing Table 14 shall be deleted and

For SAW pipes, the maximum radial offset shall be 10% of the nominal wall thickness of the pipe, with a maximum of 1.5 mm.

9.13.2 Height of the flash or w

9.13.2.1 The existing clause and Table 15 shall

For HFW pipe, the following shall apply:

a) The external flash shall be trimmed essentially flush with the pipe surface, with no visually noticeable radial step.

b) The internal flash shall not extend above the 0.05t [max 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)].

c) The trimming shall not reduce the wall thickness to below the minimum permissible wall thickness (Table11).

d) The groove resulting from the trimming shall have a smootwithout notches, with a maximum depth of 0.05t.


a) Welds shall have a regular finish, merge smoothly into the base material and shall not extend beyond the original joint preparation by more than 8 mm (0.31 in.).

During MPQT, a sample of the weld cross section macro shall be retained as a standard sample of acceptable cap profile at the MPS stage.

Dec. 2020 IPS

20

the following:

carried out by machining only.

grinding on the bevel edge, further to machine beveling, shall require full

as the following:

specified by the purchaser, for wall thickness greater than 22shown in Figure.10 of this supplementary.

End preparation for pipe with a thickness over than 22 mm (7/8 in)

Seam

late edges

able 14 shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

ipes, the maximum radial offset shall be 10% of the nominal wall thickness of the pipe,

weld bead/reinforcement

The existing clause and Table 15 shall be deleted and replaced with the following

pipe, the following shall apply:

The external flash shall be trimmed essentially flush with the pipe surface, with no visually

The internal flash shall not extend above the contour of the pipe by more than0.05t [max 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)].

The trimming shall not reduce the wall thickness to below the minimum permissible wall thickness

The groove resulting from the trimming shall have a smooth transition to the base material without notches, with a maximum depth of 0.05t.


Welds shall have a regular finish, merge smoothly into the base material and shall not extend beyond the original joint preparation by more than 8 mm (0.31 in.).

sample of the weld cross section macro shall be retained as a standard sample profile at the MPS stage.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

grinding on the bevel edge, further to machine beveling, shall require full

22 mm (7/8 in), the

End preparation for pipe with a thickness over than 22 mm (7/8 in)

ipes, the maximum radial offset shall be 10% of the nominal wall thickness of the pipe,

be deleted and replaced with the following:

The external flash shall be trimmed essentially flush with the pipe surface, with no visually

contour of the pipe by more than 0.3 mm (0.01 in.) +

The trimming shall not reduce the wall thickness to below the minimum permissible wall thickness

h transition to the base material


Welds shall have a regular finish, merge smoothly into the base material and shall not extend

sample of the weld cross section macro shall be retained as a standard sample

b) For a distance of at least 100 mm (ground flush to -0.0 mm, +0.5 mm (0.02 in.) from the original contour of the pipe. For the remainder of the pipe, the inside weld bead shall not extend Table 16 from adjacent pipe surface.

c) For a distance of at least 150 mm (5.906 in.) from each pipe end, the outside weld bead shall be ground to a height -0.0 mm, +0.5 mm (0.02 remainder of the pipe, the outside weld bead shall not extend outside the applicable value given in Table 16 from adjacent pipe surface.

d) When grinding seams, the transition between the base material to the pipe body shall be smooth without a visually noticeable step. The outside pipe diameter contour shall be maintained, avoiding grinding flat.

e) Removal of pipe ends outside and inside weafter expansion, however shall be carried out before hydrostatic testing.

f) Weld concavity is not permitted.

The existing Table 16 shall be deleted and replaced with the following

Table 16 - Permissible

Specified wall thicknesst

mm (in)

≤13,0 (0.512)

>13,0 (0.512)

a. At the option of the manufacturer to acceptable heights.

9.13.3 Misalignment of the weld beads


Misalignment of the weld beads of SAW pipe [see Figure 4 d)] shall not be cause for rejection if it is within the limits specified in this section, and provided that complete penetration and complete fusion have been achieved as indicated by nondestructive examination and as demmacro examination.

The maximum misalignment of the weld beads shall not exceed 3 mm (0.1 in.) for pipe with specified wall thickness t ≤ 20 mm (0.8 in.) or 4 mm (0.16 in.) for t > 20 mm (0.8 in.).

For SAW pipes, the width of overlap, measured with a straight line perpendicular to the radial direction, shall be minimum ¼ t or 5 m

If specified by the purchaserequipment is deemed insufficient to follow the pipe rotation, the weld penetration shall be visually checked at both pipe ends on every pipe, by chemical etching on the machined weld sections.

Dec. 2020 IPS

21

For a distance of at least 100 mm (3.937 in.) from each pipe end, the inside weld bead shall be 0.0 mm, +0.5 mm (0.02 in.) from the original contour of the pipe. For the

the inside weld bead shall not extend outside the applicable value given in pipe surface.

For a distance of at least 150 mm (5.906 in.) from each pipe end, the outside weld bead shall be 0.0 mm, +0.5 mm (0.02 in.) from the original contour of the pipe. For the

remainder of the pipe, the outside weld bead shall not extend outside the applicable value given in Table 16 from adjacent pipe surface.

When grinding seams, the transition between the base material to the pipe body shall be smooth without a visually noticeable step. The outside pipe diameter contour shall be maintained,

Removal of pipe ends outside and inside weld beads using grinding wheels may be carried out after expansion, however shall be carried out before hydrostatic testing.

Weld concavity is not permitted.


Permissible weld bead height for SAW pipes (except at pipe

ess

Weld bead height a mm (in) ma

Internal bead Ex

Min. Max. Min.

0.5 (0.02) 2.5 (0.098) 0.5 (0.02)

0.5 (0.02) 3 (0.118) 0.5 (0.02)

and accepted by the purchaser, weld beads higher than perm

weld beads of SAW pipe


Misalignment of the weld beads of SAW pipe [see Figure 4 d)] shall not be cause for rejection if it is within the limits specified in this section, and provided that complete penetration and complete

been achieved as indicated by nondestructive examination and as dem

The maximum misalignment of the weld beads shall not exceed 3 mm (0.1 in.) for pipe with ≤ 20 mm (0.8 in.) or 4 mm (0.16 in.) for pipe with specified wall thickness

For SAW pipes, the width of overlap, measured with a straight line perpendicular to the radial t or 5 mm (0.2 in.), whichever is less.

by the purchaser, when the seam tracking system associated with the welding equipment is deemed insufficient to follow the pipe rotation, the weld penetration shall be visually checked at both pipe ends on every pipe, by chemical etching on the machined weld sections.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

in.) from each pipe end, the inside weld bead shall be 0.0 mm, +0.5 mm (0.02 in.) from the original contour of the pipe. For the

the applicable value given in

For a distance of at least 150 mm (5.906 in.) from each pipe end, the outside weld bead shall be in.) from the original contour of the pipe. For the

remainder of the pipe, the outside weld bead shall not extend outside the applicable value given

When grinding seams, the transition between the base material to the pipe body shall be smooth without a visually noticeable step. The outside pipe diameter contour shall be maintained,

ld beads using grinding wheels may be carried out

pipe ends)

maximum

xternal bead

Max.

0.5 (0.02) 3 (0.118)

0.5 (0.02) 3 (0.118)

mitted may be ground

Misalignment of the weld beads of SAW pipe [see Figure 4 d)] shall not be cause for rejection if it is within the limits specified in this section, and provided that complete penetration and complete

been achieved as indicated by nondestructive examination and as demonstrated by

The maximum misalignment of the weld beads shall not exceed 3 mm (0.1 in.) for pipe with pipe with specified wall thickness

For SAW pipes, the width of overlap, measured with a straight line perpendicular to the radial

hen the seam tracking system associated with the welding equipment is deemed insufficient to follow the pipe rotation, the weld penetration shall be visually checked at both pipe ends on every pipe, by chemical etching on the machined weld sections.

9.13.4 Peaking


Peaking of the pipe at the weld location shall not deviate by more than 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) from the theoretical form, when measured transverse to pipe axis using inspector accepted inside and outside templates (minimum 200 mm (7.87 in.) in length or 0.25D whichever is greater) / dial gauge.

Note 1: Peaking up to 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) may be allowed for SAWH pipes.

9.13.5 Weld toe angle


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaserwelds shall not exceed 40°. It shall be measured from the tangent line of the base metal metal crossing point to the curvature of the weld bead.

9.13.6 Welding related imperfections, visual examina


Arc burns, cracks, start/stop craters, poor restart and surface porosity are not permitted.

9.13.7 Systematic imperfections


Systematic imperfections shall be reported. The source ofand corrected to ensure they do not lead to defects in subsequent production.

9.14 Tolerances for Mass

9.14.1 The existing items "a", "b" and "c"

For all pipes: +10.0%, -3.5%.

9.14.3 The existing items "a", "b"

For all grades: -1.75%.

9.15 Weldability of PSL 2 Pipe


If specified by the purchaser, weldability tests shall be performed in accordance with Appendix 2.

When weldability tests are not specified, the manufacturer may be required to submit, to the satisfaction of the purchaser, comprehensive documentation to sfinished pipe.

If specified by the purchaser, simulated post weld heat treatment (PWHT) shall be conducted during MPQT. Simulated PWHT should be 590 ºC (1094 °F) wall thickness.

9.16 Crack Tip Opening Displacement (CTOD)


If specified by the purchaser based purchaser and the minimum CTOD valuepipe, weld and HAZ locations, shall be specified by the purchaser.

Dec. 2020 IPS

22

as the following:

eaking of the pipe at the weld location shall not deviate by more than 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) from the theoretical form, when measured transverse to pipe axis using inspector accepted inside and

(minimum 200 mm (7.87 in.) in length or 0.25D whichever is greater) / dial gauge.

Peaking up to 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) may be allowed for SAWH pipes.

as the following:

specified by the purchaser, the weld toe angle for both OD and inner diameter ID welds shall not exceed 40°. It shall be measured from the tangent line of the base metal metal crossing point to the curvature of the weld bead.

related imperfections, visual examination

as the following:

rc burns, cracks, start/stop craters, poor restart and surface porosity are not permitted.

imperfections

as the following:

Systematic imperfections shall be reported. The source of the imperfections shall be investigated and corrected to ensure they do not lead to defects in subsequent production.

", "b" and "c" shall be deleted and replaced with the following

The existing items "a", "b" shall be deleted and replaced with the following

Pipe

the following:


When weldability tests are not specified, the manufacturer may be required to submit, to the satisfaction of the purchaser, comprehensive documentation to support the weldability of the

If specified by the purchaser, simulated post weld heat treatment (PWHT) shall be conducted during MPQT. Simulated PWHT should be 590 ºC (1094 °F) - 610 ºC (1130 °F) for one hour per inch of

Crack Tip Opening Displacement (CTOD) Test (for Fracture Toughness

as the following:

based on the service condition, CTOD test may be ordered by the CTOD value (from a set of three specimens) taken from each of the

at the 0 °C or minimum design temperature (whichever is lesser) by the purchaser.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

eaking of the pipe at the weld location shall not deviate by more than 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) from the theoretical form, when measured transverse to pipe axis using inspector accepted inside and

(minimum 200 mm (7.87 in.) in length or 0.25D whichever is greater) / dial gauge.

he weld toe angle for both OD and inner diameter ID welds shall not exceed 40°. It shall be measured from the tangent line of the base metal - weld

rc burns, cracks, start/stop craters, poor restart and surface porosity are not permitted.

the imperfections shall be investigated




When weldability tests are not specified, the manufacturer may be required to submit, to the upport the weldability of the

If specified by the purchaser, simulated post weld heat treatment (PWHT) shall be conducted during 610 ºC (1130 °F) for one hour per inch of

Fracture Toughness Evaluation)

, CTOD test may be ordered by the (from a set of three specimens) taken from each of the

C or minimum design temperature (whichever is lesser)

Note 1: Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, tspecimens) taken from each oftested at the 0 °C or minimum design temperature (whichever is lesser)

9.17 Hardness Survey


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser,exceeding 270 HV10 for base metal, weld, HAZ and

9.18 Spring-back Ring Test for Residual Stress Evaluation


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaserpurchaser for HFW and SAWH pipes.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser,exceed ±10 % of the specified minimum yield strength of the pipe.

Measured using diameter differences [SOURCE: ASTM E1928]

Where:

σ is the residual stress;

µ is Poisson’s ratio;

E is modulus of elasticity;

Do is average outside diameter before splitting; and

D1 is average outside diameter after splitting.

Dec. 2020 IPS

23

wise specified by the purchaser, the minimum CTOD value (from a set of three specimens) taken from each of the pipe, weld and HAZ locations, shall be 0.25 mm (0.0098 in),

C or minimum design temperature (whichever is lesser) given in the order form.

as the following:

wise specified by the purchaser, finished pipes shall have a hardness level not exceeding 270 HV10 for base metal, weld, HAZ and cap area.

back Ring Test for Residual Stress Evaluation

as the following:

specified by the purchaser, Spring-back Ring test may be ordered by the purchaser for HFW and SAWH pipes.

wise specified by the purchaser, the residual stress, as defined in Figof the specified minimum yield strength of the pipe.

� � �� Measured using diameter differences [SOURCE: ASTM E1928]

� � ��

Measured using the opening x

is average outside diameter before splitting; and

is average outside diameter after splitting.

Figure.11 - Spring-back Ring Test

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

value (from a set of three the pipe, weld and HAZ locations, shall be 0.25 mm (0.0098 in),

given in the order form.

finished pipes shall have a hardness level not

back Ring test may be ordered by the

he residual stress, as defined in Figure.11, shall not

Measured using diameter differences [SOURCE: ASTM E1928]

9.19 Macrographic and Metallographic Examination


In addition to tests in Clause 8.3.3 of this standardthe following requirements shall be considered. criteria for all following requirements, results of the manufacturing procedure qualification (MPQT) tests and shall be applied in production.

The macro and metallographic examination shall be documented by macro and micrographs at sufficient magnification (e.g. X10, X100, and X400) and resolution to demonstrate that the base metal, and the weld metal quality meet the requ

The macro section on an SAW seam shall show the weld merging smoothly into the base material without weld defects, in accordance with ISO 5817 level C.

For SAW seam and HAZ areas, any untempered martensite found shall be brought to the attention of the purchaser for evaluation.

Additional requirements specific to HFW pipes are as f

a) Metallographic examination of the HFW seam shall demonstrate that no detrimental oxides, inclusions and untempered martensite from t

b) The manufacturer shall specifyinformation and monitor during manufacturing:

− Width and depth of heat treated zoneaffected zone has been heat treated over the full wall thickness and is free of defects. Furthermore, heat treatment procedurefrequency shall be specified.

− Grain size (refer to ASTM E112) and microstruASTM No.7 and finer.

− Welding parameters such as electric current, voltage, wroller force, welding frequency and welding temperature

− Maximum cold reducing and maximum seam misalignment

− Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, during MPQT, the manufacturer shall approve that the heated surface layer throughout strip(coil) wall thickness will go out from weld seam during welding and resulted in external and internal upset height totally (i.e. external and internal extruded material) (see Figure.12).

− During MPQT, deformation angle (i.e. thedisplaced from the horizontal) or other means of assessment of deformation or squeeze pressure during welding, as agreed with the purchaser. Metallographic examination shall include an assessment of the e.g. deformation angle (see Figure.1

Note 1: Various techniques can be used for revealing and measuring metal flow distortion. Some methods that have proven successful individu

− saturated picric acid etchant in distilled water.

− specimens taken from a small pipe sample in which the

− use of an optical comparator or profile projector.

Dec. 2020 IPS

24

9.19 Macrographic and Metallographic Examination

as the following:

lause 8.3.3 of this standard and unless otherwise specified by the purchaser,equirements shall be considered. The manufacturer shall produce acceptance

requirements, subject to acceptance by the purchaser, based on the results of the manufacturing procedure qualification (MPQT) tests and shall be applied in

The macro and metallographic examination shall be documented by macro and micrographs at agnification (e.g. X10, X100, and X400) and resolution to demonstrate that the base

metal, and the weld metal quality meet the requirements of this specification.

The macro section on an SAW seam shall show the weld merging smoothly into the base material cordance with ISO 5817 level C.

For SAW seam and HAZ areas, any untempered martensite found shall be brought to the attention of the purchaser for evaluation.

Additional requirements specific to HFW pipes are as follows:

lographic examination of the HFW seam shall demonstrate that no detrimental oxides, inclusions and untempered martensite from the welding process are present.

specify (as agreed with the purchaser) and record the following and monitor during manufacturing:

and depth of heat treated zone; it shall be demonstrated that the entire weld heat affected zone has been heat treated over the full wall thickness and is free of defects. Furthermore, heat treatment procedure parameters such as temperature range, duration and frequency shall be specified.

− Grain size (refer to ASTM E112) and microstructure of heat treated weld area

Welding parameters such as electric current, voltage, welding speed, heat input, welding roller force, welding frequency and welding temperature.

aximum cold reducing and maximum seam misalignment.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, during MPQT, the manufacturer shall approve face layer throughout strip(coil) wall thickness will go out from weld seam

during welding and resulted in external and internal upset height totally (i.e. external and material) (see Figure.12).

eformation angle (i.e. the angle by which the material adjacent to the weld is displaced from the horizontal) or other means of assessment of deformation or squeeze pressure during welding, as agreed with the purchaser. Metallographic examination shall include an assessment of the level of deformation achieved during the welding operation, e.g. deformation angle (see Figure.13).

Various techniques can be used for revealing and measuring metal flow distortion. Some methods that have proven successful individually or in combination include:

cid etchant in distilled water.

− specimens taken from a small pipe sample in which the seam has not been heat

omparator or profile projector.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

specified by the purchaser, The manufacturer shall produce acceptance

subject to acceptance by the purchaser, based on the results of the manufacturing procedure qualification (MPQT) tests and shall be applied in

The macro and metallographic examination shall be documented by macro and micrographs at agnification (e.g. X10, X100, and X400) and resolution to demonstrate that the base

The macro section on an SAW seam shall show the weld merging smoothly into the base material

For SAW seam and HAZ areas, any untempered martensite found shall be brought to the

lographic examination of the HFW seam shall demonstrate that no detrimental oxides, he welding process are present.

record the following

shall be demonstrated that the entire weld heat affected zone has been heat treated over the full wall thickness and is free of defects.

parameters such as temperature range, duration and

cture of heat treated weld area; It should be

elding speed, heat input, welding

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, during MPQT, the manufacturer shall approve face layer throughout strip(coil) wall thickness will go out from weld seam

during welding and resulted in external and internal upset height totally (i.e. external and

angle by which the material adjacent to the weld is displaced from the horizontal) or other means of assessment of deformation or squeeze pressure during welding, as agreed with the purchaser. Metallographic examination shall

level of deformation achieved during the welding operation,

Various techniques can be used for revealing and measuring metal flow distortion. Some

seam has not been heat-treated.

Figure 12

Figure 13 − Deformation a

10. INSPECTION

10.1 Types of Inspection and Inspection Documents

10.1.3 Inspection documents


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser:

The manufacturer shall issue an Inspection Certificate 3.1.B in accordance withIf specified by the purchaser, an Inspection Certificate 3.1.A or 3.1.C in accordance with10474:1991 or an Inspection Certificate 3.2 in accordance with EN 10204:2004 shall be issued.

Final inspection reports shall be supplied as per the MPS and as a minimum shall be supplied in searchable electronic format e.g. PDF.

If specified by the purchaser, tcompressive stress strain, CTODbe imported into a spreadsheet file.

The manufacturer shall prepareproduction; the documents shall cover at least the following:

a) Flow diagram of all manufacturing stages associated with a summary key action in each stage shall be specified in MPQT and MPS

b) All related tests and evaluations associated with the recriteria, frequency, action to nonconformityspecified in QCP.

c) Presence schedule of inspector throughout manufactuITP.

Dec. 2020 IPS

25

Figure 12 − External and internal upset

− Deformation angle and metal flow distortion

of Inspection and Inspection Documents

for PSL 2 pipe


specified by the purchaser:

The manufacturer shall issue an Inspection Certificate 3.1.B in accordance with, an Inspection Certificate 3.1.A or 3.1.C in accordance with

Certificate 3.2 in accordance with EN 10204:2004 shall be issued.

Final inspection reports shall be supplied as per the MPS and as a minimum shall be supplied in ble electronic format e.g. PDF.

If specified by the purchaser, testing in which data curves are developed (e.g. tensile tests, compressive stress strain, CTOD, hydrostatic...) shall be supplied in native data formats that can be imported into a spreadsheet file.

The manufacturer shall prepare documents as MPQT, MPS, QCP and ITP before startdocuments shall cover at least the following:

Flow diagram of all manufacturing stages associated with a summary key action in each stage and MPS.

All related tests and evaluations associated with the relevant standard clause, acceptance action to nonconformity and type of report (e.g. table, curve...)

Presence schedule of inspector throughout manufacturing stages and tests shall be

IPS-M-PI-190(4)


The manufacturer shall issue an Inspection Certificate 3.1.B in accordance with ISO 10474:1991. , an Inspection Certificate 3.1.A or 3.1.C in accordance with ISO

Certificate 3.2 in accordance with EN 10204:2004 shall be issued.

Final inspection reports shall be supplied as per the MPS and as a minimum shall be supplied in

urves are developed (e.g. tensile tests, ) shall be supplied in native data formats that can

MPS, QCP and ITP before starting

Flow diagram of all manufacturing stages associated with a summary key action in each stage

levant standard clause, acceptance and type of report (e.g. table, curve...) shall be

ring stages and tests shall be specified in

10.2 Specific Inspection

10.2.1 Inspection frequency

10.2.1.2. The existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following

For PSL 2 pipe, the inspection frequencfailure, the test specimen and the remaining part of tested pipes shall be stored by the manufacturer until Root Cause

Note 1: If specified by the purchaser based on may be increased.

10.2.2 Samples and test pieces


Samples shall be taken from finished pipe expansion, formed and welded.

Each specimen shall be prepared in a manner that does not intentionally enhance their mechanical properties.

10.2.3 Samples and test pieces

10.2.3.2 Test pieces for the tensile test

The existing footnote "c" of Table 20

Transverse test pieces shall be used. If transverslimitations, longitudinal test pieces should be used in agreement by purchaser.

Dec. 2020 IPS

26


PSL 2 pipe, the inspection frequency shall be as given in Table 18 as following.failure, the test specimen and the remaining part of tested pipes shall be stored by the

ause Analysis (RCA) is completed to the satisfaction of the purchaser.

If specified by the purchaser based on the service condition, test frequency in Table 18

est pieces for product analysis


Samples shall be taken from finished pipe in the final condition i.e. after heat treatment, cold

Each specimen shall be prepared in a manner that does not intentionally enhance their mechanical

test pieces for mechanical tests

tensile test

of Table 20 shall be deleted and replaced with the following

be used. If transverse test pieces is not practical limitations, longitudinal test pieces should be used in agreement by purchaser.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)


y shall be as given in Table 18 as following. In case of test failure, the test specimen and the remaining part of tested pipes shall be stored by the

nalysis (RCA) is completed to the satisfaction of the purchaser.

service condition, test frequency in Table 18

in the final condition i.e. after heat treatment, cold

Each specimen shall be prepared in a manner that does not intentionally enhance their mechanical


due to dimensional


Table

No. Type of inspection

1 Heat analysis.

2 Product analysis.

3 Tensile testing of the pipe body

4 If specified by the purchaser, tensile testing at elevated temperature.

5 Tensile testing of the seam weld of welded pipe.

6 Macrographic and metallographic testing of the pipe body.

7 Macrographic and metallographic testing of the seam weld of welded pipe.

8 Macrographic and metallographic testing of the seam weld of welded pipe.

9 Hardness testing of the pipe body.

10 Hardness testing of the seam weld of welded pipe.

11 Hardness testing of the seam weld of welded pipe.

12 Hardness testing of hard spots in cold-formed welded pipe

13 Spring−back test.

14 DWT testing of the pipe body of welded pipe with D ≥ 406.4 mm (16 in).

15 Guided-bend testing of the seam weld of welded pipe.

16 Flattening test of welded pipe.

Dec. 2020 IPS

27

existing Table 18 shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

18 - Inspection frequency for PSL 2 pipe

Type of pipe Frequency of inspection

(Production)

All pipes. One analysis per heat of steel. One analysis per heat of steel.

All pipes. One analyses per test unit. Once for each selected test pipe.

All pipes. Once per test unit of pipes with the same cold-expansion ratio

a,b.

Once for each selected test pipe with the same coldratio D ≥ 219.1 mm (8.625 in.) shall be transvers and longitudinal directionand the results shall be within criteria for ordered pipe


a,b.

Once for each selected test pipe with ratio

HFW, SAW. Once per test unit of pipes with the same cold-expansion ratio

a,b.

Once for each selected test pipe with the same coldratio

All pipes.

Once per test unit of pipes with the same cold-expansion ratio

a.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, banding and inclusion evaluations shall be performed once per each ten heat.


SAW.


a

and at least once per operating shift.


HFW.


a

and at least Once per operating shift.


All pipes Once per test unit of pipes with the same cold-expansion ratio

a.


SAW. Once per test unit of pipes with the same cold-expansion ratio

a.


HFW.


a



HFW, SAW. Any hard spot. Any hard spottest pipe.

HFW, SAWH.

Once per each slitted strip(coil) (See 8.3.2). If slitting is not performed, this test shall be done Once per each ten test unit.



a .

Once for each selected test pipe with the same coldratioFull transition curve plotted against temperature of -60

SAW.

Once per test unit of not more than 50 lengths of pipes with the same cold-expansion ratio

a,b .


HFW. As per Figure 6. As per Figure 6test pipe.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

Frequency of inspection

(First-day tests / MPQT) e

One analysis per heat of steel.

Once for each selected test pipe.

Once for each selected test pipe with the same cold-expansion ratio

a,b (Tensile test for pipe with

≥ 219.1 mm (8.625 in.) shall be transvers and longitudinal direction and the results shall be within criteria for ordered pipe).


a,b.


a,b.


a.


a.


a.


a.


a.


a.

Any hard spot for each selected test pipe.


a.


a .

Full transition curve plotted against temperature of 20, 0, -20, -40 and 60 ˚C.


a,b .

As per Figure 6, for each selected test pipe.

Table 18 – Inspection frequency for PSL 2 pipe

No. Type of inspection

17 CVN impact testing of the pipe body.

18 CVN impact testing of the seam weld and HAZ of welded pipe.

19 CVN impact testing of the seam weld of welded pipe.

20 If specified by the purchaser, CTOD of weld metal, HAZ and base material.

21 Hydrostatic testing.

22 Visual inspection.

23 Pipe diameter

24 Out-of -roundness, Out of- squarness and straightness.

25 Wall thickness measurement.

26 Other dimensional testing.

27 Weighing of pipe.

28 Length.

29 Non-destructive inspection

a. The cold-expansion ratio (if applicable) is designated by the manufacturer, and is derived using the designated beforeoutside diameter or circumference and the aftercold-expansion ratio of more than 0.002 requires the creation of a new test unit.

b. Pipe produced by each welding machine shall be tested at least once per week.

c. Other tests and requirements for MPQT shall be considered according to Annex B and everywhere throughout this standard.

10.2.3.3 Test pieces for the CVN

The existing "NOTE" shall be deleted and replaced with the following

Note: Pipe body impact testing shall be carried out using the largest possible transverse specimens without or with tapered ends (due to dimensional limitations) as Table 22. Where the pipe dimensions are insufficient to extract transverse specimens, impact testthe largest possible longitudinal specimens. The required energy for longitudinal specimens shall be at least 50% higher than required energy for transverse specimens considering ratio factor as Clause 9.8.1.1. For weld and HAZ

Dec. 2020 IPS

28

Inspection frequency for PSL 2 pipe (continued)

Type of pipe Frequency of inspection

(Production)


a,b,c .

Once for each selected test pipe with the same colda,b . A full transition curve plotted against temperature of 20, 0, 40, and

SAW. Once per test unit of pipes with the same cold-expansion ratio

a,b,c .


HFW.


a,b,c



All pipes. Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, once per each ten heat.


All pipes. Each pipe. Each selected test pipe.


All pipes Each pipe.

Each selected test pipe.

All pipes Each pipe. Each selected test pipe.

All pipes Each pipe. Each selected test pipe.

All pipes.

At least once per 4 hours operating shift plus. Furthermore, it may be random testing, with the details left to the discretion of the manufacturer.



All pipes. Each length of pipe. Each selected test pipe.

All pipes Each pipe in accordance with Annex E or Annex K as specified by the purchaser.

Each selected test pipe.accordance with Annex E or Annex K as specified by the purchaser.

expansion ratio (if applicable) is designated by the manufacturer, and is derived using the designated beforeoutside diameter or circumference and the after-expansion outside diameter or circumference. An increase or decrease in the

expansion ratio of more than 0.002 requires the creation of a new test unit.

Pipe produced by each welding machine shall be tested at least once per week.

ments for MPQT shall be considered according to Annex B and everywhere throughout this standard.

ieces for the CVN impact test

The existing "NOTE" shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

Pipe body impact testing shall be carried out using the largest possible transverse specimens without or with tapered ends (due to dimensional limitations) as Table 22. Where the pipe dimensions are insufficient to extract transverse specimens, impact testing shall be carried out using the largest possible longitudinal specimens. The required energy for longitudinal specimens shall be at least 50% higher than required energy for transverse specimens considering ratio factor as

AZ impact tests, only transverse specimens shall be used.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

(continued)

Frequency of inspection

(First-day tests / MPQT) e

Once for each selected test pipe with the same cold-expansion ratio a,b . A full transition curve plotted

against temperature of 20, 0, -20, - 40, and -60˚C.


a,b,c.


a,b,c.


a.









Each selected test pipe.in accordance with Annex E or Annex K as specified by the purchaser.

expansion ratio (if applicable) is designated by the manufacturer, and is derived using the designated before-expansion on outside diameter or circumference. An increase or decrease in the

ments for MPQT shall be considered according to Annex B and everywhere throughout this standard.

Pipe body impact testing shall be carried out using the largest possible transverse specimens without or with tapered ends (due to dimensional limitations) as Table 22. Where the pipe

ing shall be carried out using the largest possible longitudinal specimens. The required energy for longitudinal specimens shall be at least 50% higher than required energy for transverse specimens considering ratio factor as

impact tests, only transverse specimens shall be used.

10.2.3.3.1 Seamless pipes


For test pieces taken from seamless pipes, the specimen’s axis shall be aligned with the mid-thickness of the pipe.

During MPQT, for seamless line pipe with wall thickness greater than 20 mm (0.79 in.), Charpy impact testing shall be done on specimens taken from the ID and OD.

During MPQT, for seamless line pipe with wall thickness greater than 35 mm (1.38 in.), Charpy impact testing shall be done on specimens taken from ID, mid

Coupons/specimens shall not be flattened.

10.2.3.3.2 Welded pipes


During MPQT, the axis of the notch shall be taken as close as practicable to the weld metal, the fusion line (FL) that consists of 50% weld metal and 50% HAZ, and the fusion line + 2 mm (0.08 in.) (FL2). The specimen shall be taken as close as practicable to the OD surf2 mm (0.08 in.) of the outer surface of the pipe.

During MPQT, for SAW pipe with wall thickness equal to or greater than 25 mm (1 in.), additional testing [weld metal, fusion line and fusion line +2 mm (0.08 in.)] shall be donpracticable to the ID surface of the pipe, i.e. within 2 mm (0.08 in.) of the inner surface of the pipe.

During MPQT, for HFW during MPQshown in Figure 14. In production, only posi

Key

1 On the weld line (±0.25 mm (0.01 in.)).

2 On the midway of heat treated area

3 On the transition between base metal and heat

Figure 14

10.2.3.8 Test pieces for CTOD



Test pieces for a CTOD test sha

a) Test pieces shall be taken from the weld metal, the HAZ and the parent metal.

Dec. 2020 IPS

29


For test pieces taken from seamless pipes, the specimen’s axis shall be aligned with the

or seamless line pipe with wall thickness greater than 20 mm (0.79 in.), Charpy impact testing shall be done on specimens taken from the ID and OD.

or seamless line pipe with wall thickness greater than 35 mm (1.38 in.), Charpy testing shall be done on specimens taken from ID, mid-wall and OD.

Coupons/specimens shall not be flattened.


he axis of the notch shall be taken as close as practicable to the weld metal, the fusion line (FL) that consists of 50% weld metal and 50% HAZ, and the fusion line + 2 mm (0.08 in.) (FL2). The specimen shall be taken as close as practicable to the OD surface of the pipe, i.e. within 2 mm (0.08 in.) of the outer surface of the pipe.

or SAW pipe with wall thickness equal to or greater than 25 mm (1 in.), additional testing [weld metal, fusion line and fusion line +2 mm (0.08 in.)] shall be donpracticable to the ID surface of the pipe, i.e. within 2 mm (0.08 in.) of the inner surface of the pipe.

or HFW during MPQT Charpy testing shall be sampled in positions 1, 2 and 3 as shown in Figure 14. In production, only positions 1 and 2 shall be sampled.

eld line (±0.25 mm (0.01 in.)).

On the midway of heat treated area.

On the transition between base metal and heat-treated area after seam weld heat treatment

Figure 14 − CVN Testing of HFW Weld Seam

ieces for CTOD test

as the following:

wise specified by the purchaser:

Test pieces for a CTOD test shall meet the requirements below:

Test pieces shall be taken from the weld metal, the HAZ and the parent metal.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

For test pieces taken from seamless pipes, the specimen’s axis shall be aligned with the

or seamless line pipe with wall thickness greater than 20 mm (0.79 in.), Charpy

or seamless line pipe with wall thickness greater than 35 mm (1.38 in.), Charpy

he axis of the notch shall be taken as close as practicable to the weld metal, the fusion line (FL) that consists of 50% weld metal and 50% HAZ, and the fusion line + 2 mm (0.08 in.)

ace of the pipe, i.e. within

or SAW pipe with wall thickness equal to or greater than 25 mm (1 in.), additional testing [weld metal, fusion line and fusion line +2 mm (0.08 in.)] shall be done as close as practicable to the ID surface of the pipe, i.e. within 2 mm (0.08 in.) of the inner surface of the pipe.

Charpy testing shall be sampled in positions 1, 2 and 3 as

treated area after seam weld heat treatment.

Test pieces shall be taken from the weld metal, the HAZ and the parent metal.

b) Test pieces shall be prepared in accordance with ISO 12135, ISO 15653 or BS 7448

c) Test pieces shall be Bx2B through thickness notched specimens.

d) For weld metal testing, the notch axis shall be located on the weld center line.

e) For HAZ specimens, the notch axis shall be located so as to sample the fusion line.

f) The central 50 % portion of the specimen shall sample the HAZ.

g) The outer portions of the specimen

h) Test pieces for base metal shall be taken at location 180° from the weld seam andYX, per Figure 15.

i) Test pieces for weld metal and HAZ area shall be taken

The number of valid CTOD tests for each location shall be a minimum three.

Key

X parallel to rolling direction.

Y transverse to rolling direction.

N normal to weld direction.

P parallel to weld direction.

Z weld thickness direction.

Q weld thickness direction.

10.2.3.9 Test piece for spring-


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, tleast three times the outside diameter and a minimum 150 mm end effects.

10.2.3.10 Test pieces for hardness,


Sampling for hardness testing shall be as below:

a) For seamless pipe, two test pieces, 180° apart sha

Dec. 2020 IPS

30

Test pieces shall be prepared in accordance with ISO 12135, ISO 15653 or BS 7448

Test pieces shall be Bx2B through thickness notched specimens.

ting, the notch axis shall be located on the weld center line.

For HAZ specimens, the notch axis shall be located so as to sample the fusion line.

The central 50 % portion of the specimen shall sample the HAZ.

The outer portions of the specimen shall sample weld metal.

Test pieces for base metal shall be taken at location 180° from the weld seam and

Test pieces for weld metal and HAZ area shall be taken from position NP, per Figure 15

d CTOD tests for each location shall be a minimum three.

Figure 15 − CTOD Orientation

-back test

as the following:

specified by the purchaser, the length of the sample piece of tube should be at least three times the outside diameter and a minimum 150 mm (5.90 in.) long, to avoid significant

ardness, macro and metallographic examination

as the following:

ness testing shall be as below:

For seamless pipe, two test pieces, 180° apart shall be taken from finished pipe.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

Test pieces shall be prepared in accordance with ISO 12135, ISO 15653 or BS 7448-1.

ting, the notch axis shall be located on the weld center line.

For HAZ specimens, the notch axis shall be located so as to sample the fusion line.

Test pieces for base metal shall be taken at location 180° from the weld seam and have position

from position NP, per Figure 15.

he length of the sample piece of tube should be at (5.90 in.) long, to avoid significant

ll be taken from finished pipe.

b) For welded pipe, test pieces (three) shall be taken from the seam weld, and 9the seam weld.

The test pieces shall be prepared according to ISO 17639. Theperpendicular to the pipe axis.

10.2.4 Test methods

10.2.4.9 Spring-back test


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, swith ASTM E1928.

10.2.4.10 Fracture toughness


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, ISO 12135, ISO 15653 or BS 7448

10.2.5 Macrographic and metallographic


Alternative methods are not acceptable.


For HFW pipe, metallographic examination of the weld seam shall be carried out at a magnification of at least X200.

Hardness testing shall be performed as per Figure H.1.

During MPQT, hardness testing shall be performed as per Figures 16, 17 and 18using the Vickers test shall be in accordance withbase metal (i.e. at 90° and 180°), a minimum of 12 indentations shall be made for below ID and OD surfaces, and at mid-wall thickness, aspurchaser, a minimum of 12 readings shall be taken at 5 mm intervals.

Dec. 2020 IPS

31

For welded pipe, test pieces (three) shall be taken from the seam weld, and 9

The test pieces shall be prepared according to ISO 17639. The surface to be examined shall be

as the following:

wise specified by the purchaser, spring-back testing method shall be in accordance

oughness test

as the following:

wise specified by the purchaser, CTOD testing shall be performed in accordance with BS 7448-1.

etallographic test

shall be deleted and replaced with the following

ive methods are not acceptable.


examination of the weld seam shall be carried out at a magnification

Hardness testing shall be performed as per Figure H.1.

ardness testing shall be performed as per Figures 16, 17 and 18test shall be in accordance with ISO 6507-1 or ASTM E384

base metal (i.e. at 90° and 180°), a minimum of 12 indentations shall be made for below ID and OD wall thickness, as shown in Figure 16. Unless otherwise specified by the

purchaser, a minimum of 12 readings shall be taken at 5 mm intervals.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

For welded pipe, test pieces (three) shall be taken from the seam weld, and 90° and 180° from

surface to be examined shall be

back testing method shall be in accordance

CTOD testing shall be performed in accordance with


examination of the weld seam shall be carried out at a magnification

ardness testing shall be performed as per Figures 16, 17 and 18 as applicable and 1 or ASTM E384 or ASTM E92. For

base metal (i.e. at 90° and 180°), a minimum of 12 indentations shall be made for below ID and OD Unless otherwise specified by the

Notes:

1. Base material indents spacing: 2.0 mm +/

2. HAZ indents spacing: 0.5 mm -0 / +0.1 mm (0.02 in. +/

3. Weld metal indents spacing: 1.0 mm +/

Dec. 2020 IPS

32

Figure 16 − Base Material (typical)

1. Base material indents spacing: 2.0 mm +/- 0.1 mm (0.08 in. +/-0.004 in.).

0 / +0.1 mm (0.02 in. +/-0.004 in.).

3. Weld metal indents spacing: 1.0 mm +/- 0.1 mm (0.04 in. +/-0.004 in.).

Figure 17 − SAW Welds

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

Key

a = 1.0 +/- 0.1 mm (0.04 in. +/-0.004 in.).

b = 2.0 +/- 0.1 mm (0.08 in. +/-0.004 in.).

c = 5.0 +/- 0.1 mm (0.02 in. +/-0.004 in.).

10.2.6 Hydrostatic test


Each length of pipe shall withstand a basis of the specified wall thickness and including stresses from end loading, is at least 95% of the specified minimum yield strength (SMYS).

The test pressure for all sizes and types of pileakage.

The hydrostatic test shall be conducted after all manufacturing processes (including repairs and heat treatments) are completed; applicable).

The water for testing should be clean and free from any suspended or dissolved substance that can be harmful to the line pipe material.

Note 1: For HFW pipes, if specified by the purchaser based on the severity of service condition, a hydrostatic testing such that the hoop stress, calculated on the basis of the specified wall thickness and including stresses from end loading, is at least 100% of the specified minimum yield strength (SMYS).


The test configuration shall permit bleeding of trapped air prior

The equipment shall be capable of measuring a pressure variation of a minimum of 2 % of tapplied pressure.

Note 1: Test pressure shall not be less than whateve

Mill hydrostatic test pressure records shall show clearly the pipe number, date of test, applied test pressure and test duration for each pipe.

A chart of pressure records shall be

Dec. 2020 IPS

33

0.004 in.).

0.004 in.).

0.004 in.).

Figure 18 − HFW Welds


and a hydrostatic testing such that the hoop stress, calculated on the basis of the specified wall thickness and including stresses from end loading, is at least 95% of the specified minimum yield strength (SMYS).

The test pressure for all sizes and types of pipe shall be held for not less than 10 seconds without

The hydrostatic test shall be conducted after all manufacturing processes (including repairs and heat treatments) are completed; also, hydrostatic testing shall be performed after cold expansio

The water for testing should be clean and free from any suspended or dissolved substance that can be harmful to the line pipe material.

For HFW pipes, if specified by the purchaser based on the severity of service condition, a ydrostatic testing such that the hoop stress, calculated on the basis of the specified wall thickness

and including stresses from end loading, is at least 100% of the specified minimum yield strength


test configuration shall permit bleeding of trapped air prior to pressurization of the pipe.

The equipment shall be capable of measuring a pressure variation of a minimum of 2 % of t

Test pressure shall not be less than whatever calculated as clause 10.2.6.

Mill hydrostatic test pressure records shall show clearly the pipe number, date of test, applied test nd test duration for each pipe.

of pressure records shall be reported for conformance check by the inspec

IPS-M-PI-190(4)


hydrostatic testing such that the hoop stress, calculated on the basis of the specified wall thickness and including stresses from end loading, is at least 95% of the

pe shall be held for not less than 10 seconds without

The hydrostatic test shall be conducted after all manufacturing processes (including repairs and ydrostatic testing shall be performed after cold expansion (if

The water for testing should be clean and free from any suspended or dissolved substance that can

For HFW pipes, if specified by the purchaser based on the severity of service condition, a ydrostatic testing such that the hoop stress, calculated on the basis of the specified wall thickness

and including stresses from end loading, is at least 100% of the specified minimum yield strength

to pressurization of the pipe.

The equipment shall be capable of measuring a pressure variation of a minimum of 2 % of the

10.2.6.

Mill hydrostatic test pressure records shall show clearly the pipe number, date of test, applied test

inspector.

10.2.6.5 Table 26 shall be dele

10.2.6.7 This clause shall be de

10.2.7 Visual Inspection


Each pipe (body and seam weld if applicable) with an illuminance of at least 350 lx. Such inspection shall be over the entire external surface and shall cover as much of the internal surface as is practical.entire internal surface should be visually inspected.

10.2.8 Dimensional testing

10.2.8.1 The last sentence of this

For D ≥ 508 mm (20.00 in.), measurements made by circumferential tape shall govern in case of dispute.


A bar gauge, a caliper or a device that measures actual maximum and minimum diameters shall be used for measuring out-of-roundness of pipe ends. The absolute maximum and minimum OD shall be measured to determine the out


Straightness measurements shall be taken using a taut string or wire from end to end along the pipe, measuring the greatest deviation. Other equivalent methods may be used, including optical and automatic systems. The length of each pipe shall be measured wmeasuring device.

10.2.12 Retesting

Add to this clause as the following

Where one specimen fails to conform to the specified requirements, the manufacturer may elect to perform retesting in accordance with

If any test specimen fails due to some defect in the material, it may be substituted by another test specimen, with prior acceptance of the purchaser’s representative. The nature of the defect shall be made clear and the inspector shall specify additional nondestructive testing to ensure that the defect is an isolated case.

11. Marking


The quality of the paint employed for marking shall be perfectly readable for atpipes exposed to outdoor weather conditions lacquer to prevent corrosion.

11.2 Pipe Marking

11.2.1 The existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following:


Outside marking items: At least as following for all pipes:

Dec. 2020 IPS

34

eted.

deleted.


(body and seam weld if applicable) shall be visually inspected according to ISO 17637, with an illuminance of at least 350 lx. Such inspection shall be over the entire external surface and shall cover as much of the internal surface as is practical. For pipe with D ≥ 609.6 mm (24 in.), the

be visually inspected.

of this clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following

≥ 508 mm (20.00 in.), measurements made by circumferential tape shall govern in case of


A bar gauge, a caliper or a device that measures actual maximum and minimum diameters shall be roundness of pipe ends. The absolute maximum and minimum OD shall

be measured to determine the out-of-roundness.

as the following:

traightness measurements shall be taken using a taut string or wire from end to end along the pipe, measuring the greatest deviation. Other equivalent methods may be used, including optical and automatic systems. The length of each pipe shall be measured with tape or another automatic

as the following:

Where one specimen fails to conform to the specified requirements, the manufacturer may elect to perform retesting in accordance with Clauses 10.2.12.1 to 10.2.12.8 as applicable.

If any test specimen fails due to some defect in the material, it may be substituted by another test specimen, with prior acceptance of the purchaser’s representative. The nature of the defect shall be

the inspector shall specify additional nondestructive testing to ensure that the defect


The quality of the paint employed for marking shall be perfectly readable for atpipes exposed to outdoor weather conditions and marking shall be coated with a durable and legible


otherwise specified by the purchaser:

east as following for all pipes:

IPS-M-PI-190(4)


inspected according to ISO 17637, with an illuminance of at least 350 lx. Such inspection shall be over the entire external surface and

≥ 609.6 mm (24 in.), the

clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

≥ 508 mm (20.00 in.), measurements made by circumferential tape shall govern in case of

A bar gauge, a caliper or a device that measures actual maximum and minimum diameters shall be roundness of pipe ends. The absolute maximum and minimum OD shall

traightness measurements shall be taken using a taut string or wire from end to end along the pipe, measuring the greatest deviation. Other equivalent methods may be used, including optical

ith tape or another automatic

Where one specimen fails to conform to the specified requirements, the manufacturer may elect to 10.2.12.1 to 10.2.12.8 as applicable.

If any test specimen fails due to some defect in the material, it may be substituted by another test specimen, with prior acceptance of the purchaser’s representative. The nature of the defect shall be

the inspector shall specify additional nondestructive testing to ensure that the defect

The quality of the paint employed for marking shall be perfectly readable for at least a year, for shall be coated with a durable and legible


a) Name or trademark of the manufacturer.

b) Related edition of “API Spec 5L

c) API monogram certificate number

d) Specified outside diameter.

e) Specified wall thickness.

f) Pipe steel grade and Delivery condition (i.e. heat treatment type).

g) Product specification level designation (PSL).

h) Type of pipe.

i) Sour service or Non-Sour service as a

j) Tested shall be marked for specified hydrostatic test pressure.

k) Actual length of pipe.

l) Actual weight of pipe.

m) Heat number of pipe.

n) Pipe No.

o) Name of the purchaser.

p) Order number.

Inside marking items: At least as follo

a) Name or trademark of the manufacturer.

b) Pipe steel grade and Delivery condition (i.e. heat treatment type).

c) Product specification level designation (PSL).

d) Heat number of pipe.

e) Pipe No.

f) Order number.

11.2.3 The existing clause shall be deleted


a) For pipe with D≤1.900 in, the marking shall be on the outside surface at one end of each pipe.

b) For pipe with 1.900 <D<16 in, the marking shall be on the outside surface of the pia point between 450 mm and 760 mm from one of the pipe ends.

c) For pipe with D≥16 in, the marking shall be on the outside and inside surface of the pipe, starting at a point at least 150 mm from one of the pipe ends.

d) On HFW pipe, the manufacton the inside surface at each end of each pipe to mark

Note 1: For coated pipe, marking may be on the coating (not required outside surface of pipe).


Vibro-etching is not permitted.


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser the manufacturer shall apply a ring of paint as following:

1- For pipe with D<1.900 in, apply a 50 mm wide paint strip fully circumferential on the external

Dec. 2020 IPS

35

Name or trademark of the manufacturer.

API Spec 5L”, and “IPS-M-PI-190” shall be marked.

API monogram certificate number & date (If requested by COMPANY).

Specified outside diameter.

Pipe steel grade and Delivery condition (i.e. heat treatment type).

Product specification level designation (PSL).

Sour service as applicable.

Tested shall be marked for specified hydrostatic test pressure.

: At least as following for all pipes with D≥16 in:

Name or trademark of the manufacturer.

Pipe steel grade and Delivery condition (i.e. heat treatment type).

Product specification level designation (PSL).



≤1.900 in, the marking shall be on the outside surface at one end of each pipe.

For pipe with 1.900 <D<16 in, the marking shall be on the outside surface of the pia point between 450 mm and 760 mm from one of the pipe ends.

≥16 in, the marking shall be on the outside and inside surface of the pipe, starting at a point at least 150 mm from one of the pipe ends.

On HFW pipe, the manufacture shall apply a line of heat resistant white paint with ace at each end of each pipe to mark the location of the weld line.

For coated pipe, marking may be on the coating (not required outside surface of pipe).



Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser the manufacturer shall apply a ring of paint as

For pipe with D<1.900 in, apply a 50 mm wide paint strip fully circumferential on the external

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

:

≤1.900 in, the marking shall be on the outside surface at one end of each pipe.

For pipe with 1.900 <D<16 in, the marking shall be on the outside surface of the pipe, starting at

≥16 in, the marking shall be on the outside and inside surface of the pipe,

line of heat resistant white paint with 50 mm wide the location of the weld line.

For coated pipe, marking may be on the coating (not required outside surface of pipe).

:

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser the manufacturer shall apply a ring of paint as

For pipe with D<1.900 in, apply a 50 mm wide paint strip fully circumferential on the external

surface at both ends of each pipe.

2- For pipe with D≥1.900 in, apply a 50 mm wide paint strip fully circumferential on the inside surface at both ends of each pipe.

The paint color shall be as given in Table 27 if the pipe grade is applicable; for all other grades, the paint color shall be as specified by the purchaser.


Paint gra

L 245 or B

L 290 or X

L 320 or X

L 360 or X

L 390 or X

L 415 or X

L 450 or X

L 485 or X

L 555 or X

14. PIPE LOADING

14.1 General


a) All pipes shall be fitted with bevel protectors.

b) Pipe shall be bare and free of oil, grease, lacquer, antifreeze (from UT couplant) and other contaminants, such as chlorides, that adv

c) All pipe shall be handled, loaded and shipped in accordance with API RP 5L1, API RP 5LT and API RP 5LW, as applicable.

d) A procedure for handling, transport and storage detailing the proposed methods of handling, stacking during storage, method of preservation, and stackintransportation and shipment shall be submitted to the purch

14.2 Shipping


e) The manufacturer shall submit with the shipping procedures a written method to prevent salt contamination of the pipe at the receiving facility.

f) For marine shipping, the ship’s log shall be made available to the purchaser for review when the pipe is unloaded.

g) At least eight weeks prior to shipment, the manufacturer shall submit loading instructions and diagrams for review and comment, for all pipe shipped by truck or vessel.

h) When the manufacturer is responsible for handling or shipping, the purchaser’s rcomment of these loading instructions shall not relieve the manufacturer of responsibility for any

Dec. 2020 IPS

36

surface at both ends of each pipe.

≥1.900 in, apply a 50 mm wide paint strip fully circumferential on the inside h pipe.

The paint color shall be as given in Table 27 if the pipe grade is applicable; for all other grades, the paint color shall be as specified by the purchaser.


Table 27- Paint Color

ade Paint color

r B Silver

X42 Brown

X46 Black

X52 Green

X56 Blue

X60 Red

X65 White

X70 Purple-violet

X80 Yellow

as the following:

ll pipes shall be fitted with bevel protectors.

Pipe shall be bare and free of oil, grease, lacquer, antifreeze (from UT couplant) and other contaminants, such as chlorides, that adversely affect coating adhesion.

e handled, loaded and shipped in accordance with API RP 5L1, API RP 5LT and API RP 5LW, as applicable.

A procedure for handling, transport and storage detailing the proposed methods of handling, stacking during storage, method of preservation, and stacking and securing pipes for transportation and shipment shall be submitted to the purchaser for review and acceptance.

as the following:

The manufacturer shall submit with the shipping procedures a written method to prevent salt contamination of the pipe at the receiving facility.

shipping, the ship’s log shall be made available to the purchaser for review when the

At least eight weeks prior to shipment, the manufacturer shall submit loading instructions and diagrams for review and comment, for all pipe shipped by truck or vessel.

When the manufacturer is responsible for handling or shipping, the purchaser’s rcomment of these loading instructions shall not relieve the manufacturer of responsibility for any

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

≥1.900 in, apply a 50 mm wide paint strip fully circumferential on the inside

The paint color shall be as given in Table 27 if the pipe grade is applicable; for all other grades, the

Pipe shall be bare and free of oil, grease, lacquer, antifreeze (from UT couplant) and other

e handled, loaded and shipped in accordance with API RP 5L1, API RP 5LT and

A procedure for handling, transport and storage detailing the proposed methods of handling, g and securing pipes for

aser for review and acceptance.

The manufacturer shall submit with the shipping procedures a written method to prevent salt

shipping, the ship’s log shall be made available to the purchaser for review when the

At least eight weeks prior to shipment, the manufacturer shall submit loading instructions and

When the manufacturer is responsible for handling or shipping, the purchaser’s review and comment of these loading instructions shall not relieve the manufacturer of responsibility for any

damage during shipment. If inshall reserve the right to reject the entire shipmeon the entire shipment, by a

14.3 Handling


Non-metallic strip shall be used for handling of pipe.

Note 1: Handling devices that contain copper or c

Note 2: Unless hookable end caps are fitted, hooks shall not be used for

14.4 Storage


a) No over stowage or deck loads shall be permitted. The storage of pipe shall be elevated off the ground, sloped and not in contact with other pipe. Pipe shall not be nested one diameter inside another.

b) All handling, loading and unloading shall be carried out in such a waymechanical damage and prevent stresses which resul

c) All dimensional tolerances and pipe surface conditions specified within this specification and API 5L shall apply to the pipe condition as receiveThe manufacturer shall be responsible for any permanent deformations subsequent to mill acceptance and resulting from loading, storing, stacking, transportation or shipping, provided that these operations are within the scope of the manufacturer.

Dec. 2020 IPS

37

damage during shipment. If in-transit fatigue cracks are detected after shipment, the purchaser shall reserve the right to reject the entire shipment until an absence of fatigue cracking is proven

a specified NDT method by the purchaser.

as the following:

ic strip shall be used for handling of pipe.

Handling devices that contain copper or copper alloys shall not be used.

Unless hookable end caps are fitted, hooks shall not be used for.

as the following:

or deck loads shall be permitted. The storage of pipe shall be elevated off the ground, sloped and not in contact with other pipe. Pipe shall not be nested one diameter inside

All handling, loading and unloading shall be carried out in such a way as to avoid magnetization, mechanical damage and prevent stresses which result in dents or out-of-roundness.

All dimensional tolerances and pipe surface conditions specified within this specification and API 5L shall apply to the pipe condition as received by the purchaser at the shipping destination. The manufacturer shall be responsible for any permanent deformations subsequent to mill acceptance and resulting from loading, storing, stacking, transportation or shipping, provided

within the scope of the manufacturer.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

transit fatigue cracks are detected after shipment, the purchaser nt until an absence of fatigue cracking is proven

opper alloys shall not be used.

or deck loads shall be permitted. The storage of pipe shall be elevated off the ground, sloped and not in contact with other pipe. Pipe shall not be nested one diameter inside

as to avoid magnetization, roundness.

All dimensional tolerances and pipe surface conditions specified within this specification and d by the purchaser at the shipping destination.

The manufacturer shall be responsible for any permanent deformations subsequent to mill acceptance and resulting from loading, storing, stacking, transportation or shipping, provided


B.1 Introduction


1. Manufacturing procedure qualification shall be requiredspecified by the purchaser.

2. Qualification shall be carried out on each combination of diameter and wallunless otherwise specified by the purc

3. The qualified manufacturing procedure shall form the basis for pipe acceptance.

4. Deviation from the qualified manufacturing procedure shall require full requalificationaccordance with the requirements of (B.5). The prequalification in the case of a change in the procedure specification.

5. The Manufacturer shall inform the manufacturing deviations from the agreed procedures, dimensionalThe Manufacturer shall communicate these changes even if the finished piperequirements of this standard

6. The manufacturing procedure shall be qualified by selecting at random three offinished pipes of the first day’s productiongrade and steel source (first shift production) at the be selected by the inspector.

7. Unless otherwise specified by the purchaserbe represented by the test pipes.

8. All related tests for ordered pipes based on this standard or any other agreed document performed on each test pipe.

9. For HFW pipe, the test pipes shall include the pipes made from each end of the

10. Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, ftests are not required and may and manufacturing method.

11. With purchaser approval, part or all of the manufacturing procedure qualificationout prior to first day production, but shall use plate or same welding machines and procedure and NDT

B.2 Additional Information to be


a) The manufacturer shall submit a items as per B.3) and an inspection and test plan (acceptance prior to the start of production.

b) A manufacturing procedure qualification test in accarried out.

B.3 Characteristics of the Manufacturing Procedure Specification

The existing first paragraph shall be deleted and replaced with the following

The MPS shall be prepared for each mill to cover each diameter, grade and specified wall thickness.

The required information may be included within the MPS or provided as standalone document, atthe manufacturer’s discretion.

Dec. 2020 IPS

38

ANNEX B

(Normative)



Manufacturing procedure qualification shall be required for all PSL2 pipe

Qualification shall be carried out on each combination of diameter and wallunless otherwise specified by the purchaser.

The qualified manufacturing procedure shall form the basis for pipe acceptance.

Deviation from the qualified manufacturing procedure shall require full requalificationthe requirements of (B.5). The purchaser shall reserve

requalification in the case of a change in the procedure specification.

The Manufacturer shall inform the purchaser within 48 hours of any intentional ormanufacturing deviations from the agreed procedures, dimensional tolerances, or composition. The Manufacturer shall communicate these changes even if the finished piperequirements of this standard or any other agreed document.

The manufacturing procedure shall be qualified by selecting at random three offinished pipes of the first day’s production in each size (each diameter and each wall thickness), grade and steel source (first shift production) at the COMPANY discretion. The MPQT pipes shall be selected by the inspector.

ise specified by the purchaser, in the first-day production, at least two heatsbe represented by the test pipes.

related tests for ordered pipes based on this standard or any other agreed document performed on each test pipe.

HFW pipe, the test pipes shall include the pipes made from each end of the

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, for orders less than 50 tons, tests are not required and may use of data from a previous order with similar

approval, part or all of the manufacturing procedure qualificationout prior to first day production, but shall use plate or strip(coil) ordered for production same welding machines and procedure and NDT equipment as proposed in production.

B.2 Additional Information to be upplied by the Purchaser


The manufacturer shall submit a comprehensive manufacturing procedure specification (as per B.3) and an inspection and test plan (at least items as per B.4), for the purchaser’s

ior to the start of production.

A manufacturing procedure qualification test in accordance with at least items

B.3 Characteristics of the Manufacturing Procedure Specification

The existing first paragraph shall be deleted and replaced with the following

The MPS shall be prepared for each mill to cover each type of pipe, delivery condition, nominal pipe e and specified wall thickness.

The required information may be included within the MPS or provided as standalone document, at

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

for all PSL2 pipe unless otherwise

Qualification shall be carried out on each combination of diameter and wall thickness supplied

The qualified manufacturing procedure shall form the basis for pipe acceptance.

Deviation from the qualified manufacturing procedure shall require full requalification in urchaser shall reserve the right to require

within 48 hours of any intentional or unintentional tolerances, or composition.

The Manufacturer shall communicate these changes even if the finished pipes meet the

The manufacturing procedure shall be qualified by selecting at random three of the completely in each size (each diameter and each wall thickness),

The MPQT pipes shall

day production, at least two heats shall

related tests for ordered pipes based on this standard or any other agreed document shall be

HFW pipe, the test pipes shall include the pipes made from each end of the first coil of strip.

, first day production with similar pipe grade, size,

approval, part or all of the manufacturing procedure qualification may be carried for production and the

equipment as proposed in production.

comprehensive manufacturing procedure specification (at least as per B.4), for the purchaser’s

at least items B.5 shall be

The existing first paragraph shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

type of pipe, delivery condition, nominal pipe

The required information may be included within the MPS or provided as standalone document, at

Before production commences, the manuinformation or identification of the control documents as applicable, on the main characteristics the manufacturing procedure.

This shall include a plan and process flow description/diagram and at least

a) Steelmaking and casting - for all pipe:

The existing items a) 2,3,5,7,8 shall be deleted and replaced with the following

2) Equipment and process description including steelmaking method, heat size, deoxidation practice, control of slag physicochemical properties and slag removal, secondary/ladle refining, degassing and stirring practice, inclusion shape contr

3) Control of chemical composition, based on target chemical composition (start up).

5) Hydrogen control practice.

7) Product reprocessing/retesting/release controls for nonconformances to the manufacturer’s documented practices and this

8) Steelmaking and casting methods used to mitigate segregation ancontinuous casting process. The documentation shall include a description of the processes, quality control steps and tests to assure adequate quality of the final pipe. Control of steel cleanliness and centerline segregation, inc

Add items a) 9,10,11 as the following

9) Control of steel scrap.

10) Billets and slabs visual inspection and associated acceptance criteria.

11) Quality plan detailing all inspection points and tests performed in accordance with ISO 10005 or any agreed standard by the purchaser

b) Pipe manufacturing - for all pipe:

The existing items b) 1,3,4,8,10,11 shall be deleted and replaced with the

1) Name/location of manufacturing facility; Striprolling conditions, accelerated cooling conditions (if applied) and heat treatment method (N or Q) if applicable.

3) Hydrostatic testing practices including calibration of eq

4) Non-destructive inspection methods and practices including calibration practice and records of the test.

8) Pipe marking process and details (including freehand marking limitation, lfrom pipe ends, painted colored band).

10) Product reprocessing/retesting/release controls for documented practices and this

11) Pipe storage, handling (including pipe end

Add items b) 12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23 as the following

12) Method for cold expansion/reduction/sizing/finishing, t

13) Control of intermediate heat treatment process if any

Dec. 2020 IPS

39

Before production commences, the manufacturer shall supply the purchaser with summary information or identification of the control documents as applicable, on the main characteristics

This shall include a plan and process flow description/diagram and at least the following information:

for all pipe:

The existing items a) 2,3,5,7,8 shall be deleted and replaced with the following

and process description including steelmaking method, heat size, deoxidation control of slag physicochemical properties and slag removal, secondary/ladle refining,

degassing and stirring practice, inclusion shape control practice, and casting method.

of chemical composition, based on target chemical composition (to be a

reprocessing/retesting/release controls for nonconformances to the manufacturer’s ractices and this standard.

and casting methods used to mitigate segregation and inclusions during the continuous casting process. The documentation shall include a description of the processes, quality control steps and tests to assure adequate quality of the final pipe. Control of steel cleanliness and centerline segregation, including the acceptance criteria.

as the following:

and slabs visual inspection and associated acceptance criteria.

Quality plan detailing all inspection points and tests performed in accordance with ISO 10005 or by the purchaser.

for all pipe:

3,4,8,10,11 shall be deleted and replaced with the following

Name/location of manufacturing facility; Strip(coil)/plate manufacturing method including details of rolling conditions, accelerated cooling conditions (if applied) and heat treatment method (N or Q)

practices including calibration of equipment and records of the test.

destructive inspection methods and practices including calibration practice and records of

marking process and details (including freehand marking limitation, lettering height, distance pe ends, painted colored band).

reprocessing/retesting/release controls for nonconformances to the manufacturer’s documented practices and this standard.

storage, handling (including pipe end protection), loading and shipping practices.

items b) 12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23 as the following:

for cold expansion/reduction/sizing/finishing, target and maximum sizing ratio.

of intermediate heat treatment process if any (e.g. quenching or normalizing).

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

facturer shall supply the purchaser with summary information or identification of the control documents as applicable, on the main characteristics of

the following information:

The existing items a) 2,3,5,7,8 shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

and process description including steelmaking method, heat size, deoxidation control of slag physicochemical properties and slag removal, secondary/ladle refining,

ol practice, and casting method.

to be agreed prior to

reprocessing/retesting/release controls for nonconformances to the manufacturer’s

d inclusions during the continuous casting process. The documentation shall include a description of the processes, quality control steps and tests to assure adequate quality of the final pipe. Control of steel

Quality plan detailing all inspection points and tests performed in accordance with ISO 10005 or

following:

/plate manufacturing method including details of rolling conditions, accelerated cooling conditions (if applied) and heat treatment method (N or Q)

uipment and records of the test.

destructive inspection methods and practices including calibration practice and records of

ettering height, distance

to the manufacturer’s

protection), loading and shipping practices.

arget and maximum sizing ratio.

(e.g. quenching or normalizing).

14) Control of final heat treatment process.

15) Heat treatment procedure including a sketch of the heat treatment facilities layout, showing furnaces and quenching bath relativ

16) Type, identification of furnaces and sketch of furnaces showing, overall dimensions, working zone and location of heat elements.

17) Location and identification of thermal sensors in the furnace. Sensors for temperature regulation and sensors for temperature control shall be clearly distinguished. Method of heapplicable).

18) Calibration frequency of the thermocouples.

19) Maximum operating temperature of furnaces

20) Loading temperature, heating and cooling rate, sowith associated tolerances and maximum transfer time.

21) For continuous and semi-function of size (e.g. thickness, diameter, cross section, etc.) for pother relevant parameters.

22) Arrangement of pipes inside the furnaces including minimum distance between pipes, number of pipe layers in the furnace and location of the weld seam.

23) Identification and control of

24) For sour service pipe, the HIC and SSCtest method and the procedure used for metallographic

c) Hot rolling - for welded pipe:

The existing item c) 2 shall be deleted and replaced with the following

2) Equipment and process description including slab reheating practices, minimum temperature and soaking time at slab reheating stage, rolling

Add item c) 11 as the following

11) Plate cutting practice (including plate/

e) Pipe manufacture - for welded pipe:

Add to items 3 and 4 of this clause, the following

3) For HFW pipe, the seam welding procedure shall include

III. Methods to be used for heating stripinput in relation to the temperature of the pipe surface and the speed of the pipe.

IV. Frequency (in kHz) of the welding power supply.

V. Welding speed.

VI. Welding Temperature (or Principal approved alte

VII. Welding power.

VIII. Compressive force or displacement used in welding.

IX. Temperature of in-line normaliz

X. Details of any protective atmosphere used for weld

XI. Methods used to accomplish and control the upset welding of the heated pipe edges.

XII. Methods used for trimming of the weld bead.

Dec. 2020 IPS

40

heat treatment process.

treatment procedure including a sketch of the heat treatment facilities layout, showing ing bath relative to each other.

, identification of furnaces and sketch of furnaces showing, overall dimensions, working e and location of heat elements.

and identification of thermal sensors in the furnace. Sensors for temperature regulation sensors for temperature control shall be clearly distinguished. Method of he

Calibration frequency of the thermocouples.

operating temperature of furnaces.

temperature, heating and cooling rate, soaking temperature set-up and soaking time nces and maximum transfer time.

-continuous furnaces: travel speed and minimum soaking time as function of size (e.g. thickness, diameter, cross section, etc.) for products to be heat

of pipes inside the furnaces including minimum distance between pipes, number of e and location of the weld seam.

and control of individual pipes throughout the heat treatment cycle.

HIC and SSC test procedures shall include full details of the exposure the procedure used for metallographic preparation of the exposed test pieces.

for welded pipe:

The existing item c) 2 shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

and process description including slab reheating practices, minimum temperature and soaking time at slab reheating stage, rolling schedule and cooling practices.

item c) 11 as the following:

cutting practice (including plate/ strip (coil) slitting).

for welded pipe:

Add to items 3 and 4 of this clause, the following:

For HFW pipe, the seam welding procedure shall include at least details of the following:

III. Methods to be used for heating strip(coil) edges and for the control and monitoring of power input in relation to the temperature of the pipe surface and the speed of the pipe.

IV. Frequency (in kHz) of the welding power supply.

VI. Welding Temperature (or Principal approved alternative method of monitoring weld quality).

VIII. Compressive force or displacement used in welding.

line normalizing or normalizing and tempering (if applied).

X. Details of any protective atmosphere used for welding.


XII. Methods used for trimming of the weld bead.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

treatment procedure including a sketch of the heat treatment facilities layout, showing

, identification of furnaces and sketch of furnaces showing, overall dimensions, working

and identification of thermal sensors in the furnace. Sensors for temperature regulation sensors for temperature control shall be clearly distinguished. Method of heating and fuel (if

up and soaking time

continuous furnaces: travel speed and minimum soaking time as roducts to be heat-treated and

of pipes inside the furnaces including minimum distance between pipes, number of

individual pipes throughout the heat treatment cycle.

full details of the exposure preparation of the exposed test pieces.

and process description including slab reheating practices, minimum temperature and

details of the following:

edges and for the control and monitoring of power input in relation to the temperature of the pipe surface and the speed of the pipe.

rnative method of monitoring weld quality).

ing or normalizing and tempering (if applied).


4) For SAW pipe, the seam welding procedure shall include

V. Brand name, classification, size and grade of filler metal and flux.

VI. Speed of welding.

VII. Number of electrodes and polarity for each electrode.

VIII. Stick out for each wire.

IX. Welding current for each wire.

X. Welding voltage for each wire.

Add items e) 5,6 as the following

5) Preliminary welding procedure specification (including all essential variablpurchaser.

Note 1: Other criteria for change essential variables in Table B.1 and Table B.2, may by the purchaser.

6) Welding equipment, including weld tracking system.

f) Pipe manufacture - for SMLS pipe:

Add items f) 3, 4, 5 as the following

3) Equipment and process description including billet reheating practices, minimum temperature and soaking time at billet reheating stage, tube manufacturing stage and finishing stage

4) Control of process parameters for reheating, tube man

5) End cropping practices.

B.4 Characteristics of the Inspection and Test Plan


j) Quality plan detailing all inspection points and tests performed in accordance with ISO 10005 or any agreed standard by the purchaser

B5. Manufacturing Procedure Qualification Tests

B.5.0 Add this clause as the following

The MPS shall be validated through MPQT as described herein.

If one or more tests in the MPQT fail, the MPS shall be reviewed and modified accordingly, and a complete re-qualification performed. Retesting may be allowed subject to agreement bypurchaser. In the specific case of SAW failed fusion line CVN tests (with reference to local brittle zone), retesting of a further two sets removed from the failed MPrelative to wall thickness) is permitted, prior to declaring the MPQT as having failed.

In cases where the qualification test results do not comply with the requirements of this specification, the pipe tested, as well as all

B.5.1 The existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following

For qualification of the manufacturing procedure, the Table 18, selected annexes and appendices (in accordance with purchase order) and the additional destructive tests specified in Clause

Dec. 2020 IPS

41

For SAW pipe, the seam welding procedure shall include at least details of the following:

ication, size and grade of filler metal and flux.

VII. Number of electrodes and polarity for each electrode.

IX. Welding current for each wire.

X. Welding voltage for each wire.

as the following:

welding procedure specification (PWPS) or previously qualified WPS (if available) including all essential variables from Table B.1 and Table B.2, unless otherwise specified by the

Other criteria for change essential variables in Table B.1 and Table B.2, may

equipment, including weld tracking system.

for SMLS pipe:

as the following:

and process description including billet reheating practices, minimum temperature and soaking time at billet reheating stage, tube manufacturing stage and finishing stage

of process parameters for reheating, tube manufacturing and finishing sta

B.4 Characteristics of the Inspection and Test Plan


Quality plan detailing all inspection points and tests performed in accordance with ISO 10005 or by the purchaser.

Procedure Qualification Tests (MPQT)


The MPS shall be validated through MPQT as described herein.

If one or more tests in the MPQT fail, the MPS shall be reviewed and modified accordingly, and a qualification performed. Retesting may be allowed subject to agreement by

purchaser. In the specific case of SAW failed fusion line CVN tests (with reference to local brittle zone), retesting of a further two sets removed from the failed MPQT pipe (at the same position relative to wall thickness) is permitted, prior to declaring the MPQT as having failed.

In cases where the qualification test results do not comply with the requirements of this specification, the pipe tested, as well as all preceding pipes, shall be rejected.


For qualification of the manufacturing procedure, the inspections and tests specified inTable 18, selected annexes and appendices (in accordance with purchase order) and the additional

Clause B.5.2 shall be carried out.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

details of the following:

WPS) or previously qualified WPS (if available) , unless otherwise specified by the

Other criteria for change essential variables in Table B.1 and Table B.2, may be specified

and process description including billet reheating practices, minimum temperature and soaking time at billet reheating stage, tube manufacturing stage and finishing stage.

ufacturing and finishing stage.

Quality plan detailing all inspection points and tests performed in accordance with ISO 10005 or

If one or more tests in the MPQT fail, the MPS shall be reviewed and modified accordingly, and a qualification performed. Retesting may be allowed subject to agreement by the

purchaser. In the specific case of SAW failed fusion line CVN tests (with reference to local brittle QT pipe (at the same position

relative to wall thickness) is permitted, prior to declaring the MPQT as having failed.

In cases where the qualification test results do not comply with the requirements of this

tests specified in Clause 8.3.3, Table 18, selected annexes and appendices (in accordance with purchase order) and the additional

B.5.2 The existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following

If it is not specified by this standard, tindicated by the purchaser, although requalification testing shall be approved by the purchaser.

The MPQT (i.e. first day production tests)procedure or interruption to the program.

The Manufacturer shall submit to the together with macrographs of the weld cross section and micrographs confiof the welded and seamless pipe.

B.5.2.1 Macrographic, Micrographic and Segregation Analysis on Slabs


Unless specified by the purchaser:

The first, middle and last slab from the first heat shallsegregation analysis. The analysis procedure shall be subject to agreement with the purchaser:

a) Macrographic methods may be by macroetch (hot acid etch test

b) Micrographic methods shall be by optical microscope on the polished sample. A procedure shall be submitted for the purchaser’s review and acceptance.

c) Segregation analysis shall be carried out by crossslab, ¼ slab thickness and ½ slab thicknesses (see Figure B.1). The chemical composition shall be within the variation of target chemical composition.

Figure B.1 − Slab

B.5.2.2 Charpy Impact Tests


A ductile brittle transition temperature (Dshall be developed from a Charpy- 60˚C at the following location:

a) Seamless: DBTT shall be performed within the pipe body.

b) HFW: DBTT shall be performed within the parent material and along the weld centerline within 0.25 mm (0.01 in.) from the fusion line.

c) SAW: DBTT shall be performed within the parent material at 90° from the weld weld centerline, on the fusion line

Dec. 2020 IPS

42


specified by this standard, the frequency and amount of qualification testing shall be although requalification testing shall be approved by the purchaser.

MPQT (i.e. first day production tests) shall be repeated after any change in the manufacturing procedure or interruption to the program.

The Manufacturer shall submit to the COMPANY a report giving the results of alltogether with macrographs of the weld cross section and micrographs confirming the microstru

pipe.

B.5.2.1 Macrographic, Micrographic and Segregation Analysis on Slabs (for Coil or Plate


Unless specified by the purchaser:

he first, middle and last slab from the first heat shall be subject to macrographic, micrographic and segregation analysis. The analysis procedure shall be subject to agreement with the purchaser:

methods may be by macroetch (hot acid etch test) or magnetic particle testing.

methods shall be by optical microscope on the polished sample. A procedure shall rchaser’s review and acceptance.

analysis shall be carried out by cross-section chemical analysis at the surface of the slab, ¼ slab thickness and ½ slab thicknesses (see Figure B.1). The chemical composition shall

of target chemical composition.

− Slab Macrographic, Micrographic Analysis Sampling


ductile brittle transition temperature (DBTT) curve, (at least in terms of energyCharpy impact test at least against temperatures of 20,

: DBTT shall be performed within the pipe body.

HFW: DBTT shall be performed within the parent material and along the weld centerline within 0.01 in.) from the fusion line.

SAW: DBTT shall be performed within the parent material at 90° from the weld on the fusion line and fusion line +2mm.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

amount of qualification testing shall be although requalification testing shall be approved by the purchaser.

hange in the manufacturing

a report giving the results of all related tests rming the microstructure

for Coil or Plate)

be subject to macrographic, micrographic and segregation analysis. The analysis procedure shall be subject to agreement with the purchaser:

magnetic particle testing.

methods shall be by optical microscope on the polished sample. A procedure shall

section chemical analysis at the surface of the slab, ¼ slab thickness and ½ slab thicknesses (see Figure B.1). The chemical composition shall

Macrographic, Micrographic Analysis Sampling

BTT) curve, (at least in terms of energy and shear area) 20, 0, -20, - 40, and

HFW: DBTT shall be performed within the parent material and along the weld centerline within

SAW: DBTT shall be performed within the parent material at 90° from the weld seam, along the

Note 1: If specified by the purchaser, tnecessary to get sufficient data for representing fully a transition curve showing the transition area.

Note 2: The tests at temperatures below the

Note 3: If specified by the purchaserand in the aged condition

B.5.2.3 Tensile Tests


Parent material tensile test and all weld metal tensile tests (at ambient and elevated temperature if specified by the purchaser) shall be conducted to record the full stressload.

Two round bar all-weld tensile tests (one from practical due to dimensional limitation, t

The yield strength and tensile strength shall meet the requirements of the pipe base material. Elongation shall be as specified in ISO 2566Rt0.5/Rm ratio and uniform elongation shall be reported for information only.

Note 1: Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser"Oliver" formula, as specified in ISO 2566

Note 2: If specified by the purchaser, data shall be supplied in native data formats that can be imported into a spreadsheet file.

Note 3: If specified by the purchaserlongitudinal direction for all pipe sizes and the transverse direction for pipes with an outside diameter greater than 219.1 mm (8.63 in.). See Table 20. Acceptance criteria shall be specified by the purchaser.

B.5.2.4 Macrographic, Metallographic


Tests shall be performed at both ends of the MPQT pipes for up to three crossseam), 90° and 180° to be sample

They shall be polished and etched to show th

Photographs of the microstructure shall be supplied at three locations minimum, i.e. at below the ID and OD surfaces, and at mid-thickness.

The inclusion rating shall be performed in acacceptance criteria shall comply with related requir

Note 1: The base metal shall be examined for a banded structure in terms of "carbon / carbides segregation" and "ferrite or pearlite/martensite, etc". The acceptance criteria shall related requirements for ordered pipes.

B.5.2.5 Strain- Ageing Tests


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, performed in the aged condition if cold forming during manufacturing of Cstrain after heat treatment. Thincluding but not limited to, levelling of plate, pipe forming and expansion. The tests shall be performed on the actual pipe without any straightprocedure with COMPANY's approval.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, a

Dec. 2020 IPS

43

If specified by the purchaser, the temperature range for testing may necessary to get sufficient data for representing fully a transition curve showing the

The tests at temperatures below the target test temperature will be for information only.

by the purchaser, the transition curve shall be generated for both finished pipe and in the aged condition (see B.5.2.5).


Parent material tensile test and all weld metal tensile tests (at ambient and elevated temperature if ) shall be conducted to record the full stress-strain curve up to maximum

weld tensile tests (one from inside and one from outside the weld beadpractical due to dimensional limitation, two back-to-back samples.) shall be performed.

The yield strength and tensile strength shall meet the requirements of the pipe base material. as specified in ISO 2566-1 (should not less than18 %). Reduction of area,

ratio and uniform elongation shall be reported for information only.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, for determination of the elongation value, the"Oliver" formula, as specified in ISO 2566-1 may be used.

If specified by the purchaser, data shall be supplied in native data formats that can be imported into a spreadsheet file.

by the purchaser, elevated temperature tensile tests shall be made in the longitudinal direction for all pipe sizes and the transverse direction for pipes with an outside diameter greater than 219.1 mm (8.63 in.). See Table 20. Acceptance criteria shall

by the purchaser.

Metallographic and Hardness Tests on Pipes


ests shall be performed at both ends of the MPQT pipes for up to three cross-to be sampled for micrography and hardness.

shall be polished and etched to show the metallurgical microstructure.

Photographs of the microstructure shall be supplied at three locations minimum, i.e. at below the ID thickness.

The inclusion rating shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E45 (Method d) and acceptance criteria shall comply with related requirements for ordered pipes.

The base metal shall be examined for a banded structure in terms of "carbon / carbides segregation" and "ferrite or pearlite/martensite, etc". The acceptance criteria shall

ments for ordered pipes.


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, Charpy, tensile and hardness testing shall also be performed in the aged condition if cold forming during manufacturing of C-Mn steel exceeds 5 % strain after heat treatment. The cold forming shall take into account all operations on the steel, including but not limited to, levelling of plate, pipe forming and expansion. The tests shall be performed on the actual pipe without any straightening or additional deformationprocedure with COMPANY's approval.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, ageing shall be done by heating the specimen to a

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

be extended when necessary to get sufficient data for representing fully a transition curve showing the

test temperature will be for information only.

, the transition curve shall be generated for both finished pipe

Parent material tensile test and all weld metal tensile tests (at ambient and elevated temperature if strain curve up to maximum

inside and one from outside the weld bead; if it is not ) shall be performed.

The yield strength and tensile strength shall meet the requirements of the pipe base material. . Reduction of area,

or determination of the elongation value, the

If specified by the purchaser, data shall be supplied in native data formats that can be

le tests shall be made in the longitudinal direction for all pipe sizes and the transverse direction for pipes with an outside diameter greater than 219.1 mm (8.63 in.). See Table 20. Acceptance criteria shall

-sections at 0° (weld

Photographs of the microstructure shall be supplied at three locations minimum, i.e. at below the ID

cordance with ASTM E45 (Method d) and the

The base metal shall be examined for a banded structure in terms of "carbon / carbides segregation" and "ferrite or pearlite/martensite, etc". The acceptance criteria shall comply with

, tensile and hardness testing shall also be Mn steel exceeds 5 %

e cold forming shall take into account all operations on the steel, including but not limited to, levelling of plate, pipe forming and expansion. The tests shall be

ening or additional deformation according to a

geing shall be done by heating the specimen to a

temperature of 250 °C (492 °F) with one hour soaking time.

Note 1: In most cases cold forming strain is less than 5 %. In exceptional cases where the D/t ratio is below 20, the requirement above applies only where no heat treatment is performed after forming.

B.5.2.6 Non-destructive Testing


The following tests shall be carried outAnnex E or K (which one is related to ordered pipe)be investigated.

a) The weld seams of SAW pipes shall be radiographically examined throughout their full length.

b) The weld seams of all welded pipes shall be examined by means of an automatic ultrasonic scanning device.

c) The weld seams of all welded pipes greater than or equal to DN 60to liquid penetrant or magnetic particle testing, throughout their full length both inside and outside, to check for longitudinal and transverse surface defec

d) For pipe less than DN 600 (NPS 24), the equivalent length of one pipe diameter each end of the internal surface, shall be examined.

e) Seamless pipe shall also be subjected to PT or MT ove

Note 1: PT shall be in accordance with ASTM E165.

B.5.2.7 Surface Condition Test


Rolling marks and surface imperfections shall be checked for hardness with a portable hardness device and destructive sampling to compare the results. The results shall requirments for ordered pipes.

For seamless pipes, if specified by the purchaseraccording to the following:

a) In the absence of historic data, seamless pipe shall undergo blast cleaning and examination of three pipes during the manufac

b) The pipes shall be selected at random and heated

c) The outside surface of the pipe shall be blast cleaned to a surface finish of SA2½ and the pipe then re-heated to 250 °C (482 °F).

d) Each pipe shall be examined visually over its entire surface for imperfections that could interfere with the FBE coating process.

e) If a seamless pipe is rejected, the remaining pipes from the test unit and one pipe from each subsequent test unit shall be blast cleaned and examined.

B.5.2.8 HIC and SSC Tests


For pipe under sour services, HIC and SSC tests shall be performed as specified in Annex H.

B.5.3 Add to this clause the following

Note 1: Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, rchanges in essential variables that require new qualification.

Dec. 2020 IPS

44

temperature of 250 °C (492 °F) with one hour soaking time.

In most cases cold forming strain is less than 5 %. In exceptional cases where the D/t ratio is below 20, the requirement above applies only where no heat treatment is performed after

destructive Testing

following:

he following tests shall be carried out at least for one pipe of selected test pipesone is related to ordered pipe). Cracks are unacceptable and their causes shall

of SAW pipes shall be radiographically examined throughout their full length.

The weld seams of all welded pipes shall be examined by means of an automatic ultrasonic

he weld seams of all welded pipes greater than or equal to DN 600 (NPS 24) shall be subjected to liquid penetrant or magnetic particle testing, throughout their full length both inside and outside, to check for longitudinal and transverse surface defects in the weld material.

or pipe less than DN 600 (NPS 24), the full length of the weld seam outside surface, plus the equivalent length of one pipe diameter each end of the internal surface, shall be examined.

eamless pipe shall also be subjected to PT or MT over the entire outside pipe body.

n accordance with ASTM E165.

Surface Condition Test


Rolling marks and surface imperfections shall be checked for hardness with a portable hardness device and destructive sampling to compare the results. The results shall shall comply with related

ed by the purchaser, a surface condition test shall be carried out

In the absence of historic data, seamless pipe shall undergo blast cleaning and examination of three pipes during the manufacturing procedure qualification.

The pipes shall be selected at random and heated to a minimum of 70 °C (160 °F).

The outside surface of the pipe shall be blast cleaned to a surface finish of SA2½ and the pipe heated to 250 °C (482 °F).

Each pipe shall be examined visually over its entire surface for imperfections that could interfere g process.

If a seamless pipe is rejected, the remaining pipes from the test unit and one pipe from each e blast cleaned and examined.




specified by the purchaser, reference is made to Tables that require new qualification.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

In most cases cold forming strain is less than 5 %. In exceptional cases where the D/t ratio is below 20, the requirement above applies only where no heat treatment is performed after final

at least for one pipe of selected test pipes in accordance with Cracks are unacceptable and their causes shall

of SAW pipes shall be radiographically examined throughout their full length.

The weld seams of all welded pipes shall be examined by means of an automatic ultrasonic

0 (NPS 24) shall be subjected to liquid penetrant or magnetic particle testing, throughout their full length both inside and

ts in the weld material.

full length of the weld seam outside surface, plus the equivalent length of one pipe diameter each end of the internal surface, shall be examined.

r the entire outside pipe body.

Rolling marks and surface imperfections shall be checked for hardness with a portable hardness shall comply with related

, a surface condition test shall be carried out

In the absence of historic data, seamless pipe shall undergo blast cleaning and examination of

to a minimum of 70 °C (160 °F).

The outside surface of the pipe shall be blast cleaned to a surface finish of SA2½ and the pipe

Each pipe shall be examined visually over its entire surface for imperfections that could interfere

If a seamless pipe is rejected, the remaining pipes from the test unit and one pipe from each


Tables B.1 and B.2 for


Weldability test requirements shall be in accordance with 9.15.

Subject to the purchaser’s acceptance, weldability tests may be undertaken separately to the MPQT.


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, ashall require a new MPQT.

B.5.7 Welding Essential Variables


If requested by the purchaser, a preliminary weldishould be considered:

a) Qualification of the welding procedure specification shall be carried out for each production before commencing the fabrication. Prequalified procedures may be accepted at the purchaser’s discretion.

b) The WPS and supporting procedure qualification recorpurchaser for acceptance.

c) During production, changes of any welding parameters defined as essential variables, outside the ranges specified in the WPS, will require requalification of the WPS. If other manufacturing essential parameters remain unchanged, requalification shall be limited to the WPS.

d) The manufacturer shall provide details, subject to the purchaser’s acceptance, of how the parameters detailed in B.5.7 are to be monitored and recorded.

e) For HFW, the mill shall operate a welding system where the control parameters are used to adjust the welding process automatically. The system shall monitor, as a minimum, the voltage, current, welding power, travel speed, weld fusion point temperature (if available), squeeze roll pressure or load. These parameters shall be recordedor as specified by the purchaser.

f) As a minimum, all information required in ASME IX WPS format shall be listed.

g) Welding records shall be available for review by the inspector during production order is shipped.

Dec. 2020 IPS

45


eldability test requirements shall be in accordance with 9.15.

Subject to the purchaser’s acceptance, weldability tests may be undertaken separately to the


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, any change to the essential variables listed in B.5.7

Welding Essential Variables


If requested by the purchaser, a preliminary welding procedure shall be submitted and the following

Qualification of the welding procedure specification shall be carried out for each production before commencing the fabrication. Prequalified procedures may be accepted at the purchaser’s

The WPS and supporting procedure qualification record (PQR) shall be submitted to the

During production, changes of any welding parameters defined as essential variables, outside the ranges specified in the WPS, will require requalification of the WPS. If other manufacturing

sential parameters remain unchanged, requalification shall be limited to the WPS.

The manufacturer shall provide details, subject to the purchaser’s acceptance, of how the parameters detailed in B.5.7 are to be monitored and recorded.

mill shall operate a welding system where the control parameters are used to adjust the welding process automatically. The system shall monitor, as a minimum, the voltage, current, welding power, travel speed, weld fusion point temperature (if available), squeeze roll pressure or load. These parameters shall be recorded at least every 10 milliseconds or as specified by the purchaser.

As a minimum, all information required in ASME IX WPS format shall be listed.

Welding records shall be available for review by the inspector during production

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

Subject to the purchaser’s acceptance, weldability tests may be undertaken separately to the

ny change to the essential variables listed in B.5.7

ng procedure shall be submitted and the following

Qualification of the welding procedure specification shall be carried out for each production before commencing the fabrication. Prequalified procedures may be accepted at the purchaser’s

d (PQR) shall be submitted to the

During production, changes of any welding parameters defined as essential variables, outside the ranges specified in the WPS, will require requalification of the WPS. If other manufacturing

sential parameters remain unchanged, requalification shall be limited to the WPS.

The manufacturer shall provide details, subject to the purchaser’s acceptance, of how the

mill shall operate a welding system where the control parameters are used to adjust the welding process automatically. The system shall monitor, as a minimum, the voltage, current, welding power, travel speed, weld fusion point temperature (if available), frequency and

at least every 10 milliseconds

As a minimum, all information required in ASME IX WPS format shall be listed.

Welding records shall be available for review by the inspector during production and until the

Table B.1

Essential Variables

A change in API

1) Base metal

A change in CE

A change in CE

A change in pipe delivery condition.

A change in specified wall thickness by more than

A change in bevel shape / groove type.

2) Bevel shape,

angle

A change in root face by more than

A change in root gap by more than

A change in angle by more than

A change in number

3) Filler metal

A change in

Any change in brand name.

A change in wire classification.

A change in

A change in location and distance between

strip (coil)-pipe meeting point to ID welding

point.

4) Position of

welding point

(for SAWH

pipe)

Methods to be used for heating strip5) Preheat /

interpass

temperature

Decrease in qualified minimum preheating and/or interpass temperature.

Increase of qualified maximum preheating and/or interpass temperature by

A change in make, type and model of welding equipment.6) Equipment

A change in welding position, type of current and polarity.

7) Electrical

characteristics

A change in ±10 % in voltage, amperage, and wire feed speed for each wire.

A change in ±10 % in travel speed.

A change in ±7 % in welding heat input.

A change from Constant Voltage to

Constant Current output.

A change in the mode of transfer.

A change in number of weld passes.8) Weld pass

A change in gas composition.

9) Shielding gas Decrease in gas

Increase in gas flow rate by more than 10%.

Addition or deletion of10) Postweld heat

treatment A change in the PWHT temperature by more than ±10 ºC (50 F).

A change of

Dec. 2020 IPS

46

Table B.1 − Welding Essential Variable for SAW Pipes

Changes that require new qualification

GMAW

A change in API 5L steel grade.

A change in CEPCM greater than 0.02 as an essential variable.

A change in CEIIW greater than 0.03 as an essential variable.


A change in specified wall thickness by more than -10% / +5%

A change in bevel shape / groove type.

A change in root face by more than -1.5 mm / +1.5 mm (±0.06 in)

A change in root gap by more than -1.0 mm / +1.0 mm (±0.04 in)

A change in angle by more than -5º / +5º

A change in number of wire.

A change in nominal wire diameter.

Any change in brand name.

A change from one flux

to any other flux-wire classificationA change in wire classification.

A change in flux or wire manufacturerA change in wire manufacturer.


strip (coil)-pipe meeting point to ID welding

point.


pipe meeting point to ID welding

A change in location for OD welding.

Methods to be used for heating strip(coil) edges.


Increase of qualified maximum preheating and/or interpass temperature by

A change in make, type and model of welding equipment.

A change in welding position, type of current and polarity.

in ±10 % in voltage, amperage, and wire feed speed for each wire.

A change in ±10 % in travel speed.

A change in ±7 % in welding heat input.

A change of > 5mm (0.2 in.) in longitudinal

or lateral spacing of the arcs.

A change from Constant Voltage to

Constant Current output.

A change in the mode of transfer.

A change in number of weld passes.


Decrease in gas flow rate.

Increase in gas flow rate by more than 10%.

Addition or deletion of PWHT.

A change in the PWHT temperature by more than ±10 ºC (50 F).

A change of ≥ 10 % in soaking time.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)


SAW

1.5 mm / +1.5 mm (±0.06 in)

A change from one flux-wire classification

wire classification.

or wire manufacturer.


pipe meeting point to ID welding

A change in location for OD welding.


Increase of qualified maximum preheating and/or interpass temperature by > 50 ºC (122 F).

in ±10 % in voltage, amperage, and wire feed speed for each wire.

5mm (0.2 in.) in longitudinal

or lateral spacing of the arcs.

Table B.2 − Welding Essential Variables for HFW Pipes

Essential Variables

A change

1) Base metal

A change in CE

A change in CE


A change in nominal wall thickness.

A change in

A change in the source of strip (coil).

A change in welding current transfer mechanism

(either by induction strip (coil) or contact tips).2) Transfer of welding

current and the use of

impeder

A change in dimension of

and the contact tip force.

A change in the use, dimension, material and location of impeder.


3) Equipment Methods to be used for

Method to control and monitor power input in relation to the temperature of the

pipe surface and the speed of the pipe.

Any change.4) Induction strip (coil)

configuration (HFW only)

Any change.5) Impeder configuration

(HFW only)

A change of ±5 % in qualified frequency (frequency shall be

6) Electrical characteristics A change of ±5 % in welding heat coefficient,

Q = (amps × volts) / (travel speed × thickness).

A change in roll pressure location.7) Roll pressure on

welding /squeezing point,

squeeze-out and

metal flow angle

A change of > 5 % in roll pressure.

Decrease in minimum qualified squeeze

[squeeze

The metal flow angle should be within the


8) Shielding gas and

coverage area

Decrease in gas

Decrease in coverage area (as minimum beveled areas after induction strip (coil)

/contact tip shall be protected).

A change of > 5 % in 9) Weld seam heat

treatment and cooling

system

Decrease in soaking time.

Decrease in

A change in cooling system

Dec. 2020 IPS

47

− Welding Essential Variables for HFW Pipes


A change in API 5L steel grade.

A change in CEPCM greater than 0.02 as an essential variable.

A change in CEIIW greater than 0.03 as an essential variable.


A change in nominal wall thickness.

A change in nominal pipe diameter.

A change in the source of strip (coil).

A change in welding current transfer mechanism

(either by induction strip (coil) or contact tips).

A change in dimension of induction strip (coil) /contact tip, material, coolant type

and the contact tip force.



Methods to be used for heating strip(coil) edges.


pipe surface and the speed of the pipe.

Any change.

Any change.

A change of ±5 % in qualified frequency (frequency shall be

A change of ±5 % in welding heat coefficient,

Q = (amps × volts) / (travel speed × thickness).

A change in roll pressure location.

A change of > 5 % in roll pressure.

Decrease in minimum qualified squeeze-out

[squeeze-out should be ˃ 4mm (0.16in.)].

The metal flow angle should be within the range 45º - 60º.


Decrease in gas flow rate.


/contact tip shall be protected).

A change of > 5 % in qualified frequency.

Decrease in soaking time.

Decrease in qualified exit temperature by >10 ºC (50 F).

A change in cooling system

IPS-M-PI-190(4)


greater than 0.02 as an essential variable.

greater than 0.03 as an essential variable.

/contact tip, material, coolant type




A change of ±5 % in qualified frequency (frequency shall be ≥ 150KHz).

60º.


10 ºC (50 F).

Treatment of Surface Imperfections and

C.2.2 Add to this clause the following

All ground areas shall be smoothly contoured at a minimum 3 to 1 slope and processes are listed in Table C.1.

Table C.1

Manufacturing Stage

Before hydrostatic pressure

Only flap wheels (cosmetic grinding After hydrostatic pressure

Before expansion

After expansion

a. Cosmetic grinding i.e. grain size disk # 100 or flap wheels. Wall thickness check is not required after cosmetic grinding.

b. Repairs to HFW weld line: external light grinding is permitted.

Internal light grinding shall be limited to removing

Wall thickness shall be checked after light grinding.

C.2.3 The existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following

After grinding, complete removal of defects shall be verified by wet or dry MT as per ASTM E709 or ISO 10893-5, and by the NDT method which detected the defect i.e. automatic UT (AUT) or electromagnetic inspection (EMI).

Following ID grinding, MT or liquid penetrant shall be used to veri

a) If MT or liquid penetrant cannot be perfapplicable) may be used to ensure complete defect removal.

b) Any UT procedure for verification of removal of defects by ID grinding shall be submitted to the purchaser for review and acceptance.

Wall thickness measurements shall be made by UT in the ground areas and the results shall be recorded. The wall thickness in the ground area shall be in accordance with however, the minus tolerances for diameter and outthe ground area.

C.4 Repair of Defects by Welding


Weld seams containing cracks shall not be weld repaired. The section of pipe containing cracks shall be cut off. Acceptability of the requirements.

Inside pipe is considered as a confined space and repairs inside the pipe may only be permitted when safe access procedures are in place. Inside repairs shall be

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, iif visual inspection (and dressing if req

Repair of HFW pipe weld seams by welding is not permitted.

Dec. 2020 IPS

48

ANNEX C

(Normative)

Treatment of Surface Imperfections and Defects


ll ground areas shall be smoothly contoured at a minimum 3 to 1 slope and the acceptable grinding cesses are listed in Table C.1.

Table C.1 – Acceptable Grinding Processes

Welding Pipe SMLS Pipe

A Grinding wheel or flap wheel

Only flap wheels (cosmetic grinding a)

A Grinding wheel or flap wheel-

Only flap wheels (cosmetic grinding)-

grinding i.e. grain size disk # 100 or flap wheels. Wall thickness check is not required after cosmetic grinding.

to HFW weld line: external light grinding is permitted.

Internal light grinding shall be limited to removing weld flash only.

Wall thickness shall be checked after light grinding.


After grinding, complete removal of defects shall be verified by wet or dry MT as per ASTM E709 or 5, and by the NDT method which detected the defect i.e. automatic UT (AUT) or

ectromagnetic inspection (EMI).

Following ID grinding, MT or liquid penetrant shall be used to verify complete removal of defects:

If MT or liquid penetrant cannot be performed on the ID, manual or automatic UT (and EMI as ensure complete defect removal.

Any UT procedure for verification of removal of defects by ID grinding shall be submitted to the aser for review and acceptance.

Wall thickness measurements shall be made by UT in the ground areas and the results shall be recorded. The wall thickness in the ground area shall be in accordance with however, the minus tolerances for diameter and out-of-roundness (see 9.11.3.1) shall not apply in

ir of Defects by Welding


Weld seams containing cracks shall not be weld repaired. The section of pipe containing cracks shall be cut off. Acceptability of the remaining pipe shall subsequently be based on length

Inside pipe is considered as a confined space and repairs inside the pipe may only be permitted when safe access procedures are in place. Inside repairs shall be followed by visual inspecti

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, inside arc stop/restart repairs for SAW may be allowed if visual inspection (and dressing if required) can be safely performed.

Repair of HFW pipe weld seams by welding is not permitted.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

the acceptable grinding

Welding Pipe b

-

-

A Grinding wheel or flap wheel

Only flap wheels (cosmetic grinding)

grinding i.e. grain size disk # 100 or flap wheels. Wall thickness check is not required after cosmetic grinding.

After grinding, complete removal of defects shall be verified by wet or dry MT as per ASTM E709 or 5, and by the NDT method which detected the defect i.e. automatic UT (AUT) or

fy complete removal of defects:

ormed on the ID, manual or automatic UT (and EMI as

Any UT procedure for verification of removal of defects by ID grinding shall be submitted to the

Wall thickness measurements shall be made by UT in the ground areas and the results shall be recorded. The wall thickness in the ground area shall be in accordance with Clause 9.11.3.2;

.11.3.1) shall not apply in

Weld seams containing cracks shall not be weld repaired. The section of pipe containing cracks remaining pipe shall subsequently be based on length

Inside pipe is considered as a confined space and repairs inside the pipe may only be permitted followed by visual inspection.

nside arc stop/restart repairs for SAW may be allowed


All repairs shall be carried out before cold expansion (i


The total length of repaired zones on each pipe weld shall be weld seams; unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, weld repairs shall be limited to a maximum of four per pipe with a maximum le


Repairs shall be separated by at least 200 mm (7.9 in.). Each repair shall be carried out with a minimum of two layers/passes over a len

No welding repair is permitted over a length of 254 mm


Welder shall be qualified in accordance with Annex D.3.

The properties of the weld repair shall meet the specification requiremeweld.


The external surface of the repair weld shall be subject to grinding to obtain a uniform appearance and to merge smoothly into the base

Each repaired area shall be 100 % examined by ultrasonic and MT testing. Additional radiographic testing shall be performed if specified

Dec. 2020 IPS

49

ause the following:

ll repairs shall be carried out before cold expansion (if any) and hydrostatic testing.


The total length of repaired zones on each pipe weld shall be ≤ 5 % of the total weld length for SAW otherwise specified by the purchaser, weld repairs shall be limited to a

maximum of four per pipe with a maximum length of 350 mm (13.8 in.) each.


Repairs shall be separated by at least 200 mm (7.9 in.). Each repair shall be carried out with a minimum of two layers/passes over a length of at least 50 mm (2.0 in.).

No welding repair is permitted over a length of 254 mm (10.0 in.) from each pipe end.


Welder shall be qualified in accordance with Annex D.3.

The properties of the weld repair shall meet the specification requirements of the longitudinal seam


The external surface of the repair weld shall be subject to grinding to obtain a uniform appearance and to merge smoothly into the base material.

Each repaired area shall be 100 % examined by ultrasonic and MT testing. Additional radiographic testing shall be performed if specified by the purchaser.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

f any) and hydrostatic testing.

≤ 5 % of the total weld length for SAW otherwise specified by the purchaser, weld repairs shall be limited to a

Repairs shall be separated by at least 200 mm (7.9 in.). Each repair shall be carried out with a

(10.0 in.) from each pipe end.

of the longitudinal seam

The external surface of the repair weld shall be subject to grinding to obtain a uniform appearance

Each repaired area shall be 100 % examined by ultrasonic and MT testing. Additional radiographic

D.1 General

D.1.2 The existing item b in this clause shall be deleted

D.1.4 The existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following

Test welds shall be made on pipe.

D.2 Repair Welding Procedure Qualification

D.2.1 General

D.2.1.1 Add to this clause the following

WPS for repair welding shall be qualified as follows:

a) One partial repair (minimum of

b) One shallow repair with two weld passes minimum, simulating a

c) Multiple repairs.

Through thickness repairs are not allowed.

Repair welding shall be qualified in a manner realistically simulating the repair situation to be qualified. All repairs shall include a minimum preheating of 100 °C (212 °F), unless the qualification test has shown that a higher temperature is necessary.

Defects in the weld seam may be removed by grinding and repaired by welding carried out by qualified welders, using a previous

D.2.2 Essential Variables


c) 7) if it is agreed to have electrode under matching with respect to the strength of the base material: change in batch number of the electrode (each batch

D.2.3 Mechanical Testing

D.2.3.4.4 The existing clause shall

The minimum average absorbed energy (of a set of three test pieces) for each repair weld and its associated HAZ, shall not be less than that specified in 9.8 for the pipe seam weld and HAZ. The test temperature shall be the same as that required for the weld metal and HAZ.

D.2.3.4.5 Add this clause as the following

Sampling of CVN specimens shall be performed in accordance with Figure D.2 for a partial thickness repair. Minor changes in the sampling location

The test temperature and acceptance criteria shall be the same as those required for unrepaired pipe weld and HAZ (see 9.8).

Dec. 2020 IPS

50

ANNEX D

(Normative)

Repair Welding Procedure

this clause shall be deleted.


hall be made on pipe.

D.2 Repair Welding Procedure Qualification


shall be qualified as follows:

partial repair (minimum of ⅔t repair), simulating a defect located on the fusion line;

shallow repair with two weld passes minimum, simulating a defect located at the weld toe;

ckness repairs are not allowed.

Repair welding shall be qualified in a manner realistically simulating the repair situation to be qualified. All repairs shall include a minimum preheating of 100 °C (212 °F), unless the qualification

igher temperature is necessary.

Defects in the weld seam may be removed by grinding and repaired by welding carried out by qualified welders, using a previously qualified welding procedure.

wing:

7) if it is agreed to have electrode under matching with respect to the strength of the base material: change in batch number of the electrode (each batch shall be individually tested).

clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following

The minimum average absorbed energy (of a set of three test pieces) for each repair weld and its associated HAZ, shall not be less than that specified in 9.8 for the pipe seam weld and HAZ. The

shall be the same as that required for the weld metal and HAZ.

as the following:

Sampling of CVN specimens shall be performed in accordance with Figure D.2 for a partial Minor changes in the sampling location may be accepted by the purchaser.

The test temperature and acceptance criteria shall be the same as those required for unrepaired

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

ect located on the fusion line;

defect located at the weld toe;

Repair welding shall be qualified in a manner realistically simulating the repair situation to be qualified. All repairs shall include a minimum preheating of 100 °C (212 °F), unless the qualification

Defects in the weld seam may be removed by grinding and repaired by welding carried out by

7) if it is agreed to have electrode under matching with respect to the strength of the base shall be individually tested).


The minimum average absorbed energy (of a set of three test pieces) for each repair weld and its associated HAZ, shall not be less than that specified in 9.8 for the pipe seam weld and HAZ. The

Sampling of CVN specimens shall be performed in accordance with Figure D.2 for a partial may be accepted by the purchaser.

The test temperature and acceptance criteria shall be the same as those required for unrepaired

Key

A Weld metal center line.

B Fusion line of repair weld to base metal and fusion line of repair to original weld

C Fusion line + 2 mm (0.08 in.).

Figure D.2

D.2.3.5 Hardness Testing


If hardness testing (HV10) is specified for the longitudinal weld, hardness testing shall also be performed on any repairs to the longitudinal weld.

The typical number and position of the indentations shall be as shown in Figure D.3

Acceptance criteria shall be as peby the purchaser.

Figure D.3 − Partial repair Hardness Indentation Location

Dec. 2020 IPS

51

Fusion line of repair weld to base metal and fusion line of repair to original weld.

Figure D.2 − Partial Repair Charpy Sampling Location

as the following:

(HV10) is specified for the longitudinal weld, hardness testing shall also be rs to the longitudinal weld.

The typical number and position of the indentations shall be as shown in Figure D.3

Acceptance criteria shall be as per Clause 9.17 or applicable annexes and appendices as specified

− Partial repair Hardness Indentation Location

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

(HV10) is specified for the longitudinal weld, hardness testing shall also be

The typical number and position of the indentations shall be as shown in Figure D.3 and D.4.

or applicable annexes and appendices as specified

− Partial repair Hardness Indentation Location

Figure D.4 − Cap Repair Hardness Indentation Location

D.2.3.6 CTOD Testing


If CTOD testing is specified by the purchaser, the qualification of a repaired weld shall be subject to the same CTOD testing, except that surface notched specimens shall be used to sample the weld metal and both HAZs (repair/parent material

An alternative notch specimen may be proposed by the manufacturer as well aspurchaser.

Note 1: As per Clause C.4.2, the rim of the cavity shall not extend by more than 3.2 mm (0.126 in.). See Figure C.1.

D.3 Welding Personnel Performance Qualification

D.3.1 Qualification

D.3.1.1 General


Welding operators performing automatic welding may also be qualified according to ISO 14732.

Dec. 2020 IPS

52

− Cap Repair Hardness Indentation Location

as the following:

If CTOD testing is specified by the purchaser, the qualification of a repaired weld shall be subject to the same CTOD testing, except that surface notched specimens shall be used to sample the weld metal and both HAZs (repair/parent material and repair weld/original weld).

An alternative notch specimen may be proposed by the manufacturer as well as

C.4.2, the rim of the cavity shall not extend by more than 3.2 mm (0.126 in.).

Personnel Performance Qualification



IPS-M-PI-190(4)

If CTOD testing is specified by the purchaser, the qualification of a repaired weld shall be subject to the same CTOD testing, except that surface notched specimens shall be used to sample the weld

An alternative notch specimen may be proposed by the manufacturer as well as approved by the

C.4.2, the rim of the cavity shall not extend by more than 3.2 mm (0.126 in.).


Nondestructive Inspection for Pipe

E.1.3 The existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following

The manufacturer shall have Level 3 personnel responsible for all NDT activities. The UT Level 3 personnel shall be available on call duringspecifications and procedures shall clearly demonstrate the approval of the NDT Level 3 showing an approval date. When required, the manufacturer shall supply the purchaser or the inspector, the qualification number and the expiry date

Note 1: Evaluations of indications shall be performed by a Level 2 or Level 3 personnel only.

E.3.1.1 The existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following

The weld seams and HAZs of welded pipes shall be nondestructively inspected over 100 % of the full length for imperfections, for the entire thickness and width, as specified in Table E.1 and as follows. UT shall be performed in accordance with ISO 10893this annex.

Note 1: UT shall be performed using automated equipment with “conventional” or phased array techniques. UT procedures using time of flight diffraction (ToFD) and transducer (EMAT) equipment shall only be used with the specific written acceptance of the purchaser and on the basis of a specific qualification program accepted by the purchaser.

Note 2: Manual UT (MUT) shall not be permitted as a sub

Note 3: If specified by the purchaser, full Xweld inspection.

Note 4: Real-time (dynamic) radiography is

E.3.1.2 The existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with the foll

All SMLS pipe shall be subject to automated NDT over 100 % of the length and circumferencetransverse, longitudinal and inclined embedded imperfections)

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the applicable codes for testing are:

− ISO 10893-2, Automated Eddy Current Testing;

− ISO 10893-5, Magnetic Particle Inspection; and

− ISO 10893-10, Automated UT for longitudinal and transverse imperfections

Dec. 2020 IPS

53

ANNEX E

(Normative)

Nondestructive Inspection for Pipe Not Required to Meet Annex H, J, or N


The manufacturer shall have Level 3 personnel responsible for all NDT activities. The UT Level 3 personnel shall be available on call during manufacture. All of the manufacturer/supplier NDT specifications and procedures shall clearly demonstrate the approval of the NDT Level 3 showing an approval date. When required, the manufacturer shall supply the purchaser or the inspector, the

ion number and the expiry date of the NDT Level 3 individual.

valuations of indications shall be performed by a Level 2 or Level 3 personnel only.


The weld seams and HAZs of welded pipes shall be nondestructively inspected over 100 % of the full length for imperfections, for the entire thickness and width, as specified in Table E.1 and as follows. UT shall be performed in accordance with ISO 10893-11, as amended or supplemented by

UT shall be performed using automated equipment with “conventional” or phased array techniques. UT procedures using time of flight diffraction (ToFD) and electromagnetic

ent shall only be used with the specific written acceptance of the purchaser and on the basis of a specific qualification program accepted by the purchaser.

anual UT (MUT) shall not be permitted as a substitute or replacement for AUT.

specified by the purchaser, full X-ray supplemented by MUT may be al

time (dynamic) radiography is acceptable if the test results recorded.


All SMLS pipe shall be subject to automated NDT over 100 % of the length and circumferencetransverse, longitudinal and inclined embedded imperfections) as stated in Table E.2.


2, Automated Eddy Current Testing;

5, Magnetic Particle Inspection; and

10, Automated UT for longitudinal and transverse imperfections.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

Not Required to Meet Annex H, J, or N

The manufacturer shall have Level 3 personnel responsible for all NDT activities. The UT Level 3 manufacture. All of the manufacturer/supplier NDT

specifications and procedures shall clearly demonstrate the approval of the NDT Level 3 showing an approval date. When required, the manufacturer shall supply the purchaser or the inspector, the

valuations of indications shall be performed by a Level 2 or Level 3 personnel only.


The weld seams and HAZs of welded pipes shall be nondestructively inspected over 100 % of the full length for imperfections, for the entire thickness and width, as specified in Table E.1 and as

, as amended or supplemented by

UT shall be performed using automated equipment with “conventional” or phased array electromagnetic acoustic

ent shall only be used with the specific written acceptance of the purchaser and on the basis of a specific qualification program accepted by the purchaser.

stitute or replacement for AUT.

ray supplemented by MUT may be allowed for seam

acceptable if the test results recorded.

owing:

All SMLS pipe shall be subject to automated NDT over 100 % of the length and circumference (for as stated in Table E.2.


The existing Table E.1 shall be deleted and replaced with the following

Table E.1 -

Weld seam type

HFW for t < 6 mm

HFW for t ≥ 6 mm

SAW

a. The weld seam at the pipe ends might require additional inspection (see

b. Acceptable EMI method shall be accepted by the purchaser.

c. Required unless the manufacturer a

d. Required as a minimum on pipe ends.

The existing Table E.2 shall be deleted and replaced with the following

Table E.2 -

Item Thickness

PSL 2 pipe, any grade

< 6 mm One method or a combination of methods is required

≥ 6 mm Not

E.3.1.3 The existing clause shall be

a) For seamless pipe, NDT shouldthe purchaser, the required nondestructive inspection of SMLS pipe shall take place at least after each heat treating and coldcropping, beveling, and end sizing;

b) For welded pipe, NDT shall be complrequired nondestructive inspection of weld seamscold expansion.

c) For SAW pipe, NDT shall be done after hydrostatic testing and any sizing practice.

E.3.2 Pipe End Inspection – Welded Pipe

E.3.2.1 Non-inspected Ends

Add title to E.3.2.1 and the existing

For the weld seam at the pipe ends, if an AUT or EMI inspection is applied to meet the requirements of Clause E.3.1.1, the lengths of weld at the pipe ends that are not covered by the automated inspection, up to a maximum of 305 mm (12 in.), shall be inspected for defects using the same inspection parameters as specified in

− UT using an alternative AUT system or semi

Dec. 2020 IPS

54

The existing Table E.1 shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

- Pipe Weld Seam Nondestructive Inspection

NDT Method a

EMI b UT

One method or a combination of methods is required

Not applicable Required

Not applicable Required c

The weld seam at the pipe ends might require additional inspection (see Clause E.3.2).

accepted by the purchaser.

and the purchaser have agreed to replace it by radiographic in

Required as a minimum on pipe ends.

The existing Table E.2 shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

- SMLS Pipe Body Nondestructive Inspection

NDT Method

EMI UT

One method or a combination of methods is required

t applicable Required


should be performed after hydrotesting. Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the required nondestructive inspection of SMLS pipe shall take place at least after

nd cold-expansion operations, if performed, but may take place before cropping, beveling, and end sizing;

For welded pipe, NDT shall be completed after hydrostatic testing. It shall be considered that the required nondestructive inspection of weld seams of cold-expanded pipe shall take place after

For SAW pipe, NDT shall be done after hydrostatic testing and any sizing practice.

Welded Pipe

Add title to E.3.2.1 and the existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following

For the weld seam at the pipe ends, if an AUT or EMI inspection is applied to meet the requirements E.3.1.1, the lengths of weld at the pipe ends that are not covered by the automated

ction, up to a maximum of 305 mm (12 in.), shall be inspected for defects using the same inspection parameters as specified in Clause E.3.1.1, by:

− UT using an alternative AUT system or semi-automated UT (SAUT) system; or

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

RT

Not applicable

Not applicable

Required d

inspection.

MT (circular field)

Not applicable

deleted and replaced with the following:

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the required nondestructive inspection of SMLS pipe shall take place at least after

expansion operations, if performed, but may take place before

eted after hydrostatic testing. It shall be considered that the expanded pipe shall take place after

For SAW pipe, NDT shall be done after hydrostatic testing and any sizing practice.


For the weld seam at the pipe ends, if an AUT or EMI inspection is applied to meet the requirements E.3.1.1, the lengths of weld at the pipe ends that are not covered by the automated

ction, up to a maximum of 305 mm (12 in.), shall be inspected for defects using the same

automated UT (SAUT) system; or

− Manual UT (MUT).

MUT shall only be used to inspect the untested ends of weld seams if prior written acceptance has been obtained from the purchaser. Scanning shall be performed in both circumferential directions using adequate shear wave probes. The shear wave probe angle shall be seleweld and HAZ coverage.

Alternatively, the non-AUT-inspected pipe ends shall be cut off,

a) Non-AUT-inspected weld ends sh

b) Removal of non-AUT-inspected pipe ends does not remove the manufacturer’s obligation to perform radiographic testing (RT) of the weld ends (see

c) Removal of non-AUT-inspected pipe ends does not remove the manufacturer’s obligation to perform UT of the pipe ends (see

d) Where more critical UT acceptance criteria applies to pipe ends than applies to the rest of the pipe, the more critical acceptance criteria shall be applicable to new pipe ends, after noninspected pipe ends have been cut off.

e) Records in accordance with Clause

E.3.2.2 RT of Welds at Pipe Ends


For SAW pipe, the weld at each pipe end for a minimum distance of 200 mm (8.0 in.) shall be inspected by the radiographic method. The results of such radiographic inspection shall be recorded on either film or another imaging medium.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, thusing UT (see Clause E.3.2.1), which shall be taken as the prime inspection method. acceptance shall be by UT. RT shall not be used to

If a defect is detected by any NDT method, i

Note 1: RT inspection shall be X

E.3.2.3 UT for Lamination Check


UT shall be carried out in accordance with ISO 10893and ASTM A435) to verify that the whole circumference of both pipe ends is free from laminar imperfections > 6.4 mm (0.25 in.) in the circumferential direction.

Scanning shall be carried out over a distance of [3.5t + 25 mm (0.98 in.)] or 50 mm (2.0 in.), whichever is greater, from the point where the outside surface meets the pipe end face or bevel.

Pipe end UT shall be undertaken from the outside surface and bespecified by the purchaser, UT may be carried out after beveling from the inside surface following by MT test (with a suitable techniquefind laminar defect on both bevel faces of pipesBevel faces shall be free of indications.

Pipe end lamination check may be performed using MUT.

Note 1: If specified by the purchaser, l

E.3.2.4 SAW Pipe End Circumference


UT shall be carried out to verify thataxially-aligned through-thickness cracking. Scanning shall be performed in both circumferential

Dec. 2020 IPS

55

y be used to inspect the untested ends of weld seams if prior written acceptance has been obtained from the purchaser. Scanning shall be performed in both circumferential directions using adequate shear wave probes. The shear wave probe angle shall be sele

inspected pipe ends shall be cut off, with the following conditions:

inspected weld ends shall not exceed 305 mm (12 in.).

inspected pipe ends does not remove the manufacturer’s obligation to perform radiographic testing (RT) of the weld ends (see Clause E.3.2.2).

inspected pipe ends does not remove the manufacturer’s obligation to form UT of the pipe ends (see Clauses E.3.2.3 and E.3.2.4).

Where more critical UT acceptance criteria applies to pipe ends than applies to the rest of the pipe, the more critical acceptance criteria shall be applicable to new pipe ends, after nonnspected pipe ends have been cut off.

Clause E.5.4 shall be maintained.

E.3.2.2 RT of Welds at Pipe Ends


each pipe end for a minimum distance of 200 mm (8.0 in.) shall be inspected by the radiographic method. The results of such radiographic inspection shall be recorded on either film or another imaging medium.

by the purchaser, the same area subject to RT shall also be inspected E.3.2.1), which shall be taken as the prime inspection method.

acceptance shall be by UT. RT shall not be used to accept defects detected by UT.

y NDT method, it shall be considered rejected.

RT inspection shall be X-ray unless otherwise specified by the purchaser



UT shall be carried out in accordance with ISO 10893-8 or an agreed equivalentto verify that the whole circumference of both pipe ends is free from laminar

> 6.4 mm (0.25 in.) in the circumferential direction.

shall be carried out over a distance of [3.5t + 25 mm (0.98 in.)] or 50 mm (2.0 in.), whichever is greater, from the point where the outside surface meets the pipe end face or bevel.

Pipe end UT shall be undertaken from the outside surface and be inspected before beveling. by the purchaser, UT may be carried out after beveling from the inside surface following by

(with a suitable technique for laminar imperfection e.g. radially through wall thickness)both bevel faces of pipes in accordance with ISO 10893

Bevel faces shall be free of indications.

Pipe end lamination check may be performed using MUT.

If specified by the purchaser, longer scanning distance may be ordered.

SAW Pipe End Circumference

as the following:

UT shall be carried out to verify that at least the 50 mm (2 in.) zone at each pipe end is free of thickness cracking. Scanning shall be performed in both circumferential

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

y be used to inspect the untested ends of weld seams if prior written acceptance has been obtained from the purchaser. Scanning shall be performed in both circumferential directions using adequate shear wave probes. The shear wave probe angle shall be selected to ensure full

with the following conditions:

inspected pipe ends does not remove the manufacturer’s obligation to


Where more critical UT acceptance criteria applies to pipe ends than applies to the rest of the pipe, the more critical acceptance criteria shall be applicable to new pipe ends, after non-AUT-


each pipe end for a minimum distance of 200 mm (8.0 in.) shall be inspected by the radiographic method. The results of such radiographic inspection shall be recorded

e same area subject to RT shall also be inspected E.3.2.1), which shall be taken as the prime inspection method. The final

accept defects detected by UT.

by the purchaser


8 or an agreed equivalent (e.g. ASTM A578 to verify that the whole circumference of both pipe ends is free from laminar

shall be carried out over a distance of [3.5t + 25 mm (0.98 in.)] or 50 mm (2.0 in.), whichever is greater, from the point where the outside surface meets the pipe end face or bevel.

inspected before beveling. If by the purchaser, UT may be carried out after beveling from the inside surface following by

e.g. radially through wall thickness) to in accordance with ISO 10893-5 or ASTM E709;

in.) zone at each pipe end is free of thickness cracking. Scanning shall be performed in both circumferential

directions using adequate shear wave probesinside and outside surfaces shall be used to set the reference and acceptance levels. No cracks shall be allowed.

E.3.2.5 MT of End Face


If specified by the purchaser, MT of pipe end face/bevel inspection for the detection of purchaser), in accordance with ISO 10893indications.

E.3.3 Pipe End Inspection – SMLS Pipe

E.3.3.1 Non-inspected Ends


The lengths of the pipe ends that are not inspected during AUT of the pipe body (seeE.3.1.2), up to a maximum of 305 mm (12 in.), shall be inspected for defects by an alternative AUT system, SAUT or MUT system using angle beam probes, and the same inspection parameters as specified in Clause E.3.1.2. Scanning shall be performed in both cadequate shear wave probes (it should be 45

Note 1: MUT shall only be used to inspect the untested ends of pipes if prior written acceptance has been obtained from the purchaser. Scanning shall be performed in both circumferential directions using adequate shear wave probes.

Alternatively, the non-AUT-inspected pipe ends shall be cut off, with the following conditions:

a) Non-AUT-inspected pipe ends shall be defined and confirmed by a demonstration by the manufacturer.

b) Where more critical UT acceptance criteria applies to the pipe ends than applies to pipe body, the more critical acceptance criteria shall be applicable to the new pipe ends, after non-AUT-inspected pipe ends have been cut off.

c) Removal of non-AUT-inspected pipe ends does not remove the manufacturer’s obligation to perform UT of the pipe ends (see Clauses

d) Records in accordance with Clause



For SMLS pipes also consider as

E.3.3.3 MT of End Face


For SMLS pipes also consider as


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the density of the radiograph shall be between 2.0 and 3.0 in the weld seam and between 2.0 and 3.5 in the parent metal. Film viewers (illuminator) shall be certified for the applicable density ranges.

Dec. 2020 IPS

56

shear wave probes (it should be 45˚). Axially-aligned N5inside and outside surfaces shall be used to set the reference and acceptance levels. No cracks

as the following:

MT of pipe end face/bevel shall be carried out for the detection of laminar imperfections (or other requested imperfections by the

, in accordance with ISO 10893-5 or ASTM E709. The end face shall be free of

SMLS Pipe


The lengths of the pipe ends that are not inspected during AUT of the pipe body (seeE.3.1.2), up to a maximum of 305 mm (12 in.), shall be inspected for defects by an alternative AUT

system using angle beam probes, and the same inspection parameters as E.3.1.2. Scanning shall be performed in both circumferential directions using

adequate shear wave probes (it should be 45˚).

MUT shall only be used to inspect the untested ends of pipes if prior written acceptance has been obtained from the purchaser. Scanning shall be performed in both circumferential directions using adequate shear wave probes.

pected pipe ends shall be cut off, with the following conditions:

inspected pipe ends shall be defined and confirmed by a demonstration by the

Where more critical UT acceptance criteria applies to the pipe ends than applies to pipe body, the more critical acceptance criteria shall be applicable to the new pipe ends, after

inspected pipe ends have been cut off.

inspected pipe ends does not remove the manufacturer’s obligation to rm UT of the pipe ends (see Clauses E.3.3.2).

Clause E.5.4 shall be maintained.

UT for Lamination Check


For SMLS pipes also consider as Clause E3.2.3.

as the following:

For SMLS pipes also consider as Clause E3.2.5.


specified by the purchaser, the density of the radiograph shall be between 2.0 and 3.0 in the weld seam and between 2.0 and 3.5 in the parent metal. Film viewers (illuminator) shall be certified for the applicable density ranges.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

aligned N5 notches on the inside and outside surfaces shall be used to set the reference and acceptance levels. No cracks

shall be carried out associated with UT (or other requested imperfections by the

5 or ASTM E709. The end face shall be free of


The lengths of the pipe ends that are not inspected during AUT of the pipe body (see Clause E.3.1.2), up to a maximum of 305 mm (12 in.), shall be inspected for defects by an alternative AUT

system using angle beam probes, and the same inspection parameters as ircumferential directions using

MUT shall only be used to inspect the untested ends of pipes if prior written acceptance has been obtained from the purchaser. Scanning shall be performed in both circumferential

pected pipe ends shall be cut off, with the following conditions:

inspected pipe ends shall be defined and confirmed by a demonstration by the

Where more critical UT acceptance criteria applies to the pipe ends than applies to the rest of the pipe body, the more critical acceptance criteria shall be applicable to the new pipe ends, after




specified by the purchaser, the density of the radiograph shall be between 2.0 and 3.0 in the weld seam and between 2.0 and 3.5 in the parent metal. Film viewers (illuminator) shall

E.4.6 Defects Found by Radiographic Inspection

Add to this clause as the following

Where suspect indications have been recorded by UT but have not been detected during retesting by RT, the area shall be subjected to further UT. If the repeat UT confirms relevant (i.e. not due to geometrical features or coupling conditions), the UT indication shall be classed as a defect and rejected.

E.5 Ultrasonic and Electromagnetic Inspection

E.5.1.1 Add to this clause the following


a) If specified by the purchaser, the system shall be qualified in accordance with Appendix 3.

b) The NDT system shall be capable of revealing the discontinuities specified by the purchaser and in general, capable of revealing axial and circumferential imperfections (as applicable) in the internal surface, external surface and inner material of pipe, segregations. If specified by the purchase, the NDT system shall have capability for oblique imperfection detection.

c) Equipment shall be capable of automatic paint spray marking of defects or, if agreed with the purchaser, systems that record defect positioning with inspection maps may be accepted.otherwise specified by the purchaser, every four hours, each paint spray, including those of coupling failure, shall be activated in order to clean out the spray nozzle.

d) Scanning systems for AUT of plate or strip(coil) area, and coverage of the full thickness of the plate or

e) Scanning systems for AUT of the pipe weld seam or pipe body shall enable 100 % coverone continuous pass. Coverage shall include the full depth and width of the seam and HAZs of welded pipe (HAZs shall be considered to be at least 3.0 mm (0.12 in.) wide). Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, multiple carriages may be used to

f) For seamless pipes, coverage shall include the inside and outside surfaces and full thickness of the pipe.

g) For welded pipe, an automated weld tracking system for correct positioning of the probes with respect to the weld centerline shall be used, capable of a positional accuracy of ±2 mm (0.08 in.) or better.

h) Any indication above the recording level shall be automatically marked on the pipe surface.

E.5.1.2 Weld seam coverage

The existing clause shall be deleted and

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, ftesting the entire length of the weld MUT, as applicable) and the entire thickness of the weld

a) For HFW, the weld area (including weld seam and HAZ)adjacent parent metal on each si

b) For SAW, the weld area (including weld seam and HAZ)adjacent parent metal on each side of

Note 1: The precision of the weld tracking device shall be taken into account.

Dec. 2020 IPS

57

E.4.6 Defects Found by Radiographic Inspection

as the following:

Where suspect indications have been recorded by UT but have not been detected during retesting by RT, the area shall be subjected to further UT. If the repeat UT confirms the indication as true and relevant (i.e. not due to geometrical features or coupling conditions), the UT indication shall be classed as a defect and rejected.

E.5 Ultrasonic and Electromagnetic Inspection


otherwise specified by the purchaser:

If specified by the purchaser, the system shall be qualified in accordance with Appendix 3.

The NDT system shall be capable of revealing the discontinuities specified by the purchaser and in general, capable of revealing axial and circumferential imperfections (as applicable) in the internal surface, external surface and inner material of pipe, including laminations and segregations. If specified by the purchase, the NDT system shall have capability for oblique

Equipment shall be capable of automatic paint spray marking of defects or, if agreed with the ms that record defect positioning with inspection maps may be accepted.

otherwise specified by the purchaser, every four hours, each paint spray, including those of coupling failure, shall be activated in order to clean out the spray nozzle.

ning systems for AUT of plate or strip(coil) shall enable 100 % coverage of the plate/area, and coverage of the full thickness of the plate or strip(coil).

Scanning systems for AUT of the pipe weld seam or pipe body shall enable 100 % coverone continuous pass. Coverage shall include the full depth and width of the seam and HAZs of welded pipe (HAZs shall be considered to be at least 3.0 mm (0.12 in.) wide). Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, multiple carriages may be used together or separately.

For seamless pipes, coverage shall include the inside and outside surfaces and full thickness of

For welded pipe, an automated weld tracking system for correct positioning of the probes with rline shall be used, capable of a positional accuracy of ±2 mm (0.08 in.)

Any indication above the recording level shall be automatically marked on the pipe surface.


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, for welded pipe, the equipment shall be capable of testing the entire length of the weld area (except for weld ends subject to separate AUT, SAUT or MUT, as applicable) and the entire thickness of the weld area as follows:

area (including weld seam and HAZ) plus at least 1.6 mm (0.063 in.) of adjacent parent metal on each side of the weld area.

the weld area (including weld seam and HAZ) plus at least 1.6 mm (0.063 in.) of adjacent parent metal on each side of the weld area.

The precision of the weld tracking device shall be taken into account.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

Where suspect indications have been recorded by UT but have not been detected during retesting the indication as true and

relevant (i.e. not due to geometrical features or coupling conditions), the UT indication shall be

If specified by the purchaser, the system shall be qualified in accordance with Appendix 3.

The NDT system shall be capable of revealing the discontinuities specified by the purchaser and in general, capable of revealing axial and circumferential imperfections (as applicable) in the

including laminations and segregations. If specified by the purchase, the NDT system shall have capability for oblique

Equipment shall be capable of automatic paint spray marking of defects or, if agreed with the ms that record defect positioning with inspection maps may be accepted. Unless

otherwise specified by the purchaser, every four hours, each paint spray, including those of

shall enable 100 % coverage of the plate/

Scanning systems for AUT of the pipe weld seam or pipe body shall enable 100 % coverage in one continuous pass. Coverage shall include the full depth and width of the seam and HAZs of welded pipe (HAZs shall be considered to be at least 3.0 mm (0.12 in.) wide). Unless otherwise

gether or separately.

For seamless pipes, coverage shall include the inside and outside surfaces and full thickness of

For welded pipe, an automated weld tracking system for correct positioning of the probes with rline shall be used, capable of a positional accuracy of ±2 mm (0.08 in.)

Any indication above the recording level shall be automatically marked on the pipe surface.

or welded pipe, the equipment shall be capable of (except for weld ends subject to separate AUT, SAUT or

plus at least 1.6 mm (0.063 in.) of

plus at least 1.6 mm (0.063 in.) of

E.5.1.3 Manual UT


MUT equipment shall only be used to:

a) Inspect non-AUT-inspected plate edges and plate ends;

b) Inspect non-AUT-inspected pipe ends, if prior written acceptance has been obtained from the purchaser;

c) Verify indications recorded by AUT; and

d) Confirm the rejection or acceptance of indications.

Note 1: Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, requivalent to those used during AUT and tin/s).

Note 2: Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, shall be performed in accordance with ISO 10893used.

E.5.1.4 Probes Used for AUT


Probes used for AUT shall:

a) Enable the sensitivity and scanning coverage required;

b) Be provided with probe data sheets demonstrating the manufacturer, type, beam angle, dimensions, frequency distribution and focusing;

c) Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, for angle beam probes used for UT of weld seams, be provided with data sheets that illustrate the vertical

d) Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, for normal (0°) beam probes, be provided with data sheets that illustrate the lateral

E.5.2 Ultrasonic and Electromagnetic Insp

E.5.2.1 Add to this clause the following

The design and material of reference standards shall be agreed with the purchaser, prior to use.


Reference standards may be of any convenient length, as determined by the manufacturer and accepted by the purchaser.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, reference standards used for dynamic demonstration and repeatability testing shall be full production

Dec. 2020 IPS

58

as the following:

MUT equipment shall only be used to:

inspected plate edges and plate ends;

inspected pipe ends, if prior written acceptance has been obtained from the

indications recorded by AUT; and

the rejection or acceptance of indications.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, recording levels used during MUT shall be alent to those used during AUT and the MUT scanning speed shall not exceed 150 mm/s (

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, MUT for detection of laminar imperfections dance with ISO 10893-9 (Annex A) and dual transducer probes shall be

as the following:

Enable the sensitivity and scanning coverage required;

Be provided with probe data sheets demonstrating the manufacturer, type, beam angle, dimensions, frequency distribution and focusing;

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, for angle beam probes used for UT of weld seams, heets that illustrate the vertical -6 dB beam profile; and

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, for normal (0°) beam probes, be provided with data sheets that illustrate the lateral -6 dB beam profile.

E.5.2 Ultrasonic and Electromagnetic Inspection Reference Standards




standards may be of any convenient length, as determined by the manufacturer and

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, reference standards used for dynamic demonstration and repeatability testing shall be full production length.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

inspected pipe ends, if prior written acceptance has been obtained from the

ecording levels used during MUT shall be shall not exceed 150 mm/s (6

MUT for detection of laminar imperfections ual transducer probes shall be

Be provided with probe data sheets demonstrating the manufacturer, type, beam angle,

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, for angle beam probes used for UT of weld seams, 6 dB beam profile; and

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, for normal (0°) beam probes, be provided with data



standards may be of any convenient length, as determined by the manufacturer and

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, reference standards used for dynamic demonstration

E.5.2.3 The existing Table E.7 shall be

Item

Notch Location

OD ID Longitudinal

HFW

Seam e , i e , i Required

SAW

Seam g

e e Required

SMLS

Pipe e e Required

Note 1: Notches are rectangular or U-shaped.

Note 2: For electromagnetic inspection, hole (see Clause E.5.3.4).

a. It is not necessary to locate reference indicators in the weld.

b. Drilled hole diameters are based on standard drillthreshold.

c. Depth is expressed as a percentage of the specified wall thickness. It is not necessary that the depth be less

(0.012 in.). The depth tolerance is ±15 % of the specified notch depth or

d. Length at full depth.

e. Required if a notch is used to establish reject threshold.

f. At the option of the manufacturer and (see Table E.8 for applicable acceptance

g. At the option of the manufacturer and using weld-edge notches or weld-edge radially drilled holes.

h. At the option of the manufacturer and facilitate the detection of anticipated defects.

i. If specified by the purchaser, the reference standard shall contain OD and ID notches and a radially drilled hole.

j. If specified by the purchaser, the diameter of radially drilled hole may be 3.2

E.5.2.5 Add to this clause the

Visual and dimensional inspection shall be carried out on each reference standard and the results shall be included in a formal report or certificate, demonstrating compliance with the requirements of this specification and the applicable designinformation. The following shall be included as a minimum requir

a) Report identification, date, purchaser name, authorizing name and signature.

b) Reference standard: identification, length, diameter, thickness, material, weld procedure and weld profile (as appropriate), scanning surface profile, and reference

c) N5 / N10 notches: length, width,

d) RDH (radially-drilled hole): diameter, location, angles in two perpendicular planes.

Dec. 2020 IPS

59

Table E.7 shall be deleted and replaced with the followin

Table E.7 - Reference Indicators

Reference Indicators a

Notch Orientation Notch Dimensions

Longitudinal Transverse Depth

c

(%)

Length d

Max.(mm)

Width

Max

Required i Required

h 5.0 50

Required Required 5.0 f 50

Required h Required 5.0 50

shaped.

For electromagnetic inspection, the reference standard shall contain OD notches, ID notches,

It is not necessary to locate reference indicators in the weld.

Drilled hole diameters are based on standard drill-bit sizes. A hole is not required if a notch is used to establish the reject

Depth is expressed as a percentage of the specified wall thickness. It is not necessary that the depth be less

15 % of the specified notch depth or ± 0.05 mm (0.002 in.), whichever is the greater.

Required if a notch is used to establish reject threshold.

and specified by the purchaser, N10 notches or 3.2 mm (0.125 in.) holes may be used (see Table E.8 for applicable acceptance limits).

and specified by the purchaser, for SAW seams, the reject threshold may be established edge radially drilled holes.

and specified by the purchaser, the notches may be oriented at an angle that would defects.

, the reference standard shall contain OD and ID notches and a radially drilled hole.

diameter of radially drilled hole may be 3.2 mm.


Visual and dimensional inspection shall be carried out on each reference standard and the results shall be included in a formal report or certificate, demonstrating compliance with the requirements of this specification and the applicable design. NDT methods may be used to provide additional information. The following shall be included as a minimum requirement:

Report identification, date, purchaser name, authorizing name and signature.

Reference standard: identification, length, diameter, thickness, material, weld procedure and weld profile (as appropriate), scanning surface profile, and reference reflector locations.

notches: length, width, depth, angle and cross-section.

drilled hole): diameter, location, angles in two perpendicular planes.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)


Notch Dimensions Diameter of

Radially Drilled

Hole b

(mm)

Width

ax.(mm)

1.0 1.6 i

1.0 1.6 f

1.0 1.6 j

contain OD notches, ID notches, and a radially drilled

bit sizes. A hole is not required if a notch is used to establish the reject

Depth is expressed as a percentage of the specified wall thickness. It is not necessary that the depth be less than 0.3 mm

0.05 mm (0.002 in.), whichever is the greater.

, N10 notches or 3.2 mm (0.125 in.) holes may be used

reject threshold may be established

, the notches may be oriented at an angle that would

, the reference standard shall contain OD and ID notches and a radially drilled hole.

Visual and dimensional inspection shall be carried out on each reference standard and the results shall be included in a formal report or certificate, demonstrating compliance with the requirements of

. NDT methods may be used to provide additional

Reference standard: identification, length, diameter, thickness, material, weld procedure and reflector locations.

drilled hole): diameter, location, angles in two perpendicular planes.

e) If FBH (flat bottom hole) specifiedsurface, location of end relative to fusion line, angles in two pconfirmation of flatness and perpendicularity of end.

f) If FBH (flat bottom hole) specifieddepth below surface, angles in two perpendicular planes, and confirmatiperpendicularity of end.

g) If SDH (side-drilled hole) specifiedsurface, location, angles in two planes.

E.5.5.1 The existing Table E.8 shall be deleted and replaced with the

Item

SAW or repair weld

Electric weld

SMLS pipe

a. Expressed as a percentage of the indication produced by the reference indicator. The reject threshold (see E.5.3) shall not exceed the applicable acceptance limit.

b. If accepted and specified by the purchaser in order.

c. If specified by the purchaser, the

E.5.8 UT Inspection for Delayed Hydrogen Cracks (Chevron Cracking) Detection


If specified by the purchaser, during MPQT and production,cracking (DHC) shall be performed as specified procedure. AUT may be applied when agreed with the purchaser. AUT procedures and reference pipes shall also be agreed with the purchaser. When AUT is applied, adequate reference flaws shall be added to the reference standard, to asscoverage of the weld.

Note 1: The inspection is limited to SAWindicated in Figure E.1.

Note 2: Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, one pipe per shift shall be selected or 2 % of produced pipes per day, whichever is greater.

Note 3: 100 % of the weld seams shall be tested 48 hours after hydrotest.

Dec. 2020 IPS

60

specified by the purchaser for weld: diameter, drilled depth, depth below surface, location of end relative to fusion line, angles in two perpendicular planes, and

ss and perpendicularity of end.

specified by the purchaser for plate/ strip (coil): diameter, drilled depth, depth below surface, angles in two perpendicular planes, and confirmati

specified by the purchaser: diameter, drilled length, depth below surface, location, angles in two planes.

Table E.8 shall be deleted and replaced with the followin

Table E.8 - Acceptance Limit

Notch Type Hole Size

(mm)

Acceptance Limit

N5 1.6

N10 b 3.2

b

N5 1.6 c

N5 1.6 c

Expressed as a percentage of the indication produced by the reference indicator. The reject threshold (see exceed the applicable acceptance limit.

If accepted and specified by the purchaser in order.

, the hole size may be 3.2 mm.

UT Inspection for Delayed Hydrogen Cracks (Chevron Cracking) Detection

as the following:

during MPQT and production, MUT inspection for delayed hydrogen cracking (DHC) shall be performed as specified procedure. AUT may be applied when agreed with the purchaser. AUT procedures and reference pipes shall also be agreed with the purchaser. When

rence flaws shall be added to the reference standard, to ass

The inspection is limited to SAW pipes and expected DHC Location and Orientat

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, one pipe per shift shall be selected or 2 % of produced pipes per day, whichever is greater.

100 % of the weld seams shall be tested 48 hours after hydrotest.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

for weld: diameter, drilled depth, depth below erpendicular planes, and

: diameter, drilled depth, depth below surface, angles in two perpendicular planes, and confirmation of flatness and

: diameter, drilled length, depth below

following:

Acceptance Limit a

Max. (%)

100

33 b

100

100

Expressed as a percentage of the indication produced by the reference indicator. The reject threshold (see Clause

UT Inspection for Delayed Hydrogen Cracks (Chevron Cracking) Detection

MUT inspection for delayed hydrogen cracking (DHC) shall be performed as specified procedure. AUT may be applied when agreed with the purchaser. AUT procedures and reference pipes shall also be agreed with the purchaser. When

rence flaws shall be added to the reference standard, to assure 100 %

pipes and expected DHC Location and Orientation is

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, one pipe per shift shall be selected or 2 % of

Figure E.1

E.6 Magnetic Particle Inspection


Surface imperfections revealed by magnetic particle inspection shall be investigated, classified, and treated as Clause 9.10.7.

E.6.2 Equipment


Magnetization shall be carried out in two perpendicular directions for pipe bodies and in at least one direction (for circumferential defects) for pipe end bevels.

Dec. 2020 IPS

61

Figure E.1 – Expected DHC Locations and Orientations

Magnetic Particle Inspection


Surface imperfections revealed by magnetic particle inspection shall be investigated, classified, and


Magnetization shall be carried out in two perpendicular directions for pipe bodies and in at least one direction (for circumferential defects) for pipe end bevels.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)


Surface imperfections revealed by magnetic particle inspection shall be investigated, classified, and

Magnetization shall be carried out in two perpendicular directions for pipe bodies and in at least one

E.6.4 MT of Long Seam for SAW


If specified by the purchaser during MPQT and productionshall be inspected 48 hours minimum after welding.

Note 1: Magnetic particle testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E709.

Note 2: For pipe with D ≥ 609.6 mm (24 in.), the entire internal weld shall be MT inspected.

Note 3: Indications > 3.2 mm (0.125 in.) in any direction shall be classified as defects.

Note 4: Cracks are not acceptable.


Measurements shall be made on each end of a pipe, selected at least three operating shift.


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, faround the circumference of each end of the pimT (20 Gs), and no one reading shall exceed 2.5 mT (25 Gs) when measured with a Hallgaussmeter or equivalent values when measured by the purchaser.

E.8 Laminar Imperfections in the Pipe Body of

Add "SMLS" to existing E.8 title.


For HFW pipe, ultrasonic inspection shall be used to verify that the pipe imperfections greater than those permitted by:

a) ISO 10893-9 (Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, acceptance level U2)inspection is done prior to pipe forming, or

b) ISO 10893-8 (Unless otherwise specified by theinspection is done after seam welding.

Note 1: Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, tof the area of the strip100% of the area of the


For SAW pipe, ultrasonic inspection shall be used tois free of laminar imperfections greater than those permitted by ISO 10893

Note 1: Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the scanning coverage shall be at least 50 % of the area of the strip(coil)/plate 100% of the area of the strip(coil)

Note 2: If specified by the purchaser, ISO 10893such inspection after seam welding.

Dec. 2020 IPS

62

E.6.4 MT of Long Seam for SAW

as the following:

during MPQT and production, the full seam weld ofshall be inspected 48 hours minimum after welding.

Magnetic particle testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E709.

≥ 609.6 mm (24 in.), the entire internal weld shall be MT inspected.

3.2 mm (0.125 in.) in any direction shall be classified as defects.

Cracks are not acceptable.


easurements shall be made on each end of a pipe, selected at least three


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, four readings shall be taken approximately 90° apart around the circumference of each end of the pipe. The average of the four readings shall be

(20 Gs), and no one reading shall exceed 2.5 mT (25 Gs) when measured with a Hallgaussmeter or equivalent values when measured with another type of instrument that is approved

E.8 Laminar Imperfections in the Pipe Body of HFW, SAW and SMLS Pipe

Add "SMLS" to existing E.8 title.


ultrasonic inspection shall be used to verify that the pipe body is free ofimperfections greater than those permitted by:

(Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, acceptance level U2)inspection is done prior to pipe forming, or

(Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, acceptance level Uinspection is done after seam welding.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the scanning coverage shall bestrip (coil) or pipe body. The scanning coverage may be increased up to

100% of the area of the strip (coil) or pipe body, at the COMPANY's discretion.


For SAW pipe, ultrasonic inspection shall be used to verify that the strip(coil)/plate (or the pipe body) is free of laminar imperfections greater than those permitted by ISO 10893-9 acceptance level U2.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the scanning coverage shall be at least 50 % /plate or pipe body. The scanning coverage may be increased up to (coil)/plate or pipe body, at the COMPANY's discretion.

by the purchaser, ISO 10893-8 (acceptance level U2), shall be considered for such inspection after seam welding.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

of one pipe per shift

Magnetic particle testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E709.

≥ 609.6 mm (24 in.), the entire internal weld shall be MT inspected.

3.2 mm (0.125 in.) in any direction shall be classified as defects.

easurements shall be made on each end of a pipe, selected at least three times per 4 h per

our readings shall be taken approximately 90° apart pe. The average of the four readings shall be ≤ 2.0

(20 Gs), and no one reading shall exceed 2.5 mT (25 Gs) when measured with a Hall-effect with another type of instrument that is approved

body is free of laminar

(Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, acceptance level U2), if such

acceptance level U2), if such

he scanning coverage shall be at least 50 % The scanning coverage may be increased up to

discretion.

/plate (or the pipe body) acceptance level U2.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the scanning coverage shall be at least 50 % or pipe body. The scanning coverage may be increased up to

discretion.

8 (acceptance level U2), shall be considered for

E.8.3 Add this clause as the following

For SMLS pipes, ultrasonic inspection shall be used to verify that the body of pipe imperfections greater than those permitted by ISO 10893

Note 1: Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the scanning coverage shall be at leaof the area of the pipe body. The scanning coverage may be increased up to 100% of the area of the pipe body, at the COMPANY

Note 2: If specified by the purchaser, ISO 10893

Note 3: EMT may be applied for nominal wall thickness less

E.9 Laminar Imperfections along


For HFW and SAW pipes, ultrasonic inspection shall be used to verify that(0.98 in.)] or 50 mm (2.0 in.), whichever is greater,edges or along each side of the pipe weld seam is free of laminarpermitted by:

a) ISO 10893-9 acceptance level U2, if such inspection is done prior to pipe forming, or

b) ISO 10893-8 acceptance level U2, if such inspection is done after seam welding.

Note 1: The scanning coverage shall

Note 2: If specified by the purchaser,performed on both the plate and along the pipe weld seam.


E.11 Thickness Measurement


E.11.1 Seamless Pipes

For SMLS pipes, full peripheral accordance with ISO 10893-12 or ASTM E114 for verification of compliance with the applicable minimum permissible wall thickness requirement. area of the pipe.

Note 1: Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, manually ultrasonic thickness measurements shall be done approximately withincircumferentially each 90 degree apart.


E.11.2 Welded Pipes


E.11.2.1 Steel Plate Wall Thickness Measurement

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser,minimum four locations equally apart(i.e. twelve measurements on each plate)

Dec. 2020 IPS

63

as the following:

ultrasonic inspection shall be used to verify that the body of pipe imperfections greater than those permitted by ISO 10893-8 acceptance level U2.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the scanning coverage shall be at leaof the area of the pipe body. The scanning coverage may be increased up to 100% of the area of

COMPANY's discretion.

If specified by the purchaser, ISO 10893-8 acceptance level U1 may be used.

EMT may be applied for nominal wall thickness less than 6mm, according to

along the Strip/Plate Edges or Weld Seam of HFW


ultrasonic inspection shall be used to verify that at least(0.98 in.)] or 50 mm (2.0 in.), whichever is greater, wide zone along each of the stripedges or along each side of the pipe weld seam is free of laminar imperfections greater than those

9 acceptance level U2, if such inspection is done prior to pipe forming, or

8 acceptance level U2, if such inspection is done after seam welding.

age shall be 100 % of the area.

If specified by the purchaser, for pipes, UT for detection of laminar imperfections shall be performed on both the plate and along the pipe weld seam.

as the following:

Thickness Measurement

as the following:

full peripheral ultrasonic thickness measurements shall be carried out in12 or ASTM E114 for verification of compliance with the applicable

minimum permissible wall thickness requirement. Scanning coverage shall be at least 25 % of the

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, manually ultrasonic thickness measurements within 50 mm (2.0 in.) of each pipe end at least

circumferentially each 90 degree apart.

as the following:

as the following:

.2.1 Steel Plate Wall Thickness Measurement

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, wall thickness checks shall be performed, as a four locations equally apart on the straight line in the middle and edges of the

measurements on each plate).

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

ultrasonic inspection shall be used to verify that the body of pipe is free of laminar 8 acceptance level U2.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the scanning coverage shall be at least 50 % of the area of the pipe body. The scanning coverage may be increased up to 100% of the area of

8 acceptance level U1 may be used.

6mm, according to Table E.2.

HFW and SAW Pipe

at least the [3.5t + 25 mm wide zone along each of the strip(coil)/plate

mperfections greater than those

9 acceptance level U2, if such inspection is done prior to pipe forming, or

8 acceptance level U2, if such inspection is done after seam welding.

for pipes, UT for detection of laminar imperfections shall be

ultrasonic thickness measurements shall be carried out in 12 or ASTM E114 for verification of compliance with the applicable

Scanning coverage shall be at least 25 % of the

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, manually ultrasonic thickness measurements at least at four locations

wall thickness checks shall be performed, as a in the middle and edges of the each plates

Steel plate thickness measurements shall be such that the specified minimum and maximum wall thickness of finished pipes are met.


E.11.2.2 Pipe Wall Thickness Measurement

For SAW pipe, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, manually ultrasonic thickness measurements shall be done approximately within 50 mm (2.0 in.) of each pipe ends at least at three locations circumferentially, aseam weld and on the opposite side to the seam weld (i.e. six measurements on each pipe).

Note 1: If specified by the purchaser, (specially when steel plate thickness measurement had not carried out), manually ultrasonic thickness measurement, at least in the middle of the each SAW pipe should be done associated with ends of each pipe as above.

For HFW pipe, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, manually ultrasonic thickness measurements shall be done approximately within 50 mm (2.0 in.) of each pipe ends at least at three locations circumferentially, approximately 20 mm (0.79 in.) from edges of both sides of seam weld and on the opposite side to the seam weld (i.e. six measurements on eac

Note 2: If specified by the purchaser, manually ultrasonic thickness measurement in the middle of each HFW pipe should be done associated with ends of each pipe as above.


E.12 Calibrations, Control Checks and

NDT equipment, facilities, consumables and processes shall be subject to a documented system of routine calibrations, control checks and maintenance. NDT equipments shall be calibrated at least once per 4 hours operating shift.

Dec. 2020 IPS

64

Steel plate thickness measurements shall be such that the specified minimum and maximum wall thickness of finished pipes are met.

as the following:

Pipe Wall Thickness Measurement

For SAW pipe, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, manually ultrasonic thickness measurements shall be done approximately within 50 mm (2.0 in.) of each pipe ends at least at three locations circumferentially, approximately 20 mm (0.79 in.) from weld toes of both sides of seam weld and on the opposite side to the seam weld (i.e. six measurements on each pipe).

If specified by the purchaser, (specially when steel plate thickness measurement had not d out), manually ultrasonic thickness measurement, at least in the middle of the each SAW

pipe should be done associated with ends of each pipe as above.

For HFW pipe, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, manually ultrasonic thickness shall be done approximately within 50 mm (2.0 in.) of each pipe ends at least at

three locations circumferentially, approximately 20 mm (0.79 in.) from edges of both sides of seam weld and on the opposite side to the seam weld (i.e. six measurements on each pipe).

If specified by the purchaser, manually ultrasonic thickness measurement in the middle of each HFW pipe should be done associated with ends of each pipe as above.

as the following:

Calibrations, Control Checks and Maintenance

NDT equipment, facilities, consumables and processes shall be subject to a documented system of routine calibrations, control checks and maintenance. NDT equipments shall be calibrated at least once per 4 hours operating shift.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

Steel plate thickness measurements shall be such that the specified minimum and maximum wall

For SAW pipe, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, manually ultrasonic thickness measurements shall be done approximately within 50 mm (2.0 in.) of each pipe ends at least at

pproximately 20 mm (0.79 in.) from weld toes of both sides of seam weld and on the opposite side to the seam weld (i.e. six measurements on each pipe).

If specified by the purchaser, (specially when steel plate thickness measurement had not d out), manually ultrasonic thickness measurement, at least in the middle of the each SAW

For HFW pipe, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, manually ultrasonic thickness shall be done approximately within 50 mm (2.0 in.) of each pipe ends at least at

three locations circumferentially, approximately 20 mm (0.79 in.) from edges of both sides of seam h pipe).

If specified by the purchaser, manually ultrasonic thickness measurement in the middle of

NDT equipment, facilities, consumables and processes shall be subject to a documented system of routine calibrations, control checks and maintenance. NDT equipments shall be calibrated at least

PSL 2 Pipe Ordered for Sour Service

H.1 Introduction


Material supplied according to this annex shall also comply with NACE MR0175/ISO 15156. Where conflicting requirements arise, the most stringent requirement

Pipe that has not been intentionally manufactured to be HIC resistant steel shall not be used, even if it has passed subsequent HIC tests.

In case of conflict between clauses of part II in this standard and this Annex requirements, the most stringent requirements shall be applied for pipe ordered for sour service.

H.3 Manufacturing

H.3.2.1 Add to this clause the following

All pipes shall be manufactured in accordance with a manufacturing procedure that has been qualified to the requirements of Annex B, supplemented with additional testing speAnnex H (refer to Table H.3).specified by the purchaser, the following

1. Sulfur print testing shall be carried out for the steel ussegregation and distribution of sulfide inclusions to ensure the uniformity of productions. The test results shall not exhibit segregations.inspection frequency shall be at least one sample per each five heat No. or charge No. (whichever applicable) under the same manufacturing conditions.

2. The base metal shall have inclusion ratings severity level, not higher than the severity 1 should be considered for all types of heavy and thin inclusions (i.e. types A,B,C and D inclusions).

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency shall be at least one sample per each five heat No. or charge No. (whichever applicable) under the same manufacturing conditions.

3. The steel used for the manufacture of pipe, structure (i.e. ferrite or pearlite/martensite). Acceptmanufacturer and the purchaser; purchaser, the inspection frequency shall be at least one sample per each five heat No. or charge No. (whichever applicable)

4. The steel used for the manufacture of pipe shall not exhibit banded structure in terms of carbon / carbides segregation. Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency shall be at least one sample per each five heat No. or charge No. (whichever applicable) under the same manufacturing conditions.

5. The degree of banding or orientation of microstructure measurement (and bidirectional mechanical tests, if required by the purchaser) for SMLS and welded pipes shall also beout after final mechanical and thermal processes of pipe manufacturing toacceptance criteria that is comply with related

H.3.2.2 Add to this clause the following

The gas content of Oxygen, Hydrogen and Nitrogen within molten steel online (and documented) and be equal or less than 25 ppm, 2 ppm and 80 ppm, respectively. The

Dec. 2020 IPS

65

ANNEX H

(Normative)

PSL 2 Pipe Ordered for Sour Service


Material supplied according to this annex shall also comply with NACE MR0175/ISO 15156. Where conflicting requirements arise, the most stringent requirement shall apply.

ipe that has not been intentionally manufactured to be HIC resistant steel shall not be used, even if it has passed subsequent HIC tests.

In case of conflict between clauses of part II in this standard and this Annex requirements, the most stringent requirements shall be applied for pipe ordered for sour service.


All pipes shall be manufactured in accordance with a manufacturing procedure that has been of Annex B, supplemented with additional testing spe

Table H.3). Beside the requirements of Clause 8.3.3 andthe followings shall be considered:

carried out for the steel used for the manufacture of pipe segregation and distribution of sulfide inclusions to ensure the uniformity of productions. The test results shall not exhibit segregations. Unless otherwise specified by the purchaseinspection frequency shall be at least one sample per each five heat No. or charge No. (whichever applicable) under the same manufacturing conditions.

The base metal shall have inclusion ratings in accordance with ASTM E45 method Dseverity level, not higher than the severity 1 should be considered for all types of heavy and thin inclusions (i.e. types A,B,C and D inclusions).

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency shall be at least one per each five heat No. or charge No. (whichever applicable) under the same

steel used for the manufacture of pipe, at location ¼t and ½t shall be examined for a banded structure (i.e. ferrite or pearlite/martensite). Acceptance criteria shall be agreed between themanufacturer and the purchaser; it should be no banded. Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency shall be at least one sample per each five heat No. or charge No. (whichever applicable) under the same manufacturing conditions.

The steel used for the manufacture of pipe shall not exhibit banded structure in terms of carbon / Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency

e sample per each five heat No. or charge No. (whichever applicable) under the same manufacturing conditions.

The degree of banding or orientation of microstructure measurement (and bidirectional mechanical tests, if required by the purchaser) for SMLS and welded pipes shall also beout after final mechanical and thermal processes of pipe manufacturing to

comply with related requirements for ordered pipes.


The gas content of Oxygen, Hydrogen and Nitrogen within molten steel or product online (and documented) and be equal or less than 25 ppm, 2 ppm and 80 ppm, respectively. The

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

Material supplied according to this annex shall also comply with NACE MR0175/ISO 15156. Where

ipe that has not been intentionally manufactured to be HIC resistant steel shall not be used, even if

In case of conflict between clauses of part II in this standard and this Annex requirements, the most

All pipes shall be manufactured in accordance with a manufacturing procedure that has been of Annex B, supplemented with additional testing specified within

Beside the requirements of Clause 8.3.3 and unless otherwise

ed for the manufacture of pipe to reveal the segregation and distribution of sulfide inclusions to ensure the uniformity of productions. The test

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency shall be at least one sample per each five heat No. or charge No.

in accordance with ASTM E45 method D. The severity level, not higher than the severity 1 should be considered for all types of heavy and thin

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency shall be at least one per each five heat No. or charge No. (whichever applicable) under the same

at location ¼t and ½t shall be examined for a banded ance criteria shall be agreed between the

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency shall be at least one sample per each five heat No. or

The steel used for the manufacture of pipe shall not exhibit banded structure in terms of carbon / Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the inspection frequency

e sample per each five heat No. or charge No. (whichever applicable) under

The degree of banding or orientation of microstructure measurement (and bidirectional mechanical tests, if required by the purchaser) for SMLS and welded pipes shall also be carried out after final mechanical and thermal processes of pipe manufacturing to ensure achieving

for ordered pipes.

or product shall be checked online (and documented) and be equal or less than 25 ppm, 2 ppm and 80 ppm, respectively. The

inspection frequency shall be at least one sample per heat No. under the same manufacturing conditions.

H.3.2.3 The existing clause shall be del

The molten steel shall be treated for inclusion shape control. A procedure (e.g. metallographic examination) may be agreed between the purchaser and the manufacturer to assess the effectiveness of inclusion shape

H.3.3 Pipe Manufacturing

H.3.3.1 SMLS Pipe


SMLS pipe shall be manufactured from continuously cast (strand cast) or ingot steel if the purchaser. If the process of document.

H.3.3.2 Welded Pipe

H.3.3.2.1 The existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following

Strip (coil) and plate used for the manufacture of welded pipe shall be rolled (strand cast) or pressure cast slabs. The pipe shall be SAWL, SAWH or HFW.


For HFW pipe, the abutting edges of coil or plate shall be machined or milled.

Note 1: Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, s


For HFW pipe, such coil and plate shall be inspected ultrasonically for laminar imperfections or mechanical damage in accordance with K.4, either before or after cutting the coil or plate, or the completed pipe shall be subjected to full


Strip(coil)/plate end welds are not permitted.


Intermittent tack welding of the SAWL groove shall not be used.

H.3.3.2.7 Add this clause as the following

If specified by the purchaser, welding consumables shall comply with Appendix 1.

H.3.4 Cold Sizing and Cold Expansion


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser(evenly distributed throughout production) or every 10 pipes per shift, whichever is greater, and also on MPQT pipe used for qualification of the MPS.

Dec. 2020 IPS

66

inspection frequency shall be at least one sample per heat No. under the same manufacturing


The molten steel shall be treated for inclusion shape control. A procedure (e.g. metallographic examination) may be agreed between the purchaser and the manufacturer to assess the

ess of inclusion shape control.


SMLS pipe shall be manufactured from continuously cast (strand cast) or ingot steel if the purchaser. If the process of cold finishing was used, this shall be stated in the inspection


and plate used for the manufacture of welded pipe shall be rolled from continuously cast (strand cast) or pressure cast slabs. The pipe shall be SAWL, SAWH or HFW.


For HFW pipe, the abutting edges of coil or plate shall be machined or milled.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, shearing is not permitted.


uch coil and plate shall be inspected ultrasonically for laminar imperfections or mechanical damage in accordance with K.4, either before or after cutting the coil or plate, or the completed pipe shall be subjected to full-body inspection, including ultrasonic inspection.


/plate end welds are not permitted.


the SAWL groove shall not be used.

as the following:

elding consumables shall comply with Appendix 1.

H.3.4 Cold Sizing and Cold Expansion

as the following:

specified by the purchaser, the sizing ratio shall be recorded for ten pipes per shift (evenly distributed throughout production) or every 10 pipes per shift, whichever is greater, and also on MPQT pipe used for qualification of the MPS.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

inspection frequency shall be at least one sample per heat No. under the same manufacturing

eted and replaced with the following:

The molten steel shall be treated for inclusion shape control. A procedure (e.g. metallographic examination) may be agreed between the purchaser and the manufacturer to assess the

SMLS pipe shall be manufactured from continuously cast (strand cast) or ingot steel if specified by cold finishing was used, this shall be stated in the inspection


from continuously cast



uch coil and plate shall be inspected ultrasonically for laminar imperfections or mechanical damage in accordance with K.4, either before or after cutting the coil or plate, or the

onic inspection.



elding consumables shall comply with Appendix 1.

, the sizing ratio shall be recorded for ten pipes per shift (evenly distributed throughout production) or every 10 pipes per shift, whichever is greater, and also

H.4 Acceptance Criteria

H.4.1 Chemical Composition

H.4.1.1 The existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following

For PSL 2pipe with t ≤ 25.0 mm (0.984 in.), the chemical composition for standard grades shall be according to all requirements of them, the most stringent requirements shall be applied for pipe ordered for sour service

The pipe designation shall be as given in Table H.1 and consists of an alpha or alphanumeric designation that identifies the grade, followed by a suffix that consists of a letter (N, Q, or M) that identifies the delivery condition and a second letter (S) that identifies the service condition.

Note 1: The footnotes "d", "e" and "h"purchaser.

Note 2: The footnotes "c", "f", "i", "j" and "k" of Table H.1 shall be carried outspecified by the purchaser.

Note 3: In case of conflict among chemical this standard, the requirements

H.4.1.2 The existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following

For PSL 2 pipe with t > 25.0 mm (0.984 in.), the chemical composition shall purchaser, this standard and with the requirements of Table H.1 being amended as appropriate.

H.4.2 Tensile Properties


The tensile properties shall be in accordance with

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, mfrom B to X65 shall be changed

Add to footnote "e" in Table H

The specified minimum elongation, A

Add footnote "f" to Table H.2:

Footnote f: Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the measured yield strength values shall not exceed the minimum values which are indicated in Table

H.4.3 HIC/SWC Test


Note 1: Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, ultrasonic testing.

Note 2: If specified by the purchaserthe followings shall be considered

1. Crack sensitivity ratio, crack length ratio and crack thickness ratio limits shallsection of pipe.

Dec. 2020 IPS

67


≤ 25.0 mm (0.984 in.), the chemical composition for standard grades shall be according to all requirements of Clause 9.2 and modified by Table H.1; In case of conflict between them, the most stringent requirements shall be applied for pipe ordered for sour service

The pipe designation shall be as given in Table H.1 and consists of an alpha or alphanumeric hat identifies the grade, followed by a suffix that consists of a letter (N, Q, or M) that

identifies the delivery condition and a second letter (S) that identifies the service condition.

, "e" and "h" of Table H.1 are not permitted unless

"f", "i", "j" and "k" of Table H.1 shall be carried out

In case of conflict among chemical requirements of API 5L and chemical of this standard shall be carried out.


For PSL 2 pipe with t > 25.0 mm (0.984 in.), the chemical composition shall purchaser, this standard and with the requirements of Table H.1 being amended as appropriate.


The tensile properties shall be in accordance with Clause 9.3 and Table H.2.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, maximum ratio Rt0.5 / Rm in Table ed to 0.90.

H.2, the following:

The specified minimum elongation, Af, not be less than 20%.

:

: Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the measured yield strength values shall not exceed the minimum values which are indicated in Table H.2, by more than 120 MPa.


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, detection of HIC shall be carried out by

If specified by the purchaser, evaluation of HIC shall be carried out by ultrasonic testing and the followings shall be considered:

ensitivity ratio, crack length ratio and crack thickness ratio limits shall

IPS-M-PI-190(4)


≤ 25.0 mm (0.984 in.), the chemical composition for standard grades shall be In case of conflict between

them, the most stringent requirements shall be applied for pipe ordered for sour service.

The pipe designation shall be as given in Table H.1 and consists of an alpha or alphanumeric hat identifies the grade, followed by a suffix that consists of a letter (N, Q, or M) that

identifies the delivery condition and a second letter (S) that identifies the service condition.

not permitted unless specified by the

"f", "i", "j" and "k" of Table H.1 shall be carried out unless otherwise

and chemical requirements of


For PSL 2 pipe with t > 25.0 mm (0.984 in.), the chemical composition shall be agreed with the purchaser, this standard and with the requirements of Table H.1 being amended as appropriate.

H.2, for pipe grades

: Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the measured yield strength values shall 120 MPa.

of HIC shall be carried out by

evaluation of HIC shall be carried out by ultrasonic testing and

ensitivity ratio, crack length ratio and crack thickness ratio limits shall apply to each

2. Alternative acceptance criteria (to be specified by the purchaser

3. Crack area ratio (CAR) = 5 % maximum of the specimen area, per shall include all cracks and all laminations whether they are associated with cracks or not.

4. Damage due to hydrogen pressure induced cracking related features such as blistering, straight and stepwise cracks shall be measured and repo

H.4.4 Hardness Test


For test pieces subjected to a hardness test (see H.7.3), the hardness in the pipe body, the weld, and HAZ shall be ≤ 250 HV10 or 22 HRC (70.6 HR 15N).

H.4.5 SSC Test


After removal of the SSC test specimens (see H.7.3.2) from the test medium, the specimen surfacepreviously under tension shall be examined under a lowThe occurrence of any surface breaking fissures or cracks on the tension surface of the test specimen shall constitute failure of the specimen unless it can be demonstrated that these are not the result of SSC.

Note 1: Only SSC or stress orconsidered for evaluation.

Note 2: If specified by the purchaser, test results shall be assessed as per NACE TM 0316, Sec. 9.

H.4.6 Fracture Toughness


If specified by the purchaser, additional CTOD testing shall be performed in the environment also defined in the purchase order.

The manufacturer shall submit a CTOD testing procedure for review and approval by the purchaser.

H.5 Surface conditions, imper

H.5.2 The existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following

For welded pipe hard spot shaindentations, exceeds 250 HV10,treated in accordance with subclauses "b" and "c" of Clause

H.7 Inspection

The existing Table H.3 shall be deleted and replaced by the following

Dec. 2020 IPS

68

acceptance criteria (to be specified by the purchaser) shall apply.

area ratio (CAR) = 5 % maximum of the specimen area, per specimen. The CAR shall include all cracks and all laminations whether they are associated with cracks or not.

Damage due to hydrogen pressure induced cracking related features such as blistering, straight and stepwise cracks shall be measured and reported.


For test pieces subjected to a hardness test (see H.7.3), the hardness in the pipe body, the weld, ≤ 250 HV10 or 22 HRC (70.6 HR 15N).


After removal of the SSC test specimens (see H.7.3.2) from the test medium, the specimen surfacepreviously under tension shall be examined under a low-power microscope at X10The occurrence of any surface breaking fissures or cracks on the tension surface of the test specimen shall constitute failure of the specimen unless it can be demonstrated that these are not

Only SSC or stress orientated hydrogen induced cracking (SOHIC) cracks shall be

If specified by the purchaser, test results shall be assessed as per NACE TM 0316, Sec. 9.

as the following:

, additional CTOD testing shall be performed in the environment also


mperfections and defects


hall be classified as a defect if its hardness, based10, 22 HRC or 240 HBW. Pipes that contain such

subclauses "b" and "c" of Clause C.3.

shall be deleted and replaced by the following:

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

) shall apply.

specimen. The CAR shall include all cracks and all laminations whether they are associated with cracks or not.

Damage due to hydrogen pressure induced cracking related features such as blistering,

For test pieces subjected to a hardness test (see H.7.3), the hardness in the pipe body, the weld,

After removal of the SSC test specimens (see H.7.3.2) from the test medium, the specimen surface power microscope at X100 magnification.

The occurrence of any surface breaking fissures or cracks on the tension surface of the test specimen shall constitute failure of the specimen unless it can be demonstrated that these are not

ientated hydrogen induced cracking (SOHIC) cracks shall be

If specified by the purchaser, test results shall be assessed as per NACE TM 0316, Sec. 9.

, additional CTOD testing shall be performed in the environment also


based upon individual such defects shall be

No Type of inspection

1 Hardness testing of pipe with D < 508 mm (20.000 in.).

2 Hardness testing of pipe with D ≥ 508 mm (20.000 in.).

3 Hardness testing of hard spots in welded pipe.

4

Hardness testing of the

longitudinal seam weld

of welded pipe.

5 Metallographic testing for banding

and inclusion evaluations .

6 Pipe diameter and out-of-roundness for pipe.

7 Non-destructive inspection.

8 HIC test.

9 SSC test.

a. The cold-expansion ratio is designated by the manufacturer and is derived using the designated before

diameter or circumference and the aftercoldexpansion ratio of more than 0.002 requires the creation of a new test unit.

H.7.2 Samples and Test Pieces for Mechanical and Technological Tests

H.7.2.1 General


For HIC and SSC testing, detailed drawings of test specimens sampling for MPQT and production tests shall be issued by the manufacturer and submitted for the purchaser’s approval, as part of the MPS. These drawings shall:

a) Precisely define the specimen location (along the length, around the circumference and in the pipe wall thickness); and

b) Give a unique identification number for each test specimen.

H.7.2.2 Samples for HIC/SWC Tests


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the following shall be considered:

For SMLS pipes, three sets of three specimens shall be taken from each test pipe as follows: one set cut in the base material in a direction parallel to the rolling direction at

Dec. 2020 IPS

69

Table H.3 - Inspection Frequency.

Type of pipe Frequency

SMLS, HFW, SAWL. Once per test unit of not more thanpipe with the same coldexpansion

SMLS, HFW, SAWL. Once per test unit of not more than pipe with the same coldexpansion

Hardness testing of hard spots in HFW, SAWL.

Each hard spot found o

surface of the pipe.

HFW, SAWL. Once per test unit of no

pipe with the same cold

Metallographic testing for banding SMLS, HFW, SAWL.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, it

shall be performed once per each five heat.

roundness SMLS, HFW, SAWL. All pipe.

SMLS, HFW, SAWL. In accordance with Ann

SMLS, HFW, SAWL.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser,One test for each of the first three heatsthereafter, not less than oneof steel.

SMLS, HFW, SAWL.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser,One test for each pipe provided forprocedure qualification

If specified by the purchaserOne test for each of the first three heatsapplied; thereafter, not less than onetest per each ten heats of steel

expansion ratio is designated by the manufacturer and is derived using the designated beforediameter or circumference and the after-expansion outside diameter or circumference; an increase or decrease in the

of more than 0.002 requires the creation of a new test unit.

H.7.2 Samples and Test Pieces for Mechanical and Technological Tests

as the following:

For HIC and SSC testing, detailed drawings of test specimens sampling for MPQT and production tests shall be issued by the manufacturer and submitted for the purchaser’s approval, as part of the

Precisely define the specimen location (along the length, around the circumference and in the pipe

Give a unique identification number for each test specimen.

H.7.2.2 Samples for HIC/SWC Tests


less otherwise specified by the purchaser, the following shall be considered:

or SMLS pipes, three sets of three specimens shall be taken from each test pipe as follows: one set cut in the base material in a direction parallel to the rolling direction at each of the three 120° location

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

y of inspection

per test unit of not more than 100 lengths of pipe with the same coldexpansion ratio

a.

per test unit of not more than 50 lengths of pipe with the same coldexpansion ratio

a.

on the internal or external

not more than 50 lengths of

old-expansion ratio a.

specified by the purchaser, it

shall be performed once per each five heat.

nex K.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, One test for each of the first three heats applied; thereafter, not less than one test per each ten heats

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, pipe provided for manufacturing

test (MPQT).

If specified by the purchaser, One test for each of the first three heats applied; thereafter, not less than one test per each ten heats of steel.

expansion ratio is designated by the manufacturer and is derived using the designated before-expansion outside expansion outside diameter or circumference; an increase or decrease in the

For HIC and SSC testing, detailed drawings of test specimens sampling for MPQT and production tests shall be issued by the manufacturer and submitted for the purchaser’s approval, as part of the

Precisely define the specimen location (along the length, around the circumference and in the pipe

or SMLS pipes, three sets of three specimens shall be taken from each test pipe as follows: one set each of the three 120° location

(i.e. 120° x 3 equally spaced = 9 specimens).

For welded pipes, three sets of specimens shall be taken

a) One set of three specimens cut transve

For HFW, the set shall be sampled parallel to the weld for the weld area of HFW line pipe. The weld shall be approximately on the ce

b) Two sets cut in base material in a direction parallel to the rolling direction: one at 90º180º from the weld.

c) For MPQT testing, an additional two sets: one at each pipe end (head and tail of the mother plate) shall be tested.

H.7.2.3 Samples and Test Pieces for SSC Tests

H.7.2.3.1 Add to this clause the following


For SMLS pipes, three sets of three specimens shall be taken from each test pipe as follows: one set cut in the base material in a direction parallel to the rolling direction at each of the (i.e. 120° x 3 equally spaced = 9 specimens).

For welded pipes, three sets of specimens shall be taken

a) One set of three specimens cut transverse to the longitudin

For HFW, the set shall be sampled parallel to the weld for the weld area of HFW line pipe. The weld shall be approximately on the centerline of the test specimens.

b) Two sets cut in the base material in a direction parallel to the rolling direction: one at 90º180º from the weld.

c) For MPQT testing, an additional two sets: one at each pipe end (head and tail of the mother plate) shall be tested.


Test pieces for four-point bending SSC tests shall be × 5 mm (0.20 in.) thick. For welded pipe, the test piece shall contain the longitudinalin the middle of the tested area and the test piece shall be oriented transverse to the weld seam (Figure 5 b) and c) Key 1). For seamless pipe, the sample shall be oriented longitudinal to the pipe body (Figure 5 a) Key 1). If agreed, samples may bepurchaser, samples shall be machined from the inside surface of the pipe.


a) Each specimen shall have the following dimensions: 1115 mm wide (0.59 in.) and 5 mm (0.20 in.) thick.

b) Only samples free of defects shall be used. Regardless of the pipe wall thickness t, the set of specimens shall be cut as close as possible to the surface in con(inside or outside), with a minimum depth of machining to obtain flat surfaces.

c) Unless otherwise specified machining. Samples identification shall be p

d) If requested by the purchaser, test specimens shall have the surface in contact with original condition with no subsequent surface preparation (refer to NACE TM 0316).

e) If a full ring test is specified by the purchaserBS 8701.

Dec. 2020 IPS

70

equally spaced = 9 specimens).

or welded pipes, three sets of specimens shall be taken from each test pipe as follows:

One set of three specimens cut transverse to the longitudinal weld.

shall be sampled parallel to the weld for the weld area of HFW line pipe. The weld shall be approximately on the centerline of the test specimens.

Two sets cut in base material in a direction parallel to the rolling direction: one at 90º

For MPQT testing, an additional two sets: one at each pipe end (head and tail of the mother plate)

H.7.2.3 Samples and Test Pieces for SSC Tests


se specified by the purchaser, the following shall be considered:

For SMLS pipes, three sets of three specimens shall be taken from each test pipe as follows: one set cut in the base material in a direction parallel to the rolling direction at each of the

equally spaced = 9 specimens).

For welded pipes, three sets of specimens shall be taken from each test pipe as follows:

One set of three specimens cut transverse to the longitudinal weld.

sampled parallel to the weld for the weld area of HFW line pipe. The weld shall be approximately on the centerline of the test specimens.

Two sets cut in the base material in a direction parallel to the rolling direction: one at 90º



point bending SSC tests shall be ≥ 115 mm (4.5 in.) long × 15 mm (0.59 in.) wide 5 mm (0.20 in.) thick. For welded pipe, the test piece shall contain the longitudinal

in the middle of the tested area and the test piece shall be oriented transverse to the weld seam (Figure 5 b) and c) Key 1). For seamless pipe, the sample shall be oriented longitudinal to the pipe body (Figure 5 a) Key 1). If agreed, samples may be flattened. Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, samples shall be machined from the inside surface of the pipe.


ach specimen shall have the following dimensions: 115 mm (4.53 in.) to 140 mm (5.51 in.) long, in.) and 5 mm (0.20 in.) thick.

Only samples free of defects shall be used. Regardless of the pipe wall thickness t, the set of specimens shall be cut as close as possible to the surface in contact with the (inside or outside), with a minimum depth of machining to obtain flat surfaces.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, all surfaces shall be polished to 600 grit after Samples identification shall be performed on each specimen by an accepted method.

If requested by the purchaser, test specimens shall have the surface in contact with original condition with no subsequent surface preparation (refer to NACE TM 0316).

by the purchaser, test sample and specimen reference shall be made to

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

from each test pipe as follows:

shall be sampled parallel to the weld for the weld area of HFW line pipe. The

Two sets cut in base material in a direction parallel to the rolling direction: one at 90º and one at


For SMLS pipes, three sets of three specimens shall be taken from each test pipe as follows: one set cut in the base material in a direction parallel to the rolling direction at each of the three 120° location

from each test pipe as follows:

sampled parallel to the weld for the weld area of HFW line pipe. The

Two sets cut in the base material in a direction parallel to the rolling direction: one at 90º and one at



15 mm (0.59 in.) wide 5 mm (0.20 in.) thick. For welded pipe, the test piece shall contain the longitudinal (or helical) weld

in the middle of the tested area and the test piece shall be oriented transverse to the weld seam (Figure 5 b) and c) Key 1). For seamless pipe, the sample shall be oriented longitudinal to the pipe

flattened. Unless otherwise specified by the

5 mm (4.53 in.) to 140 mm (5.51 in.) long,

Only samples free of defects shall be used. Regardless of the pipe wall thickness t, the set of tact with the fluid containing H2S

, all surfaces shall be polished to 600 grit after erformed on each specimen by an accepted method.

If requested by the purchaser, test specimens shall have the surface in contact with fluid in the original condition with no subsequent surface preparation (refer to NACE TM 0316).

rence shall be made to

H.7.2.4 Samples for Hardness Tests


Samples for hardness tests shall be taken from the end each sample shall contain a section of the longitudinal seam at its center (see Figure H.1).

The existing Table H.4 shall be deleted and replaced by the following

Table H.4 - Number, Orientation, and Location of

Sample locationType of pipe

Pipe body SMLS

Pipe weld SAWL/HFW

Pipe body

a. Test piece shall be spaced by 90º (all four quadrants of the selected pipe).

b. Refer to API 5L, Figure 5 for an explation of the symbols used to designate orientation and location.

H.7.3 Test Methods

H.7.3.1 HIC/SWC Test


HIC and SWC tests shall be conducted in a medium complyin

The manufacturer shall prepare a detailed HIC test procedure, if not included as part of the MPS, and submit it to the purchaser for prior acceptance. The procedure shall include as a minimum:

a) A description of the HIC testing setup/apparatus

b) The purity of the utilized salts and H

c) A detailed procedure describing the testing.

d) Metallographic preparation and evaluation of HIC specimens.

H.7.3.1.3 Add to this clause the following:

If specified by the purchaser based on service condition, this clause may be used.

H.7.3.1.4 The existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

Values of crack-length ratio, crack

Photographs of etched and un-report at a suitable magnification.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, following data shall be provided in the manufacturer's report for each heat tested, for the purchaser’s acceptance:

a) The CAR percentage result for each specimen (If UT testing is specified

b) Locations and dimensions of specimens in tested pipe.

c) All pertinent explanations (where

d) Any failure shall be analyzed by the m

Dec. 2020 IPS

71

H.7.2.4 Samples for Hardness Tests


Samples for hardness tests shall be taken from the end of selected pipes, and, for welded pipe, each sample shall contain a section of the longitudinal seam at its center (see Figure H.1).

The existing Table H.4 shall be deleted and replaced by the following:

Number, Orientation, and Location of Test Pieces per Sample for Hardness Tests

Number, Orientation, and Location of Test Pieces

Sample location Specified Outside Diameter

D mm (in)

≥ 508 (20.000)< 508 (20.000)

4T4T

1W1W

3T3T

ced by 90º (all four quadrants of the selected pipe).

Refer to API 5L, Figure 5 for an explation of the symbols used to designate orientation and location.


HIC and SWC tests shall be conducted in a medium complying with NACE TM0284, Solution A.

The manufacturer shall prepare a detailed HIC test procedure, if not included as part of the MPS, submit it to the purchaser for prior acceptance. The procedure shall include as a minimum:

description of the HIC testing setup/apparatus (schematic required) to be used.

purity of the utilized salts and H2S for the test solution.

ocedure describing the testing.

preparation and evaluation of HIC specimens.


If specified by the purchaser based on service condition, this clause may be used.


length ratio, crack-thickness ratio and crack-sensitivity ratio shall be reported.

-etched sections of any reportable crack shall be provided with the at a suitable magnification.

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, in addition to the requirements of NACE TM 0284, the following data shall be provided in the manufacturer's report for each heat tested, for the

CAR percentage result for each specimen (If UT testing is specified by the purchser).

ns of specimens in tested pipe.

pertinent explanations (where needed) and concluding comments.

Any failure shall be analyzed by the manufacturer and the cause of failure made clear to the

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

of selected pipes, and, for welded pipe, each sample shall contain a section of the longitudinal seam at its center (see Figure H.1).

Test Pieces per Sample for Hardness Tests

Number, Orientation, and Location of Test Pieces a b

≥ 508 (20.000)

4T

1W

3T

Refer to API 5L, Figure 5 for an explation of the symbols used to designate orientation and location.


g with NACE TM0284, Solution A.

The manufacturer shall prepare a detailed HIC test procedure, if not included as part of the MPS, submit it to the purchaser for prior acceptance. The procedure shall include as a minimum:

(schematic required) to be used.


sensitivity ratio shall be reported.

any reportable crack shall be provided with the

n addition to the requirements of NACE TM 0284, the following data shall be provided in the manufacturer's report for each heat tested, for the

by the purchser).

anufacturer and the cause of failure made clear to the

purchaser.

e) For tests on HFW pipe, sections containing the weld seam shall beat magnifications of at least 100X for any evidencethickness direction and all such

f) Indications on the weld line shall not have an aggregate length greater thanthrough thickness.



Prior sectioning (i.e. after testing, scale and deposits removal), the test piece shall be tested using immersion AUT technique, in accordance with NACE TM0284, Appendix A. Unless otherwise agreed with the purchaser, all narrow and wide faces shall be scanned. The CAR of each scanned surfaces shall be calculated and reported.

Additional sectioning shall be performed at the largest AUT indication. Photographs shall be provided in the report, as required in

Crack sensitivity ratio, crack length ratio and crack thickness ratio shall be reported for each section. The acceptance criteria shall also be applicable

The manufacturer shall submit a detailed HIC test procacceptance.


Laboratory facilities for testing shall be accepted by the purchaser.

H.7.3.2 SSC Test

H.7.3.2.1 The existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, SSC tests shall be performed in accordance withClauses H.7.3.2.1.1 to H.7.3.2.1.5.

H.7.3.2.1.1 General


Sulfide stress cracking tests shall be performed using EFC Publication 16 or NACE TM 0316).

With the exception of the type of specimen (no holes) and the bending method (4the provisions regarding method B of NACE TM0177 shall apply.

The manufacturer shall prepare a fully detailed test procedure proposal based upon this specification and submit it to the purchaser for prior approval.

H.7.3.2.1.2 Test Required


Round bar tensile specimens shall be machined as per the pipe axis. The tensile test specimen shall be sampled as close as possible to the place where SSC specimens are sampled.

A tensile test shall subsequently be carried out and the yield strength (0.5 % proof sttensile strength shall be recorded.

The lowest yield strength value shall be taken as the reference

Dec. 2020 IPS

72

For tests on HFW pipe, sections containing the weld seam shall be metallographically examined at magnifications of at least 100X for any evidence of cracking at the weld line in the thickness direction and all such indications reported.

Indications on the weld line shall not have an aggregate length greater than

as the following:

the purchaser, the following shall be considered:

rior sectioning (i.e. after testing, scale and deposits removal), the test piece shall be tested using immersion AUT technique, in accordance with NACE TM0284, Appendix A. Unless otherwise

purchaser, all narrow and wide faces shall be scanned. The CAR of each scanned all be calculated and reported.

Additional sectioning shall be performed at the largest AUT indication. Photographs shall be provided in the report, as required in Clause H.7.3.1.4.

Crack sensitivity ratio, crack length ratio and crack thickness ratio shall be reported for each section. The acceptance criteria shall also be applicable to this additional sectioning.

The manufacturer shall submit a detailed HIC test procedure and AUT procedure for the purchaser’s

as the following:

Laboratory facilities for testing shall be accepted by the purchaser.


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, SSC tests shall be performed in accordance withH.7.3.2.1.1 to H.7.3.2.1.5.

as the following:

Sulfide stress cracking tests shall be performed using the 4 point bending test method (method B of EFC Publication 16 or NACE TM 0316).

With the exception of the type of specimen (no holes) and the bending method (4d B of NACE TM0177 shall apply.

urer shall prepare a fully detailed test procedure proposal based upon this specification and submit it to the purchaser for prior approval.

as the following:

Round bar tensile specimens shall be machined as per ASTM A370 in the base metal and parallel to the pipe axis. The tensile test specimen shall be sampled as close as possible to the place where SSC

A tensile test shall subsequently be carried out and the yield strength (0.5 % proof stile strength shall be recorded.

The lowest yield strength value shall be taken as the reference for the actual yield strength.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

metallographically examined of cracking at the weld line in the through-

Indications on the weld line shall not have an aggregate length greater than 0.5 mm (0.02 in)

rior sectioning (i.e. after testing, scale and deposits removal), the test piece shall be tested using immersion AUT technique, in accordance with NACE TM0284, Appendix A. Unless otherwise

purchaser, all narrow and wide faces shall be scanned. The CAR of each scanned

Additional sectioning shall be performed at the largest AUT indication. Photographs shall be

Crack sensitivity ratio, crack length ratio and crack thickness ratio shall be reported for each section.

edure and AUT procedure for the purchaser’s

the following:

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, SSC tests shall be performed in accordance with

the 4 point bending test method (method B of

With the exception of the type of specimen (no holes) and the bending method (4-point bending), all

urer shall prepare a fully detailed test procedure proposal based upon this specification

ASTM A370 in the base metal and parallel to the pipe axis. The tensile test specimen shall be sampled as close as possible to the place where SSC

A tensile test shall subsequently be carried out and the yield strength (0.5 % proof stress) and ultimate

for the actual yield strength.

The actual yield strength of the base material shall be the reference for calculating the stress level of the SSC tests. The measurement of applied stress shall be made using either electrical strain gauges or the deflection method. If the deflection method is used, it shall be measured using a dial gauge with an accuracy of 0.01 mm (0.0004 in.).

Spare test specimens shall also be cut out and shall be available for additional tesfailure).

H.7.3.2.1.3 Test Set-up


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, taccordance with Appendix 2 of EFC Publication 16:

The outer and inner rollers shall be made using materials which do not creep when subjected to the sustained loads (e.g. glass and ceramic rods) and avoiding galva

Stress applied to specimens shall be adjusted

H.7.3.2.1.4 Test Conditions


The test solution shall be the NACE test solut

The manufacturer shall ensure that saturati

Hydrogen sulfide concentration in the solution shall be measured by the iodine titration method at the start and at the end of the test.

The pH of the solution shall be recorded at the

Partial pressure of H2S shall be 1 bar.

The test pieces shall be stressed to a 80 % the actual yield strengthstrength of the pipe, whichever is greater

Note 1: If specified by the purchaser

Tests shall have a minimum duration of 30 days (720 hours).

H.7.3.2.1.5 Reporting


At the end of the test, the manufacturer shall provide a test

a) Measurement of the actual applie

b) Individual results for each specimen tested per set, with photographs and phoapplicable).

c) Type of solution used for the tethe test, for EFC Publication 16 solutions. H

d) Location and dimensions of specimens.

e) Mill certificates of materials tested

f) Testing procedure specification

g) Conclusions and pertinent explanations (where needed), o

h) Any test failure shall be analyzed by the manufacturer and the cause of fareport.

H.7.3.2.2 This clause shall be

Dec. 2020 IPS

73

The actual yield strength of the base material shall be the reference for calculating the stress level of the SSC tests. The measurement of applied stress shall be made using either electrical strain gauges or the deflection method. If the deflection method is used, it shall be measured using a dial gauge with

curacy of 0.01 mm (0.0004 in.).

ecimens shall also be cut out and shall be available for additional tes

as the following:

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, test arrangements and loading of specimens shall accordance with Appendix 2 of EFC Publication 16: 2009 or ASTM G39 or ISO 7539

The outer and inner rollers shall be made using materials which do not creep when subjected to the sustained loads (e.g. glass and ceramic rods) and avoiding galvanic coupling with the specimen.

Stress applied to specimens shall be adjusted in accordance with H.7.3.2.1.4.

as the following:

The test solution shall be the NACE test solution “A” (refer to NACE TM0177).

manufacturer shall ensure that saturation is obtained within one hour.

Hydrogen sulfide concentration in the solution shall be measured by the iodine titration method at the

The pH of the solution shall be recorded at the start and at the end of the test.

pressure of H2S shall be 1 bar.

The test pieces shall be stressed to a 80 % the actual yield strength or 90 % specified minimum, whichever is greater.

purchaser, SSC tests may be performed at 90 % of actual yield strength.

uration of 30 days (720 hours).

as the following:

At the end of the test, the manufacturer shall provide a test report giving the following information:

of the actual applied stress (strain gauges, etc.).

results for each specimen tested per set, with photographs and photomicrographs (when

of solution used for the tests. pH of solution at the start and at the end of the test and during the test, for EFC Publication 16 solutions. H2S concentration at the start and at the end of the test.

Location and dimensions of specimens.

certificates of materials tested showing full chemical analysis and mechanical properties.

procedure specification.

and pertinent explanations (where needed), or concluding information.

Any test failure shall be analyzed by the manufacturer and the cause of failure explained in the

deleted

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

The actual yield strength of the base material shall be the reference for calculating the stress level of the SSC tests. The measurement of applied stress shall be made using either electrical strain gauges or the deflection method. If the deflection method is used, it shall be measured using a dial gauge with

ecimens shall also be cut out and shall be available for additional testing (in case of test

est arrangements and loading of specimens shall be in 2009 or ASTM G39 or ISO 7539-2.

The outer and inner rollers shall be made using materials which do not creep when subjected to the oupling with the specimen.

Hydrogen sulfide concentration in the solution shall be measured by the iodine titration method at the

specified minimum yield

90 % of actual yield strength.

ving the following information:

tomicrographs (when

sts. pH of solution at the start and at the end of the test and during d at the end of the test.

lysis and mechanical properties.

r concluding information.

ilure explained in the

H.7.3.3 Hardness Test

H.7.3.3.1 Add to this clause the following

Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, ato the surface in contact with the sour process fluid, for pipes formed from thermomechanically controlled processed plates and coils. This shall be done using Hv0.5 (500 g), 0.25 mm (0.01 in.) from the surface. Acceptance criteria shall be as peracceptance criteria specified in Clause

Note 1: If specified by the purchaserreadings exceeding the applicable acceptance limit

Note 2: If specified by the purchaser, the hardness indentation shall be as per Figure 14, Figure 15 and Figure 16.

H.7.5 HIC/SWC Retests


If any HIC/SWC fails during production, the pipe shall be rejected. Retesting shall be as follows, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser

a) One retest shall be taken on two different pipes from the same test unit

b) Providing both these tests give

c) If either or both pipes fail during retest, the test unit shall be rejected.

The pipes manufactured before and after the discarded test units shall be tested per test units or heats, depending of the result of the

I) Two pipes from every preceding consecutive test unit/heat shall be tested, until two pipes pass for three consecutive test units/heats.

II) For pipes manufactured after the discarded test units, two pipes from each subsequent test unit/heat shall be tested until two pipes pass for thre

If applicable, reprocessing shall be as defined in

Note 1: If the root cause analysis (RCA) may be more appropriate.

H.7.6 SSC Retests


If SSC has been specified as a production test (see Table H.3), retesting accordingprocedure and criteria applies, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser

a) If any SSC test fails, the pipe shall be rejected and one retest taken on two differentsame test unit.

b) If both tests pass, the entire test

c) If the SSC test fails on either or both pipes during retest, all pipes produced prior to the failed SSC test and after the last successful test shall be

In case of failure, root cause analysis (RCA) microstructure/metallographic examination. The affected slab shall be identified and pipe manufactured from the slab, produced before and after the test unit, shall be tested in order to release production. This shall also apply to

Dec. 2020 IPS

74


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, an additional hardness indentation line is required close contact with the sour process fluid, for pipes formed from thermomechanically

controlled processed plates and coils. This shall be done using Hv0.5 (500 g), 0.25 mm (0.01 in.) from the surface. Acceptance criteria shall be as per Clause H.4.4. No individual readings shall exceed the

Clause H.4.4.

If specified by the purchaser, for pipe body tests and parent metal tests, individual hardness readings exceeding the applicable acceptance limit may be not accepted.

If specified by the purchaser, the hardness indentation shall be as per Figure 14, Figure 15


If any HIC/SWC fails during production, the pipe shall be rejected. Retesting shall be as follows, specified by the purchaser:

retest shall be taken on two different pipes from the same test unit.

iding both these tests give acceptable results, the test unit shall be considered acceptable.

either or both pipes fail during retest, the test unit shall be rejected.

The pipes manufactured before and after the discarded test units shall be tested per test units or ending of the result of the root cause analysis (RCA) specified in H.7.3.1.4.

Two pipes from every preceding consecutive test unit/heat shall be tested, until two pipes pass for cutive test units/heats.

For pipes manufactured after the discarded test units, two pipes from each subsequent test unit/heat shall be tested until two pipes pass for three consecutive test units/heats.

If applicable, reprocessing shall be as defined in Clause 10.2.11.

root cause analysis (RCA) points to a raw material issue, retest frequency based on heat

as the following:

If SSC has been specified as a production test (see Table H.3), retesting according, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser:

any SSC test fails, the pipe shall be rejected and one retest taken on two different

both tests pass, the entire test unit may be accepted with the purchaser’s review and acceptance.

the SSC test fails on either or both pipes during retest, all pipes produced prior to the failed SSC test and after the last successful test shall be rejected.

root cause analysis (RCA) shall be performed by means of microstructure/metallographic examination. The affected slab shall be identified and pipe manufactured from the slab, produced before and after the test unit, shall be tested in order to release

uction. This shall also apply to Clause H.7.5.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

n additional hardness indentation line is required close contact with the sour process fluid, for pipes formed from thermomechanically

controlled processed plates and coils. This shall be done using Hv0.5 (500 g), 0.25 mm (0.01 in.) from al readings shall exceed the

or pipe body tests and parent metal tests, individual hardness

If specified by the purchaser, the hardness indentation shall be as per Figure 14, Figure 15

If any HIC/SWC fails during production, the pipe shall be rejected. Retesting shall be as follows,

shall be considered acceptable.

The pipes manufactured before and after the discarded test units shall be tested per test units or specified in H.7.3.1.4.

Two pipes from every preceding consecutive test unit/heat shall be tested, until two pipes pass for

For pipes manufactured after the discarded test units, two pipes from each subsequent test e consecutive test units/heats.

points to a raw material issue, retest frequency based on heat

If SSC has been specified as a production test (see Table H.3), retesting according to the following

any SSC test fails, the pipe shall be rejected and one retest taken on two different pipes from the

chaser’s review and acceptance.

the SSC test fails on either or both pipes during retest, all pipes produced prior to the failed SSC

shall be performed by means of microstructure/metallographic examination. The affected slab shall be identified and pipe manufactured from the slab, produced before and after the test unit, shall be tested in order to release

Nondestructive Inspection for Pipe Ordered for Sour Service, Offshore

Service, and/or Service Requiring Longitudinal Plastic Strain Capacity

K.1 Introduction


In case of conflict between Annex E and this Annex requirements, the most stringent requirements shall be applied for Pipe Ordered for Sour Service, Offshore Service, and/or Service Requiring Longitudinal Plastic Strain Capacity.

K.2 General Nondestructive Inspection Requirements and Acceptance Criteria

K.2.1.2 The existing clause shall be deleted

K.2.1.3 The existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following

For pipe with t ≥ 5.0 mm (0.197 in.), ultrasonic inspection with accordance with ISO 10893-8 or by manual methods, as specified in Annex A ofshall be used to verify that at leastgreater, wide zone at each pipe end is free ofundertaken from the outside surface and be inspected before beveling.

Note 1: If specified pipe end UTundertaken from the pipe internal surfaceimperfection e.g. radially through wall thickness) to find laminar defect on both bevel faces of pipes in accordance with ISO 10893-5 or ASTM E709; Bevel faces shall be free of in


If specified by the purchaser, MT of pipe end face/bevel shall be carried out associated with UT inspection for the detection of laminar imperfections, in accordance E709. The end face shall be free of indications.

K.2.2 Suspect Pipe


When dressing is carried out, complete removal of defects shall be verified by localand by an NDT method in accordance with

K.3 Nondestructive Inspection of SMLS Pipe

K.3.1 The existing title and clause shall be deleted and replaced with the following

K.3.1 Ultrasonic Inspection for Longitudinal and

SMLS pipe shall be full-body longitudinal and transverse imperfections inacceptance limits for such inspection U2/C.

Dec. 2020 IPS

75

ANNEX K

(Normative)



following:

In case of conflict between Annex E and this Annex requirements, the most stringent requirements for Pipe Ordered for Sour Service, Offshore Service, and/or Service Requiring

Longitudinal Plastic Strain Capacity.

Nondestructive Inspection Requirements and Acceptance Criteria

clause shall be deleted.


≥ 5.0 mm (0.197 in.), ultrasonic inspection with automated/semiautomated8 or by manual methods, as specified in Annex A ofat least [3.5t + 25 mm (0.98 in.)] or 100 mm (3.94 in.), whichever is

pipe end is free of such laminar defects. Pipe end UT shall be undertaken from the outside surface and be inspected before beveling.

pipe end UT inspection after weld beveling by the purchaser, it shall be internal surface following by MT test (with a suitable technique for laminar

imperfection e.g. radially through wall thickness) to find laminar defect on both bevel faces of pipes 5 or ASTM E709; Bevel faces shall be free of indications.


If specified by the purchaser, MT of pipe end face/bevel shall be carried out associated with UT inspection for the detection of laminar imperfections, in accordance with ISO 10893E709. The end face shall be free of indications.


When dressing is carried out, complete removal of defects shall be verified by localand by an NDT method in accordance with Clause C.2.3.

K.3 Nondestructive Inspection of SMLS Pipe


K.3.1 Ultrasonic Inspection for Longitudinal and Transverse Imperfections

(100% of full length) ultrasonically inspected for the detection of imperfections in accordance with ISO 10893-10 or ASTM E213. The

acceptance limits for such inspection shall be in accordance with ISO 10893-10, acceptance level

IPS-M-PI-190(4)



In case of conflict between Annex E and this Annex requirements, the most stringent requirements for Pipe Ordered for Sour Service, Offshore Service, and/or Service Requiring

Nondestructive Inspection Requirements and Acceptance Criteria


automated/semiautomated systems in 8 or by manual methods, as specified in Annex A of ISO 10893-8:2011,

[3.5t + 25 mm (0.98 in.)] or 100 mm (3.94 in.), whichever is Pipe end UT shall be

after weld beveling by the purchaser, it shall be following by MT test (with a suitable technique for laminar

imperfection e.g. radially through wall thickness) to find laminar defect on both bevel faces of pipes dications.


If specified by the purchaser, MT of pipe end face/bevel shall be carried out associated with UT with ISO 10893-5 or ASTM


When dressing is carried out, complete removal of defects shall be verified by local visual inspection


ultrasonically inspected for the detection of 10 or ASTM E213. The

10, acceptance level

K.3.2 Laminar Imperfections in the Pipe Body


For sour service, individual laminations and/or lamination for sour service given in Table K.1requirements shall be verified by ultrasonic inspection in accordance with ISO 108934.2), ASTM A435, or ASTM A578. automatic inspection shall be 100


For offshore service and service requiring longitudinal plastic strain capacity, individual laminations

and/or lamination densities exceeding the acceptance limits given in Table K.1 shall be classified as

defects. Compliance with such requirements shall be verified by ultrasonic inspe

with ISO 10893-8:2011 (except 4.2), ASTM A435, or ASTM A578. Unless otherwise specified by the

purchaser, the coverage during automatic inspection shall be 100 % of the pipe surface.

K.3.3 Ultrasonic Thickness Measurements


For all pipe, ultrasonic thickness measurements E.11.

Note 1: For ultrasonic thickness measurements of seamless pipes, the Scanning coverage shall be100 % of the area of the pipe, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser.

Dec. 2020 IPS

76



For sour service, individual laminations and/or lamination densities exceeding the acceptancefor sour service given in Table K.1 shall be classified as defects. Compliance with suchrequirements shall be verified by ultrasonic inspection in accordance with ISO 10893

ASTM A435, or ASTM A578. Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, t100 % of the pipe surface.


ce requiring longitudinal plastic strain capacity, individual laminations


defects. Compliance with such requirements shall be verified by ultrasonic inspe

8:2011 (except 4.2), ASTM A435, or ASTM A578. Unless otherwise specified by the


K.3.3 Ultrasonic Thickness Measurements


ultrasonic thickness measurements shall be carried out at least as Annex E,

For ultrasonic thickness measurements of seamless pipes, the Scanning coverage shall be% of the area of the pipe, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)


densities exceeding the acceptance limits shall be classified as defects. Compliance with such

requirements shall be verified by ultrasonic inspection in accordance with ISO 10893-8:2011 (except Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the coverage during


ce requiring longitudinal plastic strain capacity, individual laminations


defects. Compliance with such requirements shall be verified by ultrasonic inspection in accordance

8:2011 (except 4.2), ASTM A435, or ASTM A578. Unless otherwise specified by the


shall be carried out at least as Annex E, Clause

For ultrasonic thickness measurements of seamless pipes, the Scanning coverage shall be

Table K.1 –

Service condition

Maximum

individual imperfection

Area

mm2 (in

2)

Length

mm (in)

Offshore and

longitudinal plastic strain

capacity

1000(1.6)

Not specified

Sour 100 (0.16)

Strip(coil)/plate edges or areas adjacent to the weld seam

Sour, offshore,

or longitudinal

plastic strain

capacity

100 (0.16) 20(0.8)

Note 1. For an imperfection to be larger than the minimum imperfection size, the minimum area, minimum length and minimum

width given for the pipe body (or strip

Note 2. For the purpose of determining the extent of suspect area, adjacent suspect areas separated by less than the smaller two minor axes of the areas shall be considered one area.

a. Number of imperfection smaller than the maximum and greater than the minimum imperfection size.

b. For pipe with D < 323,9 mm (12.375 in ) or strip

referred to 1,0 m2 (10.8 ft

2).

c. For pipe with D < 168,3mm (6.625 in) or strip

0,25 m2 (2.7 ft

2).

d. The maximum imperfection area of edges is the product of the maximum imperfection length, where length is the dimension paralmaterial edge and the transverse dimension, An imperfection is considered to be larger than the maximum imperfection silength or the transverse dimension is exceeded.

K.4 Nondestructive Inspection of HFW Pipe

K.4.1 Nondestructive Inspection of the Weld Seam


The full length of the weld seam shall be ultrasonically inspected for the detection of longitudinalimperfections, with the acceptance limits being in accordance with one of the followingotherwise specified by the purchaser

a) ISO 10893-11 acceptance level U2/U2H.

b) ISO 10893-10 acceptance level U2; (If specified by the purchaser,

c) ASTM E273.

Note 1: Relevant sections of Annex E shall be considered.

Dec. 2020 IPS

77

Acceptance Criteria for Laminar Imperfections

Minimum

imperfection size considered

population density Area

mm2 (in

2)

Length

mm(in)

Width

mm(in)

Pipe body (or strip(coil)/plate body)

300 (o.5) 35 (1.4) 8 (0.3) [per 1,0 m (3.3 ft)

30 (0.05) 5 (0.2) 5 (0.2) [per 500 mm(1.6 ft)

/plate edges or areas adjacent to the weld seam d

- 10(0.4) - [per 1,0m (3.3 ft)length]

For an imperfection to be larger than the minimum imperfection size, the minimum area, minimum length and minimum

width given for the pipe body (or strip(coil)/plate body) all have to be exceeded.

of determining the extent of suspect area, adjacent suspect areas separated by less than the smaller two minor axes of the areas shall be considered one area.

Number of imperfection smaller than the maximum and greater than the minimum imperfection size.

323,9 mm (12.375 in ) or strip(coil)/plate widths less than 1 000 mm (39.4 in ) , the maximum population density is

(6.625 in) or strip(coil)/plate widths less than 500 mm (19.7 in), the maximum population density is referred to

The maximum imperfection area of edges is the product of the maximum imperfection length, where length is the dimension paralmaterial edge and the transverse dimension, An imperfection is considered to be larger than the maximum imperfection silength or the transverse dimension is exceeded.

K.4 Nondestructive Inspection of HFW Pipe

K.4.1 Nondestructive Inspection of the Weld Seam


seam shall be ultrasonically inspected for the detection of longitudinalimperfections, with the acceptance limits being in accordance with one of the followingotherwise specified by the purchaser:

11 acceptance level U2/U2H.

10 acceptance level U2; (If specified by the purchaser, acceptance level U2

Relevant sections of Annex E shall be considered.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

Laminar Imperfections

Maximum

population density a

10

[per 1,0 m (3.3 ft) ˣ 1,0m (3.3 ft) square]b

5

[per 500 mm(1.6 ft) ˣ 500 mm (1.6ft ) square ]c

3 [per 1,0m (3.3 ft)length]

For an imperfection to be larger than the minimum imperfection size, the minimum area, minimum length and minimum

of determining the extent of suspect area, adjacent suspect areas separated by less than the smaller

/plate widths less than 1 000 mm (39.4 in ) , the maximum population density is

, the maximum population density is referred to

The maximum imperfection area of edges is the product of the maximum imperfection length, where length is the dimension parallel to the material edge and the transverse dimension, An imperfection is considered to be larger than the maximum imperfection size if either the

seam shall be ultrasonically inspected for the detection of longitudinal imperfections, with the acceptance limits being in accordance with one of the following, unless

acceptance level U2).


The existing clause shall be deleted and replaced

The pipe or strip (coil)/plate body shall be ultrasonically inspected for the detection of laminar imperfections in accordance with ISO 10893respectively, to acceptance limits for the relevant application as given in Table K.1. otherwise specified by the purchaser, tthe pipe surface; (Also consider Annex E,

K.4.3 Laminar imperfections on


The strip(coil)/plate edges or the areas adjacent to the weld seam shall be ultrasonically inspected at least over a width of at least [3.5t + 25 mm (0.98 in.)] or 50 mm (3.94 in.), whichever is greater,for the detection of laminar imperfections, in accordance with ISO respectively, to the acceptance limits as given in Table K.1 for strip/plate edges or areas adjacent to the weld seam; (Also consider Annex E,

K.4.4 Supplementary non-des


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaserdetection of longitudinal imperfec10, acceptance level U2/C (if specified by the purchaser,

Note 1: If specified by the purchaseracceptance level F2 (if specified by the purchaser,used.

K.5 Nondestructive Inspection of SAW Pipe

K.5.1 Ultrasonic Inspection for Longitudinal and Transverse Imperfections in Seam Welds

K.5.1.1 The existing first paragraph of item c)

c) Manufacturer shall use acceto, and centered over, thereinforcements shall be groundboth sides of the reference other in the longitudinal didentifiable separate ultrasonnotches shall be used to set

K.5.2 Laminar Imperfections in the Pipe Body and on the Strip/Plate Edges


The pipe or strip(coil)/plate body shall be ultrasonically inspected for the detection of laminar imperfections in accordance with ISO 10893as given in Table K.1, and unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, with a coverage 100pipe or strip(coil)/plate body; (Also consider Annex E,


The strip(coil)/plate edges shall be ultrasonically inspected at least over a width of mm (0.98 in.)] or 50 mm (3.94 in.), whichever is greater,accordance with ISO 10893-9 to acceptance limits as giareas adjacent to the weld seam

Dec. 2020 IPS

78



(coil)/plate body shall be ultrasonically inspected for the detection of laminar imperfections in accordance with ISO 10893-8:2011 (except Clause 4.2) or ISO 10893respectively, to acceptance limits for the relevant application as given in Table K.1. otherwise specified by the purchaser, the coverage during automatic inspection shall be

(Also consider Annex E, Clause E.8).

on the strip/plate edges or areas adjacent to the


/plate edges or the areas adjacent to the weld seam shall be ultrasonically inspected at least [3.5t + 25 mm (0.98 in.)] or 50 mm (3.94 in.), whichever is greater,

for the detection of laminar imperfections, in accordance with ISO 10893-respectively, to the acceptance limits as given in Table K.1 for strip/plate edges or areas adjacent to

Also consider Annex E, Clause E.9).

destructive inspection


Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser , the pipe body of HFW pipe shall befections using the ultrasonic method in accordance

(if specified by the purchaser, acceptance level U3/C)

If specified by the purchaser, the flux-leakage method in accordance with ISO 10893(if specified by the purchaser, acceptance level F3) or ASTM E570 may be

K.5 Nondestructive Inspection of SAW Pipe


The existing first paragraph of item c) shall be deleted and replaced with the following:

eptance level U2 internal and external notches, lahe weld seam. In this case, both internal ound flush to match the pipe contour in the imm notches. The notches shall be sufficiently sepadirection and from any remaining reinforcemen

asonic signal responses. The full signal amplitude the trigger/alarm level of the equipment.

K.5.2 Laminar Imperfections in the Pipe Body and on the Strip/Plate Edges


/plate body shall be ultrasonically inspected for the detection of laminar imperfections in accordance with ISO 10893-9 to acceptance limits for the relevant service condition as given in Table K.1, and unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, with a coverage 100

; (Also consider Annex E, Clause E.8).


shall be ultrasonically inspected at least over a width of mm (0.98 in.)] or 50 mm (3.94 in.), whichever is greater, for the detection of laminar imperfections

9 to acceptance limits as given in Table K.1 for stripadjacent to the weld seam; (Also consider Annex E, Clause E.9).

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

(coil)/plate body shall be ultrasonically inspected for the detection of laminar 4.2) or ISO 10893-9,

respectively, to acceptance limits for the relevant application as given in Table K.1. Unless inspection shall be 100% of

he weld seam


9 or ISO 10893-8, respectively, to the acceptance limits as given in Table K.1 for strip/plate edges or areas adjacent to

l be inspected for the dance with ISO 10893-

acceptance level U3/C) or ASTM E213.

leakage method in accordance with ISO 10893-3 acceptance level F3) or ASTM E570 may be



aying at right angles and external weld

mmediate area and on separated from each

ent, to give clearly ude from each of such


/plate body shall be ultrasonically inspected for the detection of laminar 9 to acceptance limits for the relevant service condition

as given in Table K.1, and unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, with a coverage 100% of


shall be ultrasonically inspected at least over a width of at least [3.5t + 25 for the detection of laminar imperfections in

ven in Table K.1 for strip(coil)/plate edges or

K.5.3 Nondestructive Inspection of the Weld Seam at the Pipe Ends/Repaired Areas

The existing clause shall be deleted and replaced with

The length of weld seam at pipe ends that cannot be inspected by the automatic ultrasonic equipment and repaired areas of the weld seam (see following:

a) For the detection of longitudinal imperfections,using the same inspection sensitivity and inspection parameters as is specified inand radiographic inspection in accordance with

b) For the detection of transverse imperfections, ausing the same inspection sensitivity and parameters as is specified inradiographic inspection in accordance with

For manual ultrasonic inspection, the scanning speed

K.5.5 Laminar Imperfections on the Plate/Coil Edges or Areas Adjacent to the Weld Seam


The strip(coil)/plate edges or the areas adjacent to the weld seam shall be ultrasonically inspected at least over a width of at least [3.5t + 25 mm (0.98 in.)] or 50 mm (3.94 in.), whichever is greater,for the detection of laminar imperfections, in accordance with ISOrespectively, to the acceptance limits as given in Table K.1 for stripadjacent to the weld seam; (Also consider Annex E,

K.6 Plate Surface Inspection for Hard Surface Layer


If specified by the purchaser:

The surface of thermomechanically rolled plates which will be in contact with the sour be inspected for the detection o

The NDT procedure, verification of the Nto the purchaser’s acceptance. The equipment (e.g. eddy current technique) shall be subject to the purchaser’s approval.

Unless otherwise agreed, any blind zone shall be inspected by portable hardnegrid pattern. Grid dimensions are to be agreed upon at bid stage. Alternativelycropped.

The manufacturer shall submit details of the inspection technique employed, including inspection and evaluation of blind zones, to the purchaser.

A hardness increase due to cold forming and ageing, if applicable, shall be considered. This hardness increase shall be documented by the manufacturer and may be used to define the plate maximum acceptable hardness value. shall not exceed 220HV or other acceptance criteria with COMPANY's approval.

Dec. 2020 IPS

79



The length of weld seam at pipe ends that cannot be inspected by the automatic ultrasonic and repaired areas of the weld seam (see Clause C.4) shall be subjected to the

or the detection of longitudinal imperfections, manual or semi-automatic ultrasonic inspection the same inspection sensitivity and inspection parameters as is specified in

spection in accordance with Clause E.4.

or the detection of transverse imperfections, a manual/semi-automatic ultrasonic inspection same inspection sensitivity and parameters as is specified in Clause

accordance with Clause E.4.

For manual ultrasonic inspection, the scanning speed should be ≤ 150 mm/s (6 in./s).


as the following:


for the detection of laminar imperfections, in accordance with ISO 10893-respectively, to the acceptance limits as given in Table K.1 for strip(coil)/plate edges or areas adjacent to the weld seam; (Also consider Annex E, Clause E.9).

K.6 Plate Surface Inspection for Hard Surface Layer

as the following:

he surface of thermomechanically rolled plates which will be in contact with the sour be inspected for the detection of possible surface hard layers.

The NDT procedure, verification of the NDT technique and procedure qualification shall be subject to the purchaser’s acceptance. The equipment (e.g. eddy current technique) shall be subject to the

Unless otherwise agreed, any blind zone shall be inspected by portable hardness tester following a grid pattern. Grid dimensions are to be agreed upon at bid stage. Alternatively, blind zones shall be

The manufacturer shall submit details of the inspection technique employed, including inspection nes, to the purchaser.

A hardness increase due to cold forming and ageing, if applicable, shall be considered. This hardness increase shall be documented by the manufacturer and may be used to define the plate maximum acceptable hardness value. This surface hardness value measured on the plateshall not exceed 220HV or other acceptance criteria with COMPANY's approval.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)


The length of weld seam at pipe ends that cannot be inspected by the automatic ultrasonic C.4) shall be subjected to the

automatic ultrasonic inspection the same inspection sensitivity and inspection parameters as is specified in Clause K.5.1.1

automatic ultrasonic inspection Clause K.5.1.1 and

≤ 150 mm/s (6 in./s).



9 or ISO 10893-8, /plate edges or areas

he surface of thermomechanically rolled plates which will be in contact with the sour service, shall

DT technique and procedure qualification shall be subject to the purchaser’s acceptance. The equipment (e.g. eddy current technique) shall be subject to the

ss tester following a , blind zones shall be

The manufacturer shall submit details of the inspection technique employed, including inspection

A hardness increase due to cold forming and ageing, if applicable, shall be considered. This hardness increase shall be documented by the manufacturer and may be used to define the plate

e hardness value measured on the plate surface

AP1.1 General

The manufacturer’s procedures concerning storing, handling, drying, consumables is subject to the purchaser’s review and acceptance. The manufacturer shall provide evidence of long and successful use of the proposed combination of welding consumables on similar applications, to the satisfactio

Welding consumables shall be stored and handled in accordance with the supprecommendations.

The welding consumables shall be procured according to AWS A5.01 or ASME BPVC Section II Part C SFA A5.01 and be supplied by a su

The level of testing shall be in accordance with Schedu

Unless otherwise specified in the supplied with an inspection certificate

Deposited weld metal shall not have diffusible hydrogen content higher than 5 ml per 100 g weld metal under production conditions, tested in accordance with ISO 3690. The hydrogen content test shall be done during the packing and the actual value shall be specified in the report.

If specified in the MPS, welding consumables and procedures that produce a weld deposit containing more than 1 % mass frac

Weld deposits shall be in compliance with ISO 15156 for welding consumables for SAW pipes ordered for sour service applications.

AP1.2 Consumables for GMAW

The solid electrode shall conform to the requirements of either AWS A5.18 or AWS A5.28 andproduced according to Lot Class S3 of AWS A5.01.

The gas shielding shall conform to

AP1.3 Consumables for SAW

The SAW consumables shall conform to the requirements of either AWS A5.17 or AWS A5.23 and produced according to Lot Class S3 and Lot Class F2 of AWS A5.01 for solid electrode and flux, respectively.

The manufacturer shall issue a dedicated procedure for flux management. This procedure shall cover all steps from flux purchasing to the “read

This procedure shall be submitted to the purchaser for review.

AP1.3.1 Procurement of flux

At the time of packing the flux, the diffusible hydrogen content in the SAW weld deposit shall be lower than 5 ml/100 g of weld deposit, taken from

Flux grain size shall be checked per batch when the flux is first received. The recorded grain size shall comply with the recommendation of the flux supplier. Should any deviation be recordflux shall be rejected.

Dec. 2020 IPS

80

APPENDIX 1

(Informative)

Welding Consumables

The manufacturer’s procedures concerning storing, handling, drying, recycling and traceability of consumables is subject to the purchaser’s review and acceptance. The manufacturer shall provide evidence of long and successful use of the proposed combination of welding consumables on

satisfaction of the purchaser.

Welding consumables shall be stored and handled in accordance with the supp

The welding consumables shall be procured according to AWS A5.01 or ASME BPVC Section II Part C SFA A5.01 and be supplied by a supplier accepted by the purchaser.

The level of testing shall be in accordance with Schedule I as specified in AWS A5.01.

Unless otherwise specified in the MPS, all welding consumables shall be individually marked and supplied with an inspection certificate type 3.1 according to EN 10204, obtained for the same batch.

Deposited weld metal shall not have diffusible hydrogen content higher than 5 ml per 100 g weld metal under production conditions, tested in accordance with ISO 3690. The hydrogen content test hall be done during the packing and the actual value shall be specified in the certified material test

, welding consumables and procedures that produce a weld deposit containing more than 1 % mass fraction nickel are not acceptable.

Weld deposits shall be in compliance with ISO 15156 for welding consumables for SAW pipes for sour service applications.

AP1.2 Consumables for GMAW

The solid electrode shall conform to the requirements of either AWS A5.18 or AWS A5.28 andproduced according to Lot Class S3 of AWS A5.01.

The gas shielding shall conform to the requirements of AWS A5.32.

The SAW consumables shall conform to the requirements of either AWS A5.17 or AWS A5.23 and Lot Class S3 and Lot Class F2 of AWS A5.01 for solid electrode and flux,

The manufacturer shall issue a dedicated procedure for flux management. This procedure shall cover all steps from flux purchasing to the “ready-to-use” step (welding heads).

This procedure shall be submitted to the purchaser for review.

At the time of packing the flux, the diffusible hydrogen content in the SAW weld deposit shall be lower than 5 ml/100 g of weld deposit, taken from a sample of the batch of flux.

Flux grain size shall be checked per batch when the flux is first received. The recorded grain size shall comply with the recommendation of the flux supplier. Should any deviation be record

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

recycling and traceability of consumables is subject to the purchaser’s review and acceptance. The manufacturer shall provide evidence of long and successful use of the proposed combination of welding consumables on

Welding consumables shall be stored and handled in accordance with the supplier’s written

The welding consumables shall be procured according to AWS A5.01 or ASME BPVC Section II

le I as specified in AWS A5.01.

, all welding consumables shall be individually marked and 4, obtained for the same batch.

Deposited weld metal shall not have diffusible hydrogen content higher than 5 ml per 100 g weld metal under production conditions, tested in accordance with ISO 3690. The hydrogen content test

certified material test

, welding consumables and procedures that produce a weld deposit

Weld deposits shall be in compliance with ISO 15156 for welding consumables for SAW pipes

The solid electrode shall conform to the requirements of either AWS A5.18 or AWS A5.28 and

The SAW consumables shall conform to the requirements of either AWS A5.17 or AWS A5.23 and Lot Class S3 and Lot Class F2 of AWS A5.01 for solid electrode and flux,

The manufacturer shall issue a dedicated procedure for flux management. This procedure shall

At the time of packing the flux, the diffusible hydrogen content in the SAW weld deposit shall be

Flux grain size shall be checked per batch when the flux is first received. The recorded grain size shall comply with the recommendation of the flux supplier. Should any deviation be recorded, the

Acceptable packing shall be:

− metallic / stiff plastic drums with a r

− double polymer top welded bags;

− PEHD-aluminium-PEHD top welded bags.

The packing shall be designed to guarantee no significant humidity absorption during storage for a minimum of one year.

AP1.3.2 Diffusible Hydrogen, Moisture Content Test

Diffusible hydrogen assessment may be done through moisture content measurement, wheevidence of correlation for the flux intended to be used, can be provided by the flux supplier (previously established data is acceptable).

This correlation curve shall be based on previous comparative tests of diffusible hydrogeflux moisture content.

The maximum moisture content shall be 0.03 % unless a higher figure can be justified via the correlation curves.

AP1.3.2.1 Test Condition

The moisture content shall be measured as per AWS A4.4M by the “Karl Fisher” method, or by using equivalent equipment subject

For diffusible hydrogen testing or for moisture measurement, neither preof the flux sample shall be carried out before testing, regardless o

The moisture measurement test shall be carried out at 982 °C (1800 °F) minimum. The carrier gas shall contain 10 % minimum of oxygen.

AP1.3.2.2 Test Results

Results of diffusible hydrogen or moisture measurement shall be reported on the 3.1 flux certificate for each batch. The testing conditions as per this appendix shall b

AP1.3.3 Flux Storage

Flux shall be stored in a room with control

The resulting relative hygrometry and temperature values shall be that the resulting absolute hygrometry is as per the supplier’s re

The maximum duration of storage shall be one year after the date of packing. After one year of storage, a spot check of the diffusible hydrogen / mo

Flux that has been wet or damp shall not be used.

AP1.3.4 Flux Handling and Transfer System

Drums/bags shall be checked before u

All flux shall be dried before use and poured in the welding hopper shall be maintained between 120 ºC (248 ºF)

Flux feeding from the hopper shall be by gravity. If pressurized air is used for flux conveying, the air shall be dried and made oil-free.

The manufacturer shall explain the flux management philosophy in case of an interruption or pain welding.

Dec. 2020 IPS

81

− metallic / stiff plastic drums with a rubber gasket for top tightness;

double polymer top welded bags;

PEHD top welded bags.

The packing shall be designed to guarantee no significant humidity absorption during storage for a

AP1.3.2 Diffusible Hydrogen, Moisture Content Test

Diffusible hydrogen assessment may be done through moisture content measurement, wheevidence of correlation for the flux intended to be used, can be provided by the flux supplier

stablished data is acceptable).

This correlation curve shall be based on previous comparative tests of diffusible hydroge

The maximum moisture content shall be 0.03 % unless a higher figure can be justified via the

The moisture content shall be measured as per AWS A4.4M by the “Karl Fisher” method, or by uipment subject to the purchaser’s acceptance.

For diffusible hydrogen testing or for moisture measurement, neither pre-drying nor any preof the flux sample shall be carried out before testing, regardless of applicable standard guidance.

ure measurement test shall be carried out at 982 °C (1800 °F) minimum. The carrier gas n 10 % minimum of oxygen.

Results of diffusible hydrogen or moisture measurement shall be reported on the 3.1 flux certificate ch batch. The testing conditions as per this appendix shall be confirmed on the certificate.

Flux shall be stored in a room with controlled hygrometry and temperature.

The resulting relative hygrometry and temperature values shall be permanently maintained such that the resulting absolute hygrometry is as per the supplier’s recommendation.

The maximum duration of storage shall be one year after the date of packing. After one year of storage, a spot check of the diffusible hydrogen / moisture content shall be required.

wet or damp shall not be used.

AP1.3.4 Flux Handling and Transfer System

Drums/bags shall be checked before using the flux and be undamaged.

All flux shall be dried before use and poured in the welding machine hopper. The temperature of the hopper shall be maintained between 120 ºC (248 ºF) and 150 °C (302 ºF).

Flux feeding from the hopper shall be by gravity. If pressurized air is used for flux conveying, the air free.

manufacturer shall explain the flux management philosophy in case of an interruption or pa

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

The packing shall be designed to guarantee no significant humidity absorption during storage for a

Diffusible hydrogen assessment may be done through moisture content measurement, when evidence of correlation for the flux intended to be used, can be provided by the flux supplier

This correlation curve shall be based on previous comparative tests of diffusible hydrogen versus

The maximum moisture content shall be 0.03 % unless a higher figure can be justified via the

The moisture content shall be measured as per AWS A4.4M by the “Karl Fisher” method, or by

drying nor any pre-heating f applicable standard guidance.

ure measurement test shall be carried out at 982 °C (1800 °F) minimum. The carrier gas

Results of diffusible hydrogen or moisture measurement shall be reported on the 3.1 flux certificate e confirmed on the certificate.

permanently maintained such

The maximum duration of storage shall be one year after the date of packing. After one year of ture content shall be required.

machine hopper. The temperature of the

Flux feeding from the hopper shall be by gravity. If pressurized air is used for flux conveying, the air

manufacturer shall explain the flux management philosophy in case of an interruption or pause

Unless the manufacturer can justify otherwise, i

a) Of more than two hours, the system of feeding downstream of the hopperbefore recommencing welding;

b) Of more than 12 hours, the remaining flux stored in

Note: Flux is often stored in an intermediate oven at 150 °C (302 ºF) to avoid a reduction of the flux temperature in the welding machine hopper d

AP1.3.5 Flux Recycling

AP1.3.5.1 Flux Recycling

When recycling flux, the manufacturer shall demonstrate that the mill has an appropriate flux recycling system:

a) As a minimum, the flux recovery excess unfused flux from the weld seam.

b) The recovered flux shall be processed with si

c) The size distribution of recovered flux shall be within a tol

d) The frequency of flux size testing shall be aligned w

e) The use of crushed or recycled slag, or blending crushed or recycled slag wpermitted.

AP1.3.5.2 Moisture Content Check

In case of flux recycling, the manufacturer shall demonstrate that the flux management system will guarantee dry flux at the welding point:

a) Flux shall be sampled at the welding point and checked at the start of production and then once per shift for both inside and outside welding. All welding lines shall be sequentially tested

b) The inspector may impose the timing for sampling.

c) The test procedure and results shall comply with AP1.3.2.

d) The procedure shall include a scheme of flux management and shall specify the tempethe ovens used for re-drying.

AP1.4 Consumables for SMAW

The covered electrodes shall conform to the requirements of either AWS A5.1 or AWS A5.5, produced according to Lot Class C5 of AWS A5.01 and shall be supplied in hermetically sealed containers. Cellulose coated electrodes shall not be used.

Dec. 2020 IPS

82

Unless the manufacturer can justify otherwise, in case of welding interruption:

more than two hours, the system of feeding downstream of the hoppers shall be drained off before recommencing welding;

more than 12 hours, the remaining flux stored in the hoppers shall be scrapped.

Flux is often stored in an intermediate oven at 150 °C (302 ºF) to avoid a reduction of the flux e welding machine hopper during charging of the new flux.

When recycling flux, the manufacturer shall demonstrate that the mill has an appropriate flux

As a minimum, the flux recovery system shall be equipped with vacuum suction to collect the from the weld seam.

The recovered flux shall be processed with sieving and a magnetic separator.

The size distribution of recovered flux shall be within a tolerance ±5 % of the fresh batch.

The frequency of flux size testing shall be aligned with the moisture content check.

The use of crushed or recycled slag, or blending crushed or recycled slag w

AP1.3.5.2 Moisture Content Check

recycling, the manufacturer shall demonstrate that the flux management system will dry flux at the welding point:

Flux shall be sampled at the welding point and checked at the start of production and then once outside welding. All welding lines shall be sequentially tested

impose the timing for sampling.

ults shall comply with AP1.3.2.

The procedure shall include a scheme of flux management and shall specify the tempedrying.

AP1.4 Consumables for SMAW

The covered electrodes shall conform to the requirements of either AWS A5.1 or AWS A5.5, produced according to Lot Class C5 of AWS A5.01 and shall be supplied in hermetically sealed

ners. Cellulose coated electrodes shall not be used.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

s shall be drained off

the hoppers shall be scrapped.

Flux is often stored in an intermediate oven at 150 °C (302 ºF) to avoid a reduction of the flux

When recycling flux, the manufacturer shall demonstrate that the mill has an appropriate flux

system shall be equipped with vacuum suction to collect the

eving and a magnetic separator.

fresh batch.

ith the moisture content check.

The use of crushed or recycled slag, or blending crushed or recycled slag with fresh flux is not

recycling, the manufacturer shall demonstrate that the flux management system will

Flux shall be sampled at the welding point and checked at the start of production and then once outside welding. All welding lines shall be sequentially tested.

The procedure shall include a scheme of flux management and shall specify the temperature of

The covered electrodes shall conform to the requirements of either AWS A5.1 or AWS A5.5, produced according to Lot Class C5 of AWS A5.01 and shall be supplied in hermetically sealed

AP2.1 Introduction

The intent of the weldability test is to verify acceptable properties in the girth weld HAZ. The manufacturer should note that the pipes cannot be accepted until these tests ha

Weldability tests shall be performed by the pipe manufacturer or by an accepted supplresponsibility.

Where the purchaser allows data from previous weldability trials in lieu of testing, material used in the previous weldability trials shall be identical in grade and manufacturing procedure to the pipe to be supplied, and be of similar diameter, wall thicapplicable chemical composition and associated tolerances).

AP2.2 Material for Weldability Test

The pipe material shall be qualified in accordance with the manufacturing procedure qualification (see Annex B) and within the limits specified (see B.5.).

Weldability tests shall be conducted for each steel grade, pipe size and steel source on pipes produced at an early production stage.

Pipe size grouping of dimensions may be allowed, subject to the purchasea minimum, those with the greatest

The material shall be taken from finished production pipes.

Pipes shall be selected from the high end of the chemical composition range, e.g. no less than 0.02 % less than the maximum carbon content, CE

The purchaser shall accepted the heat analysis of steel or pipes to be

AP2.3 Welding Procedure Specification (WPS)

Prior to welding, the manufacturer shall submit

a) details of welding consumables, type of pro

b) proposals on the pipe ring dimensions (length) so as to represen

c) full details of weld bevel geometries. The proposedwill result in a straight HAZ on one side of the bevel (i.e. halfused);

d) the welds shall be single sided

e) welding positions, heat input

f) tests rings for weldability tests to be sampled from pipe ends.

No welding test shall be carried out until the manufacturer’s proposals have been accepted by the purchaser.

AP2.3.1 Test Welds

At least one full butt weld shall be produced for

The welding processes for weldability tests shall be proposed by the manufacturer in accordance with the method for pipe laying (e.g. P

Dec. 2020 IPS

83

APPENDIX 2

(Informative)

Weldability Test

The intent of the weldability test is to verify acceptable properties in the girth weld HAZ. The manufacturer should note that the weldability tests are acceptance tests for the pipes, and that pipes cannot be accepted until these tests have been successfully completed.

Weldability tests shall be performed by the pipe manufacturer or by an accepted suppl

Where the purchaser allows data from previous weldability trials in lieu of testing, material used in the previous weldability trials shall be identical in grade and manufacturing procedure to the pipe to be supplied, and be of similar diameter, wall thickness and chemical composition (within the limits of

ion and associated tolerances).

AP2.2 Material for Weldability Test

The pipe material shall be qualified in accordance with the manufacturing procedure qualification he limits specified (see B.5.).

Weldability tests shall be conducted for each steel grade, pipe size and steel source on pipes d at an early production stage.

Pipe size grouping of dimensions may be allowed, subject to the purchaser’s approval, however as a minimum, those with the greatest wall thickness shall be tested.

from finished production pipes.

Pipes shall be selected from the high end of the chemical composition range, e.g. no less than 0.02 less than the maximum carbon content, CEIIW, CEPcm.

The purchaser shall accepted the heat analysis of steel or pipes to be used for the weldability tests.

AP2.3 Welding Procedure Specification (WPS)

Prior to welding, the manufacturer shall submit a pWPS including as a minimum:

a) details of welding consumables, type of process, welding parameters, etc.;

b) proposals on the pipe ring dimensions (length) so as to represent realistic welding conditions;

c) full details of weld bevel geometries. The proposed groove profile shall be such that the welding will result in a straight HAZ on one side of the bevel (i.e. half–V bevel or narrow gap bevel shall be

d) the welds shall be single sided from the outer surface of pipe;

range;

s to be sampled from pipe ends.

No welding test shall be carried out until the manufacturer’s proposals have been accepted by the

all be produced for each trial.

The welding processes for weldability tests shall be proposed by the manufacturer in accordance with the method for pipe laying (e.g. P-GTAW, P-GMAW, m-GMAW, STT, CMT, SMAW and SAW).

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

The intent of the weldability test is to verify acceptable properties in the girth weld HAZ. The weldability tests are acceptance tests for the pipes, and that

Weldability tests shall be performed by the pipe manufacturer or by an accepted supplier under their

Where the purchaser allows data from previous weldability trials in lieu of testing, material used in the previous weldability trials shall be identical in grade and manufacturing procedure to the pipe to

kness and chemical composition (within the limits of

The pipe material shall be qualified in accordance with the manufacturing procedure qualification

Weldability tests shall be conducted for each steel grade, pipe size and steel source on pipes

r’s approval, however as

Pipes shall be selected from the high end of the chemical composition range, e.g. no less than 0.02

used for the weldability tests.

including as a minimum:

t realistic welding conditions;

groove profile shall be such that the welding arrow gap bevel shall be

No welding test shall be carried out until the manufacturer’s proposals have been accepted by the

The welding processes for weldability tests shall be proposed by the manufacturer in accordance GMAW, STT, CMT, SMAW and SAW).

Test coupons shall be prepared with a single Vbevel angle. The tests shall be carried out with two

a) low welding heat inputs (0.45 KJ/mm 50 °C (122 °F) and an inter-pass temperature

b) high welding heat inputs (1.5 KJ/mm temperature not lower than 250 °C (482 °F).

The HAZ shall be considered sufficiently straight when scribed marks for the machining of fracture toughness specimen notches sample at least 75 % of the scribe length in the central two thirds of the specimen thickness within 0.5 mm

Note 1: The 75 % of the scribe length need not be continuous. The fusion line shall be considered part of the weld metal and not be included in the

The time lapse between the root and hot pass shall be 15 minutes without maintainiduring that time.

Note 2: Weld bead placement techniques should be utilized such that within the central 60 % of the section thickness, 25 % of the weld metal adjacent to the fusion line on the square edge side of the weld grove is unrefined-columnar weld metal.

AP2.3.2 Testing and Inspection

AP2.3.2.1 Nondestructive Testing

The test weld shall be inspected by visual, magnetic particle and U

The weld shall satisfy the acceptance criteria of the specific project fabsent for sampling.

The project fabrication code shall be specified in the

AP2.3.2.2 Mechanical Testing

The test specimen failing due to welding defects shall be declared as invalid and retesting is permitted upon the purchaser’s acceptance.

AP2.3.2.2.1 Tensile Testing

A cross weld tensile test shall be car

Note: A failure located in the weld metal shall not be considered relevant. The intent of the test is to gather information on HAZ performance.

AP2.3.2.2.2 Charpy Testing

For welding in position 5G, a set of specimens shall be cut at the 12 o’clock, 3 o’clock and 6 o’clock positions, transverse to the weld direction. For other welding position (i.e. 1G or 2G), a sample of specimens shall be taken from two opposite locations.

Each set shall consist of three specimens.

The notches shall be located at mid

Additionally, for welded pipes, a set of Charpy specimens shall be taklongitudinal and circumferential weld seam and the notch location shall be extended ilongitudinal seam side.

The impact test temperature and acceptance criteria shall be as defined in 9.8 or the relevant annex/appendix. Alternative test conditions and acceptance criteria may be specified in the

If specified in the MPS, a transition curve shall be pe

Dec. 2020 IPS

84

Test coupons shall be prepared with a single V-groove. Test coupons shall have one side with 0° bevel angle. The tests shall be carried out with two welding heat inputs as follows:

a) low welding heat inputs (0.45 KJ/mm ≤ HI ≤ 0.75 KJ/mm) with a maximum preheat temperature of pass temperature not exceeding 250 °C (482 °F);

b) high welding heat inputs (1.5 KJ/mm ≤ HI ≤ 3 KJ/mm) with a preheat temperature and internot lower than 250 °C (482 °F).

onsidered sufficiently straight when scribed marks for the machining of fracture toughness specimen notches sample at least 75 % of the scribe length in the central two thirds of the specimen thickness within 0.5 mm (0.02 in.) of the fusion line.

he 75 % of the scribe length need not be continuous. The fusion line shall be considered part of the weld metal and not be included in the determination of % HAZ sampled.

The time lapse between the root and hot pass shall be 15 minutes without maintaini

Weld bead placement techniques should be utilized such that within the central 60 % of the section thickness, 25 % of the weld metal adjacent to the fusion line on the square edge side of the

umnar weld metal.

AP2.3.2 Testing and Inspection

AP2.3.2.1 Nondestructive Testing

The test weld shall be inspected by visual, magnetic particle and UT or X−ray radiography testing.

The weld shall satisfy the acceptance criteria of the specific project fabrication code pr

The project fabrication code shall be specified in the MPS.

AP2.3.2.2 Mechanical Testing

The test specimen failing due to welding defects shall be declared as invalid and retesting is haser’s acceptance.

A cross weld tensile test shall be carried out for information.

A failure located in the weld metal shall not be considered relevant. The intent of the test is to performance.

For welding in position 5G, a set of specimens shall be cut at the 12 o’clock, 3 o’clock and 6 o’clock positions, transverse to the weld direction. For other welding position (i.e. 1G or 2G), a sample of

hall be taken from two opposite locations.

all consist of three specimens.

The notches shall be located at mid-thickness of the welded side with 0° bevel as per Figure AP2.1.

Additionally, for welded pipes, a set of Charpy specimens shall be taken from the intersection of the longitudinal and circumferential weld seam and the notch location shall be extended i

The impact test temperature and acceptance criteria shall be as defined in 9.8 or the relevant ix. Alternative test conditions and acceptance criteria may be specified in the

, a transition curve shall be performed for each test location.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

groove. Test coupons shall have one side with 0° welding heat inputs as follows:

eheat temperature of

≤ HI ≤ 3 KJ/mm) with a preheat temperature and inter-pass

onsidered sufficiently straight when scribed marks for the machining of fracture toughness specimen notches sample at least 75 % of the scribe length in the central two thirds of

he 75 % of the scribe length need not be continuous. The fusion line shall be considered determination of % HAZ sampled.

The time lapse between the root and hot pass shall be 15 minutes without maintaining preheating

Weld bead placement techniques should be utilized such that within the central 60 % of the section thickness, 25 % of the weld metal adjacent to the fusion line on the square edge side of the

−ray radiography testing.

rication code prior to being

The test specimen failing due to welding defects shall be declared as invalid and retesting is

A failure located in the weld metal shall not be considered relevant. The intent of the test is to

For welding in position 5G, a set of specimens shall be cut at the 12 o’clock, 3 o’clock and 6 o’clock positions, transverse to the weld direction. For other welding position (i.e. 1G or 2G), a sample of

h 0° bevel as per Figure AP2.1.

en from the intersection of the longitudinal and circumferential weld seam and the notch location shall be extended into the

The impact test temperature and acceptance criteria shall be as defined in 9.8 or the relevant ix. Alternative test conditions and acceptance criteria may be specified in the MPS.

rformed for each test location.

AP2.3.2.2.3 CTOD Test

CTOD specimens shall be taken from both low and high w

A set of specimens shall be cut at the 12 o’clock and 6 o’clock positions for the 5G welding position and shall be located at mid-thickness. For each set, three specimens shall be cut and tested. For other welding positions (i.e. 1G or 2G), a sample of CTOD specimens shall blocation only.

SENB B*2B specimens shall be used. The notches shall be located on the weldedbevel as follows:

a) in the coarse grain HAZ (CGHAZ)

b) at 2 mm (0.08 in.) from the fusion line

Sectioning of CTOD samples should be made following testing, to ensure sampling of the required areas. Pre and post-testing macrographs shall be supplied to show that samplhave been met.

CTOD testing shall be carried out in accordanc

The CTOD test temperature and acceptance criteria shall be defined in the relevant annex/appendix or in the MPS.

AP2.3.2.2.4 Macrography and Vickers

Three specimens shall be extracted, one at each of the 12 o’clock, 3 o’clock and 6 o’clock positiofor the 5G welding position.

For other welding positions (i.e. 1G or 2G), a sample of macrography specimens shatwo locations:

a) 180° apart for pipe; and

b) a minimum distance of 300 mm (12 in.) apart for plate.

For the above macrographic crossFigure AP2.2.

If not specified in the MPS, the acceptance criteria shall

AP2.4 Reporting

Following completion of the test program, the results and a final report from the manufacturer shall be submitted to the purchaser.

The final report shall include, as a minimum, the following:

a) welding procedure specifications;

b) procedure qualification records;

c) mill certificates of pipe materials used;

d) NDT and mechanical test results (including any fail

e) any other testing agreed with the purchaser;

f) any necessary photographs, macrograph

g) the interpretation of the results and the conclusions of the manufacturer, including the recommendations for welding the pipes at the installation site.

Dec. 2020 IPS

85

CTOD specimens shall be taken from both low and high welding heat input test coupons.

A set of specimens shall be cut at the 12 o’clock and 6 o’clock positions for the 5G welding position thickness. For each set, three specimens shall be cut and tested. For

G or 2G), a sample of CTOD specimens shall b

SENB B*2B specimens shall be used. The notches shall be located on the welded

a) in the coarse grain HAZ (CGHAZ) − to be determined by metallography;

b) at 2 mm (0.08 in.) from the fusion line − to be determined by metallography.

Sectioning of CTOD samples should be made following testing, to ensure sampling of the required testing macrographs shall be supplied to show that sampl

CTOD testing shall be carried out in accordance with ISO 15653 and ISO 12135.

The CTOD test temperature and acceptance criteria shall be defined in the relevant annex/appendix

AP2.3.2.2.4 Macrography and Vickers Hardness Survey

Three specimens shall be extracted, one at each of the 12 o’clock, 3 o’clock and 6 o’clock positio

For other welding positions (i.e. 1G or 2G), a sample of macrography specimens sha

00 mm (12 in.) apart for plate.

For the above macrographic cross-sections, an HV10 hardness survey shall be conducte

, the acceptance criteria shall be as per the applicable annex/appendix.

Following completion of the test program, the results and a final report from the manufacturer shall

e, as a minimum, the following:

ing procedure specifications;

rocedure qualification records;

ficates of pipe materials used;

NDT and mechanical test results (including any failures);

ting agreed with the purchaser;

any necessary photographs, macrographs and micrographs (if any); and

the interpretation of the results and the conclusions of the manufacturer, including the recommendations for welding the pipes at the installation site.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

heat input test coupons.

A set of specimens shall be cut at the 12 o’clock and 6 o’clock positions for the 5G welding position thickness. For each set, three specimens shall be cut and tested. For

G or 2G), a sample of CTOD specimens shall be taken from one

SENB B*2B specimens shall be used. The notches shall be located on the welded side with 0°

Sectioning of CTOD samples should be made following testing, to ensure sampling of the required testing macrographs shall be supplied to show that sampling requirements

e with ISO 15653 and ISO 12135.

The CTOD test temperature and acceptance criteria shall be defined in the relevant annex/appendix

Three specimens shall be extracted, one at each of the 12 o’clock, 3 o’clock and 6 o’clock positions

For other welding positions (i.e. 1G or 2G), a sample of macrography specimens shall be taken from

sections, an HV10 hardness survey shall be conducted as per

be as per the applicable annex/appendix.

Following completion of the test program, the results and a final report from the manufacturer shall

the interpretation of the results and the conclusions of the manufacturer, including the

Key 1 In the Coarse Grain HAZ (CGHAZ) 2 At 2 mm from the Fusion Line 3 At 5 mm from the Fusion Line

Figure AP2.1

Figure AP2.2

Dec. 2020 IPS

86

In the Coarse Grain HAZ (CGHAZ) − to be determined by metallography At 2 mm from the Fusion Line At 5 mm from the Fusion Line

Figure AP2.1 – Charpy Testing Locations

Figure AP2.2 – Hardness Indents Location

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

Qualification

Qualification shall be subject to demonstration of the capability of the mill to satisfy the requirements of this specification, and all standards referenced herein.

The qualification shall remain valid for a period of equipment, including structural co

The purchaser may require repeating the qualification for a specific project. This shall be specified in the MPS.

The process for the qualification

AP3.1 Prior to the Qualification Audit

The mill shall submit the following information to the purchaser for review and agreement prior to the audit:

a) Scope of the qualification required, as

1) Renewal of existing scope of qualification, extension

2) Service: whether “conventional”, sour or offshore or multiple services, the audit shall be based on the most stringent requirement,

3) Pipe types (manufacturing methods e.g. SAW,

4) For each pipe type: ranges of pipe diameter and thickness for

5) For plate/coil: materials, grades, and ranges

6) Applicable NDT methods, techniques and

b) Written procedures for NDT including applicable methods, compliant with Appendix 6 and applicable to the scope (and for UT and EMI: ref

c) Design of UT and/or EMI reference s

d) Report of visual and dimensional inspection for UT and EMI reference standards, demonstrcompliance with AP3.1 c);

e) Detailed description of the equipment design and any capabilityperformed on the equipment.

AP3.2 NDT Method-specific Requirements During the Qualification Audit

AP3.2.1 General Requirements

The qualification audit shall include (but

a) Practical demonstration of each applicable NDT method and technique, performed on welds, pipes, plates/coils (as applicable).

b) Calibrations, control checks and maintenance;

c) Qualification and certification of NDT personnel; and

d) Elements of the quality system/business ma

Dec. 2020 IPS

87

APPENDIX 3

(Informative)

Qualification of NDT at Plate/Coil and Pipe Mills

Qualification shall be subject to demonstration of the capability of the mill to satisfy the requirements ll standards referenced herein.

The qualification shall remain valid for a period of four years unless there is a change to the equipment, including structural components, software or hardware.

The purchaser may require repeating the qualification for a specific project. This shall be specified in

The process for the qualification of pipe mill NDT equipment and practices shall be as follows.

AP3.1 Prior to the Qualification Audit

The mill shall submit the following information to the purchaser for review and agreement prior to the

ification required, as follows:

1) Renewal of existing scope of qualification, extension to scope or new qualification;

2) Service: whether “conventional”, sour or offshore or multiple services, the audit shall be based on the most stringent requirement, based on the mill’s capability;

3) Pipe types (manufacturing methods e.g. SAW, HFW, SMLS), materials, grades;

4) For each pipe type: ranges of pipe diameter and thickness for which qualification is sought;

5) For plate/coil: materials, grades, and ranges of length, width and thickness;

6) Applicable NDT methods, techniques and documented threshold settings.

) Written procedures for NDT including applicable methods, compliant with Appendix 6 and applicable to the scope (and for UT and EMI: reference standards) of the audit;

Design of UT and/or EMI reference standards, compliant with E.5.2;

) Report of visual and dimensional inspection for UT and EMI reference standards, demonstr

) Detailed description of the equipment design and any capability studies that the mill may h

specific Requirements During the Qualification Audit

AP3.2.1 General Requirements

The qualification audit shall include (but not necessarily be limited to):

on of each applicable NDT method and technique, performed on welds, , plates/coils (as applicable).

control checks and maintenance;

Qualification and certification of NDT personnel; and

Elements of the quality system/business management system related to NDT.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

Qualification shall be subject to demonstration of the capability of the mill to satisfy the requirements

four years unless there is a change to the

The purchaser may require repeating the qualification for a specific project. This shall be specified in

practices shall be as follows.

The mill shall submit the following information to the purchaser for review and agreement prior to the

to scope or new qualification;

2) Service: whether “conventional”, sour or offshore or multiple services, the audit shall be based on

HFW, SMLS), materials, grades;

which qualification is sought;

) Written procedures for NDT including applicable methods, compliant with Appendix 6 and

) Report of visual and dimensional inspection for UT and EMI reference standards, demonstrating

studies that the mill may have

on of each applicable NDT method and technique, performed on welds,

system related to NDT.

AP3.2.2 Practical Demonstrations

Inspection parameters shall be qualified on an individual basis. This means that for systems using more than one configuration, each transducer array shall be qualified individually and documented in a scan plan and standard operating procedures.

For HFW mills that perform full-body AUT, the coil edge AUT syste

AP3.2.2.1 AUT of Plate/Coil

The practical demonstration shall be carried out on one or more reference standards (as agreed with the purchaser) covering the manufacturing thickness range capability and shall include:

a) Equipment set-up;

b) Static and dynamic standardization;

c) Gate positions for defects and coupling, S/N ratio;

d) Extent of coverage;

e) Detection of all required reference reflectors;

f) Repeatability trial; and

g) g) Documented threshold settings.

In addition, at least one production plate shall be scanned at production settings to demoachievement of 100 % scanning coverage.

AP.3.2.2.1.1 Repeatability trials

a) The repeatability trial shall be carried out dynamically, using the same conveyor assembly and at the maximum scanning speed(s) (travel and/or cross

b) Indications from all reference reflectors shall be set at a suitable amplitude to enable recording and subsequent height measurement, typically 80 % FSH ± 5% (i.e. where an AUT system can only measure amplitudes up to 100 % FSH, any indication

c) Ten test runs shall be carried out;

d) The results of a repeatability trial shall be considered acceptable when no reference reflector indication amplitude deviates from the average value by more than ±25 % (or equivalenttolerance(s) as determined by the purchaser).

e) The following data shall be recorded:

1) Written procedure;

2) Reference standard details and dimensions;

3) Equipment used, including probe types, frequencies

4) C-scan record, either paper or digital

5) For each channel: the probes used, scanning direction, reference reflector identities and locations, indication amplitudes (digitally recorded);

6) Indication amplitudes for all reference reflectoheight or as percentage chart height (as applicable), or decibels, using an automated digital method such as a digital export feature, to at least one decimal point (e.g. 81.6 %, not rounded up to 82 %); and

7) Indication amplitudes for all channels and all reference reflectors shall be entered into a spreadsheet supplied by the auditor for the calculation of the average values and the minimum and maximum devi

Dec. 2020 IPS

88

AP3.2.2 Practical Demonstrations

Inspection parameters shall be qualified on an individual basis. This means that for systems using more than one configuration, each transducer array shall be qualified individually and documented

standard operating procedures.

body AUT, the coil edge AUT system is exempt from qualification.


ic and dynamic standardization;

efects and coupling, S/N ratio;

required reference reflectors;

Documented threshold settings.

In addition, at least one production plate shall be scanned at production settings to demoent of 100 % scanning coverage.

AP.3.2.2.1.1 Repeatability trials

The repeatability trial shall be carried out dynamically, using the same conveyor assembly and at the maximum scanning speed(s) (travel and/or cross-head) to be used during

Indications from all reference reflectors shall be set at a suitable amplitude to enable recording and subsequent height measurement, typically 80 % FSH ± 5% (i.e. where an AUT system can only measure amplitudes up to 100 % FSH, any indication greater than 100 % shall be invalid);

test runs shall be carried out;

The results of a repeatability trial shall be considered acceptable when no reference reflector indication amplitude deviates from the average value by more than ±25 % (or equivalent

s determined by the purchaser).

llowing data shall be recorded:

tandard details and dimensions;

Equipment used, including probe types, frequencies and dimensions;

scan record, either paper or digital – as applicable;

For each channel: the probes used, scanning direction, reference reflector identities and mplitudes (digitally recorded);

Indication amplitudes for all reference reflectors shall be recorded as percentage of screen height or as percentage chart height (as applicable), or decibels, using an automated digital method such as a digital export feature, to at least one decimal point (e.g. 81.6 %, not

up to 82 %); and

Indication amplitudes for all channels and all reference reflectors shall be entered into a spreadsheet supplied by the auditor for the calculation of the average values and the minimum and maximum deviations from the average values.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

Inspection parameters shall be qualified on an individual basis. This means that for systems using more than one configuration, each transducer array shall be qualified individually and documented

m is exempt from qualification.


In addition, at least one production plate shall be scanned at production settings to demonstrate

The repeatability trial shall be carried out dynamically, using the same conveyor assembly and at ) to be used during production;

Indications from all reference reflectors shall be set at a suitable amplitude to enable recording and subsequent height measurement, typically 80 % FSH ± 5% (i.e. where an AUT system can

r than 100 % shall be invalid);

The results of a repeatability trial shall be considered acceptable when no reference reflector indication amplitude deviates from the average value by more than ±25 % (or equivalent dB

For each channel: the probes used, scanning direction, reference reflector identities and

rs shall be recorded as percentage of screen height or as percentage chart height (as applicable), or decibels, using an automated digital method such as a digital export feature, to at least one decimal point (e.g. 81.6 %, not

Indication amplitudes for all channels and all reference reflectors shall be entered into a spreadsheet supplied by the auditor for the calculation of the average values and the

AP3.2.2.2 AUT of HFW, SAW and SMLS Pipe

The practical demonstration shall be carried out on one or more reference covering the manufacturing thickness and diameter rang


b) Static (if practicable) and dynamic standardization;

c) Gate positions for defects and coupling, S/N ratio;

d) Detection of all reference reflectors (as per Annex E Table E.7.1

e) Repeatability trial;

f) Extent of coverage;

g) Accuracy and consistency of seam tracking system;

h) Documented threshold settings.

AP3.2.2.2.1

The number and dimensions of reference standard/pipe

a) For wall thickness ≤ 12 mm (0.47 in.): one reference standard having the lowest wall thickness and smallest diameter to be qualified;

b) For wall thickness > 12 mm (0.47 in.): one reference standard having the highest wall thickness and largest diameter to be qualified.

AP3.2.2.2.2

For the repeatability trial, the following shall apply:

a) The repeatability trial shall be carried out dynamically, usinthe maximum scanning speeds (travel and/or cross

b) Indications from all reference reflectors shall be set at a suitable amplitude to enable recording and subsequent height measurement, tonly measure amplitudes up to 100 % FSH, any indication great

c) Ten uninterrupted test runs, in the forward direction, without any adjustment of equipment or settings. Any interruption or adjustment shall invalidate the results.

d) When specified in the MPS by the purchaser, ten uninterrupted test runs, in the reverse direction (after turning the reference standard endsettings. Any interruption or adjustmen

e) For equipment with rotating head assemblies, 20 runs shall be completed in total, consisting of five runs at each pipe angular position (0°, 90°, 180° and 270°), the pipe being rotated series of five runs.

f) The results of a repeatability trial shall be considered acceptable when no reference reflector indication amplitude deviates from the average value by more than ±25 % (or equivalent dB tolerances as determined by the purchaser).

g) The following data shall be recorded:



3) Equipment used, including probe types, frequencies and dimensio

4) Chart record, either paper or digital

5) For each scan number: the channel, probes used, scanning direction, reference reflector identities and locations, indication a

Dec. 2020 IPS

89

SAW and SMLS Pipe

The practical demonstration shall be carried out on one or more reference covering the manufacturing thickness and diameter range capability and shall include:

dynamic standardization;

efects and coupling, S/N ratio;

Detection of all reference reflectors (as per Annex E Table E.7.1, Table E.7.2 and Table E.7.3);

ncy of seam tracking system;

ettings.

The number and dimensions of reference standard/pipe shall be determined as follows:

≤ 12 mm (0.47 in.): one reference standard having the lowest wall thickness llest diameter to be qualified;

thickness > 12 mm (0.47 in.): one reference standard having the highest wall thickness rgest diameter to be qualified.

ial, the following shall apply:

The repeatability trial shall be carried out dynamically, using the same conveyor assembly and at the maximum scanning speeds (travel and/or cross-head) to be used during production.

Indications from all reference reflectors shall be set at a suitable amplitude to enable recording and subsequent height measurement, typically 80 % FSH ±5 % (i.e. where an AUT system can only measure amplitudes up to 100 % FSH, any indication greater than 100 % shall be invalid)

Ten uninterrupted test runs, in the forward direction, without any adjustment of equipment or interruption or adjustment shall invalidate the results.

by the purchaser, ten uninterrupted test runs, in the reverse direction (after turning the reference standard end-to-end), without any adjustment of equipment or

ny interruption or adjustment shall invalidate the results.

For equipment with rotating head assemblies, 20 runs shall be completed in total, consisting of five runs at each pipe angular position (0°, 90°, 180° and 270°), the pipe being rotated


s determined by the purchaser).




per or digital – as applicable;

For each scan number: the channel, probes used, scanning direction, reference reflector identities and locations, indication amplitudes (digitally recorded);

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

The practical demonstration shall be carried out on one or more reference covering the

, Table E.7.2 and Table E.7.3);

shall be determined as follows:

≤ 12 mm (0.47 in.): one reference standard having the lowest wall thickness

thickness > 12 mm (0.47 in.): one reference standard having the highest wall thickness

g the same conveyor assembly and at ) to be used during production.

Indications from all reference reflectors shall be set at a suitable amplitude to enable recording ypically 80 % FSH ±5 % (i.e. where an AUT system can

er than 100 % shall be invalid)

Ten uninterrupted test runs, in the forward direction, without any adjustment of equipment or

by the purchaser, ten uninterrupted test runs, in the reverse direction end), without any adjustment of equipment or

For equipment with rotating head assemblies, 20 runs shall be completed in total, consisting of five runs at each pipe angular position (0°, 90°, 180° and 270°), the pipe being rotated after each


For each scan number: the channel, probes used, scanning direction, reference reflector

6) Indication amplitudes for all reference reflectors shall be recorded as percentage of screen height or as percentage chart height (as applicable), or decibels, using an automated digital method such as a digital export feature, to at least one decimal point (e.g. 81.6 %, not roundedup to 82 %); and

7) Indication amplitudes for all channels and allspreadsheet supplied by the auditor for the calculation of the average values and the minimum and maximum deviations from the average values.

AP3.2.2.3 EMI of Welded or SMLS Pipe

The practical demonstration shwith the purchaser) and shall include:


b) Static (if practicable) and dynamic standardization;

c) Gate positions for defects, S/N ratio;

d) Detection of all reference reflectors;

e) Extent of coverage;

f) Repeatability trial;

g) Application to one or more production pipes, or suitable substitute, to purchaser;

h) Documented threshold settings.

AP3.2.2.3.1

The number and dimensions of reference standard/pipe shall be deter

- One reference standard representative of the diameter and thickness range to be qualifiedagreed with the purchaser.

AP3.2.2.3.2

For the repeatability trial, the following apply in one direc

a) Carried out dynamically, using the same conveyor assembly and at the maximum scanning speed(s) (travel and/or cross

b) Indications from all reference reflectors shall be set at a suitable amplitude to enable recording and subsequent height measurement, typically 80 % FSH ±5 % (i.e. where an EMI system can only measure amplitudes up to 100 % FSH, any indication greater than 1

c) Ten uninterrupted test runs, without any adjustment of equipment or settings. Any inteadjustment shall invalidate the results.

d) The results of a repeatability trial shall be considered acceptable when no reference reflector indication amplitude deviates from the average value by more than ±25 %tolerances).

e) The following data shall be recorded:



3) Equipment used, including probe typ

4) Chart record, either paper or digital

Dec. 2020 IPS

90

Indication amplitudes for all reference reflectors shall be recorded as percentage of screen eight or as percentage chart height (as applicable), or decibels, using an automated digital

method such as a digital export feature, to at least one decimal point (e.g. 81.6 %, not rounded

Indication amplitudes for all channels and all reference reflectors shall be entered into a spreadsheet supplied by the auditor for the calculation of the average values and the minimum

ations from the average values.

AP3.2.2.3 EMI of Welded or SMLS Pipe

The practical demonstration shall be carried out on one or more reference standards (as agreed e purchaser) and shall include:

e) and dynamic standardization;

sitions for defects, S/N ratio;

on of all reference reflectors;

Application to one or more production pipes, or suitable substitute, to be determined by the

hreshold settings.

The number and dimensions of reference standard/pipe shall be determined as follows:

One reference standard representative of the diameter and thickness range to be qualified

For the repeatability trial, the following apply in one direction of the reference standard:

out dynamically, using the same conveyor assembly and at the maximum scanning speed(s) (travel and/or cross-head) to be used during production.

Indications from all reference reflectors shall be set at a suitable amplitude to enable recording t height measurement, typically 80 % FSH ±5 % (i.e. where an EMI system can

only measure amplitudes up to 100 % FSH, any indication greater than 100 % shall be invalid).

Ten uninterrupted test runs, without any adjustment of equipment or settings. Any intet shall invalidate the results.

The results of a repeatability trial shall be considered acceptable when no reference reflector indication amplitude deviates from the average value by more than ±25 %




per or digital – as applicable;

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

Indication amplitudes for all reference reflectors shall be recorded as percentage of screen eight or as percentage chart height (as applicable), or decibels, using an automated digital

method such as a digital export feature, to at least one decimal point (e.g. 81.6 %, not rounded

reference reflectors shall be entered into a spreadsheet supplied by the auditor for the calculation of the average values and the minimum

all be carried out on one or more reference standards (as agreed

be determined by the

mined as follows:

One reference standard representative of the diameter and thickness range to be qualified, as

tion of the reference standard:

out dynamically, using the same conveyor assembly and at the maximum scanning

Indications from all reference reflectors shall be set at a suitable amplitude to enable recording t height measurement, typically 80 % FSH ±5 % (i.e. where an EMI system can

00 % shall be invalid).

Ten uninterrupted test runs, without any adjustment of equipment or settings. Any interruption or


5) For each scan number: the channel, probes used, scanning direction, reference reflector identities and locations, indication amplitudes (digitally recor

6) Indication amplitudes for all reference reflectors shall be recorded as percentage of screen height or as percentage of chart height (as applicable), using a consistent method, to at least one decimal point (e.g. 81.6 %, not rounded up to 82 %);

7) Indication amplitudes for all channels and all reference reflectors shall be entered into a spreadsheet supplied by the auditor for the calculation of the average values and the minimum and maximum deviations from the average values.

Dec. 2020 IPS

91

For each scan number: the channel, probes used, scanning direction, reference reflector identities and locations, indication amplitudes (digitally recorded);

Indication amplitudes for all reference reflectors shall be recorded as percentage of screen eight or as percentage of chart height (as applicable), using a consistent method, to at least one

decimal point (e.g. 81.6 %, not rounded up to 82 %); and

Indication amplitudes for all channels and all reference reflectors shall be entered into a dsheet supplied by the auditor for the calculation of the average values and the minimum

and maximum deviations from the average values.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

For each scan number: the channel, probes used, scanning direction, reference reflector

Indication amplitudes for all reference reflectors shall be recorded as percentage of screen eight or as percentage of chart height (as applicable), using a consistent method, to at least one

Indication amplitudes for all channels and all reference reflectors shall be entered into a dsheet supplied by the auditor for the calculation of the average values and the minimum

The manufacturer shall provide a procedure for each NDT

equipment and processes to be applied. Multiple NDT techniques shall not be combined within one

procedure. The procedures shall contain as a minimum, the details stated in the tables included in

this appendix and shall be submitted to the purchaser in English, for review and acceptance prior to

qualification or requalification of the mill NDT or production NDT

Dec. 2020 IPS

92

APPENDIX 4

(Informative)

Procedure Requirements for NDT

The manufacturer shall provide a procedure for each NDT technique, describing the inspection



be submitted to the purchaser in English, for review and acceptance prior to

qualification or requalification of the mill NDT or production NDT.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

technique, describing the inspection



be submitted to the purchaser in English, for review and acceptance prior to

Table AP4.1

Product from (e.g. plate, pipe, pipe end, weld, etc.)

Scope (application)

Material grade and specification

Dimensions (plate/strip (coil): length, width, thickness: pipe: length, diameter, thickness)

Coverage required: coverage limits

Weld process (as applicable)

Weld preparation (drawing showing weld

Reference to this specification and related standards

Qualification requirementsPersonnel

Performance demonstration

Stage at which UT is to be performed e.g. for longitudinally welded pipe seams hydrotest

Stage of manufacture

Condition and surface preparation of scanning surfacesSurface Condition

Profile of scanning surface

Whether automated. SemiInspection techniques Contact-, gap

Instrument/System: manufacturer type and designation. Number of channels. Computerized programmed identification and revision.

Equipment

Scanning frames descriptions and illustration, with probe arrangement (layout and scanning direction)

Probes: quantity, manufacturer, types, beam angles, frequencies, singleelement dimensions, number and arrangement of elements in probes. Focusing. Prob data sheets.

Reference standard: Identification, description, and pain and sectional dimensions and reference reflectors (types, dimensions, location in plan and depth). Inspection certificates for the same. Acoustical of the reference reflectors.

Calibration blocks

Couplant and method of irrigation

Weld seam

Calibrations, control checks and maintenanceCalibration

Range calibration

Standardization

Setting of sensitivity (PRG, transfer correction, PRL, scanning sensitivity)

S: N ratio

Recording levels (defect gate heights, start points and

Method of monitoring coupling (with coupling gate heights, start points, lengths

Weld seam tracking and accuracy

Description of operation

Inspection parameters

Guiding principle

Scanning direction with respect to product axis

Maximum permitted product travel speeds and probe traverse speeds

Scan plans

For HFW and SAW seams: scan plans for individual scans showing probe offsets from datumcombination of scans. Scan plans shall be prepared using proprietary software and shall clearly demonstrate how 100% coverage of depth and width is achieved.

Table coordinating:

Reference Table Scan and channel numbers

Probe identifications, types and

Reference reflector types, identifications and locations

Interpretation, evaluation and acceptance criteriaAcceptance Criteria

Report shall include at least the following items:

Reporting

Procedure identification and revision

Application: Identification, description and dimensions (see above)

All equipment used

Result: accept or reject

For all scans, the primary reference level used

Position, depth and size of all discontinuities exceeding the recording level and all

Date and time of inspection

Name of operator responsible for performing UT

Dec. 2020 IPS

93

Table AP4.1 − Ultrasonic Testing (UT)

Product from (e.g. plate, pipe, pipe end, weld, etc.)





Weld preparation (drawing showing weld preparation dimensions and angles)


Qualification requirements

Performance demonstration – if required

Stage at which UT is to be performed e.g. for longitudinally welded pipe seams

Condition and surface preparation of scanning surfaces

Profile of scanning surface

Whether automated. Semi- automated or normal

, gap- or immersion-scanning

Instrument/System: manufacturer type and designation. Number of channels. Computerized programmed identification and revision.

Scanning frames descriptions and illustration, with probe arrangement (layout and scanning

quantity, manufacturer, types, beam angles, frequencies, singleelement dimensions, number and arrangement of elements in probes. Focusing. Prob data

Reference standard: Identification, description, and pain and sectional dimensions and reference reflectors (types, dimensions, location in plan and depth). Inspection certificates for the same. Acoustical of the reference reflectors.

Calibration blocks

Couplant and method of irrigation

Weld seam tracking

Calibrations, control checks and maintenance

Range calibration


Recording levels (defect gate heights, start points and lengths


Weld seam tracking and accuracy

Description of operation

Guiding principle


permitted product travel speeds and probe traverse speeds

For HFW and SAW seams: scan plans for individual scans showing probe offsets from datum-relative to reference reflector locations. Overall scan plan showing combination of scans. Scan plans shall be prepared using proprietary software and shall clearly demonstrate how 100% coverage of depth and width is achieved.

Table coordinating:

Scan and channel numbers

Probe identifications, types and scan direction

Reference reflector types, identifications and locations

Interpretation, evaluation and acceptance criteria




All equipment used


For all scans, the primary reference level used

Position, depth and size of all discontinuities exceeding the recording level and all


Name of operator responsible for performing UT

IPS-M-PI-190(4)


preparation dimensions and angles)

Stage at which UT is to be performed e.g. for longitudinally welded pipe seams – after

Instrument/System: manufacturer type and designation. Number of channels. Computerized

Scanning frames descriptions and illustration, with probe arrangement (layout and scanning

quantity, manufacturer, types, beam angles, frequencies, single- or twin-crystal, element dimensions, number and arrangement of elements in probes. Focusing. Prob data

Reference standard: Identification, description, and pain and sectional drawings showing all dimensions and reference reflectors (types, dimensions, location in plan and depth). Inspection certificates for the same. Acoustical of the reference reflectors.



permitted product travel speeds and probe traverse speeds

For HFW and SAW seams: scan plans for individual scans showing -6dB beam profile and relative to reference reflector locations. Overall scan plan showing

combination of scans. Scan plans shall be prepared using proprietary software and shall clearly demonstrate how 100% coverage of depth and width is achieved.


Position, depth and size of all discontinuities exceeding the recording level and all defects

Table AP4.2

Product from (e.g. weld, pipe end bevel, etc.)

Scope (application)


Dimensions (pipe: length,

Coverage required





Stage at which PT is to be performedStage of manufacture

Condition and surface preparation of surfaces requiring inspectionSurface Condition

Method for cleaning

Inspection techniques

Method of applying penetrant

Method of removing excess penetrant

Method of drying surface

Method of applying

Whether color contrast or fluorescent

Manufacturer type and designation ofdeveloper).

Equipment and consumables

Requirement for certification of compliance of

Light/UV-A meter, timer, sensitivity test blocks, timer, etc.

Performance demonstration block


Description of process


Permitted time periods for

Light/UV-A Intensity ranges (for Light/UV

Applicable temperature limits

Adjustment to stage duration if lower or upper temperature limits are exceeded

Interpretation, evaluation and acceptance Acceptance Criteria


Reporting



All equipment and consumables used

Result: accept or

Position and size of all defects


Name of operator responsible for performing PT

Dec. 2020 IPS

94

Table AP4.2 − Penetrant Testing (PT)



Dimensions (pipe: length, diameter, thickness)

Coverage required





Stage at which PT is to be performed

Condition and surface preparation of surfaces requiring inspection

Method for cleaning

Method of applying penetrant

Method of removing excess penetrant

Method of drying surface

Method of applying developer


Manufacturer type and designation of consumables (cleaner, penetrant, remover and developer).

Requirement for certification of compliance of consumables (limits for sulfur and

A meter, timer, sensitivity test blocks, timer, etc.

Performance demonstration block– if required



Permitted time periods for process stages

A Intensity ranges (for Light/UV-A, also include background white light)











Name of operator responsible for performing PT

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

Condition and surface preparation of surfaces requiring inspection

consumables (cleaner, penetrant, remover and

consumables (limits for sulfur and halogens)

A, also include background white light)



Table AP4.3


Scope (application)

Material grade


Coverage required





Stage at which MT is to be performed.Stage of manufacture

Condition and surface preparation of surfaces requiring inspection.Surface Condition

Magnetizing techniques and magnetizing directions (with illustration showing these)Inspection techniques

Type/waveform and amperage of magnetizing current


Manufacturer, type and designation ofpermitted)

Equipment and consumables

Manufacturer, type and designation ofor dry) and contrast medium)

Light/UV-A meter, tangential field meter, flux indicator and residual field meter

Lift block for AC Yoke

Performance demonstration block

Calibrations, Calibration



Fill factors for rigid encircling strip (coil)s

Method for cleaning

Method of magnetization and method of applying magnetic particles “continuous”

Light or UV

Tangential field strength range requires (KA/m)

Ink concentration range


Adjustment to stage times if



Reporting


Application: Identification, description and





Name of operator responsible for performing MT

Dec. 2020 IPS

95

Table AP4.3 − Magnetic Particle Testing (MT)




Coverage required





Stage at which MT is to be performed.

Condition and surface preparation of surfaces requiring inspection.

Magnetizing techniques and magnetizing directions (with illustration showing these)

Type/waveform and amperage of magnetizing current


Manufacturer, type and designation of magnetic field generation (DC Yokes are not

Manufacturer, type and designation of consumables (cleaning liquid, magnetic particles (wet or dry) and contrast medium)

A meter, tangential field meter, flux indicator and residual field meter

Lift block for AC Yoke

Performance demonstration block– if required



Fill factors for rigid encircling strip (coil)s

Method for cleaning

Method of magnetization and method of applying magnetic particles “continuous” or “residual”

Light or UV-A intensity ranges (for UV-A. also include background white light)

Tangential field strength range requires (KA/m) – minimum and maximum

Ink concentration range


Adjustment to stage times if temperature limits are exceeded









Name of operator responsible for performing MT

IPS-M-PI-190(4)


Magnetizing techniques and magnetizing directions (with illustration showing these)

magnetic field generation (DC Yokes are not

consumables (cleaning liquid, magnetic particles (wet

A meter, tangential field meter, flux indicator and residual field meter

Method of magnetization and method of applying magnetic particles – and whether

A. also include background white light)

minimum and maximum

dimensions (see above)

Table AP4.4

Product from (e.g. SLMS pipe, HFW pipe, HFW weld seam).

Scope (application)





Reference to this

Qualification requirements.Personnel


Stage at which EMI is to be performed.Stage of manufacture

Condition and surface preparation of surfaces requiring inspection.Surface Condition

Mode of inspection: differential or absolute or combination.Inspection techniques Scanning mode: automated, manual

Manufacturer, type and designation of EMI instrument and scanner

Equipment Probe manufacturer, type, designations, sizes and

Reference standard, identification, description, illustration, including all reference reflections


Setting of sensitivityStandardization

Recording levels (defect gate heights,




Frequencies, drive voltages and gain settings

Minimum digitization rate

Maximum permitted product travel speed and probe



Reporting


Application: Identification, description and dimensions (see

All equipment used





Name of operator responsible for performing EMI

Dec. 2020 IPS

96

Table AP4.4 − Electromagnetic Inspection (EMI)

Product from (e.g. SLMS pipe, HFW pipe, HFW weld seam).






Qualification requirements.


Stage at which EMI is to be performed.


Mode of inspection: differential or absolute or combination.

Scanning mode: automated, manual


Probe manufacturer, type, designations, sizes and arrangments



Setting of sensitivity

Recording levels (defect gate heights, start points and lengths)



Frequencies, drive voltages and gain settings

Minimum digitization rate

Maximum permitted product travel speed and probe traverse speed





All equipment used





Name of operator responsible for performing EMI

IPS-M-PI-190(4)




traverse speed

above)

Table AP4.5

Product from (e.g. pipe longitudinal weld seam: pipe weld seam ends)

Scope (application)


Dimensions (pipe: length, diameter, thickness: weld thickness including root and cap)

Coverage required

Weld process





Stage at which RT is to be hydrotest.

Stage of manufacture

Condition and surface preparation of weld surfacesSurface Condition

Conventional film RT or digital (e.g. DR, DDA, CR)

Inspection techniques

Single-wall/double

Film processing: automated or manual

Arrangement of equipment

X-ray set: manufacturer, type and designation. Maximum kV and amperage. Focal (s)

Equipment

X-ray generator: manufacturer, type and designation. Maximum kV

Film: brand, designation and sizes.

Film processor: manufacturer, type and designation.

Source/film/detector manipulation system

Intensifying screens

Digital detector: manufacturer, type and designation, dimension, number of pixels

Imaging plate (IP): type, dimension, resolution

Imaging plate scanner: manufacturer, type and designation. Resolution

Film viewer: Sizes, maximum readable densities

Digital viewers/monitors: manufacturer, type, designation, size. Capabilities in terms of brightness, shades of gray, light intensity ratio, number of pixels

Image quality indicators


For digital RT: as required by ISO 10893

Source-film/detector distance, object


Angle of beam centerline relative to weld centerline

Maximum kV

Overlap of consecutive exposures

Location of film/detector/IP, IQIs, Identification letters

For digital RT: image quality class: permitted ranges for grey values and contrast: requirements for basic spatial

IQI location and sensitivity

Storage conditions for unexposed and exposed films. Digital image archiving


Report shall include at least the

Reporting



All equipment used




Name of operator responsible for performing RT/interpreting images

Dec. 2020 IPS

97

Table AP4.5 − Radiographic Inspection (RT)




Coverage required

process





Stage at which RT is to be performed e.g. for longitudinally welded pipe seams

Condition and surface preparation of weld surfaces

Conventional film RT or digital (e.g. DR, DDA, CR)

wall/double-wall: source inside/outside: film/detector outside/inside

Film processing: automated or manual

Arrangement of equipment - description, with illustration

ray set: manufacturer, type and designation. Maximum kV and amperage. Focal

ray generator: manufacturer, type and designation. Maximum kV

Film: brand, designation and sizes.

Film processor: manufacturer, type and designation.

Source/film/detector manipulation system

Intensifying screens


Imaging plate (IP): type, dimension, resolution


Film viewer: Sizes, maximum readable densities

Digital viewers/monitors: manufacturer, type, designation, size. Capabilities in terms of brightness, shades of gray, light intensity ratio, number of pixels

Image quality indicators


RT: as required by ISO 10893-7, plus routine checking of image archiving

film/detector distance, object-film/detector distance, geometric unsharpness (Ug)

Angle of beam centerline relative to weld centerline

Maximum kV permitted relative to penetrated thickness

Overlap of consecutive exposures

Location of film/detector/IP, IQIs, Identification letters

For digital RT: image quality class: permitted ranges for grey values and contrast: requirements for basic spatial resolution and signal-to-noise ratio

IQI location and sensitivity






All equipment used




of operator responsible for performing RT/interpreting images

IPS-M-PI-190(4)




performed e.g. for longitudinally welded pipe seams – after

wall: source inside/outside: film/detector outside/inside

ray set: manufacturer, type and designation. Maximum kV and amperage. Focal spot size

ray generator: manufacturer, type and designation. Maximum kV



Digital viewers/monitors: manufacturer, type, designation, size. Capabilities in terms of

7, plus routine checking of image archiving

film/detector distance, geometric unsharpness (Ug)

For digital RT: image quality class: permitted ranges for grey values and contrast:



of operator responsible for performing RT/interpreting images

Minimum Requirements

AP5.1 General

Pipe manufacturer shall determine and prepare

a) Requirements for steel making

• Electric furnace or basic oxygen.

• Deoxidation treatment.

• Vacuumed degasing.

• Ladle furnace Ar stirring.

• Through desulphurization.

• Treatment to control size,

• Banding.

• Fine grain practice.

• Full killed steel.

b) Manufacturing procedure specification (MPS)

• Reference standards.

• Dimensions including width, length, thickness, flatness, squareness and camber/plate length

and tolerances.

• Slab chemical composition and

• Manufacturer process arrangement (Flow chart).

• Slab numbering / traceability.

• Slab charging / loading system.

• Slab heat treatment.

• Slab descaling system.

• Plate rolling process.

• Plate heat treatment.

• Plate inspection area and method.

• Plate loading.

c) Quality control plan (QCP) / Inspection and test plan (ITP)

• Visual inspection.

• NDT.

• Physical tests.

• Mechanical tests.

• Corrosion tests.

• Marking and loading.

• Traceability.

• Inspector activity and frequency.

Dec. 2020 IPS

98

APPENDIX 5

(Informative)

Minimum Requirements to Order Sour-Service Plate

Pipe manufacturer shall determine and prepare data about the following:

Requirements for steel making

Electric furnace or basic oxygen.

Through desulphurization.

control size, shape and distribution of oxide and manganese sulfide

Manufacturing procedure specification (MPS)

Dimensions including width, length, thickness, flatness, squareness and camber/plate length

Slab chemical composition and grade.

Manufacturer process arrangement (Flow chart).

Slab numbering / traceability.

Slab charging / loading system.

Plate inspection area and method.

/ Inspection and test plan (ITP)

Inspector activity and frequency.

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

shape and distribution of oxide and manganese sulfide Inclusions.

Dimensions including width, length, thickness, flatness, squareness and camber/plate length

Table AP5.1- Minimum Items of Quality Control

No

1 Manufacturer procedure specification (MPS) for Slab

2 Manufacturer procedure specification (MPS) for plate

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13 Metallography (Inclusion, Banding, grain size, ...)

14

15

16

17

18

AP5.2 Additional information

• Pipe manufacturer is responsible for quality of plates completely.

• Pipe manufacturer shall prepare a final book about plate manufacturing and all related

• All slabs shall have identified No. and Heat No.

• All slabs shall evaluate in standpoint of d

• Both edge sides of all plates shall be

• Both edge sides of all plates shall be check via ultrasonic for cracks, laminations, holes ... .

• Both longitudinal edges of all plates shall be cut

• All plates shall have mark

include at least: Mfg/Trade Mark,

treatment type), dimension,

• Repairing by welding is not acceptabl

• All manufacturing stages shall be traceable.

• All tests results shall be according to IPS criteria

by purchaser.

• Third party inspector shall prepare manufacturing certificate for all plates.

• Shipment of plates shall be carried out under third party inspector supervision

by the purchaser.

Dec. 2020 IPS

99

Minimum Items of Quality Control check-list for Plate based on order requirements

Quality Control check-list for Plate

(Type of activity)

Manufacturer procedure specification (MPS) for Slab

Manufacturer procedure specification (MPS) for plate

Sulfur print and segregation analysis

Visual inspection

Dimensional inspection

Ultrasonic evaluation

Heat and product chemical analysis

Tensile test

Impact test

DWT test

Hardness test

CTOD test

Metallography (Inclusion, Banding, grain size, ...)

Corrosion tests (SSC and HIC)

Marking

Manufacturing documents and test reports

Shipment procedure

Manufacturer certificate

Pipe manufacturer is responsible for quality of plates completely.

shall prepare a final book about plate manufacturing and all related

All slabs shall have identified No. and Heat No.

hall evaluate in standpoint of dimensional and specification before plate making.

Both edge sides of all plates shall be inspected for defects and surface imperfections.

Both edge sides of all plates shall be check via ultrasonic for cracks, laminations, holes ... .

Both longitudinal edges of all plates shall be cut, if specified by the purchaser

All plates shall have marking and code according to AIAG-B1 standard.

include at least: Mfg/Trade Mark, material, heat No., plate identifier, delivery condition

imension, weight, service condition and date.

Repairing by welding is not acceptable.

All manufacturing stages shall be traceable.

ll be according to IPS criteria or other related standard which approved

Third party inspector shall prepare manufacturing certificate for all plates.

hall be carried out under third party inspector supervision

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

based on order

shall prepare a final book about plate manufacturing and all related tests.

imensional and specification before plate making.

inspected for defects and surface imperfections.

Both edge sides of all plates shall be check via ultrasonic for cracks, laminations, holes ... .

, if specified by the purchaser.

B1 standard. Marking shall

elivery condition (heat

or other related standard which approved

Third party inspector shall prepare manufacturing certificate for all plates.

hall be carried out under third party inspector supervision, if specified

Typical MPS/QCP

MPS/QCP(SEAMLESS & WELDED LINE PIPE)

(MANUFACTURE PROCESS SPECIFICATION /

Manufacturer Name:

Supplier (Customer Name):

Client (Purchaser Name):

Order No:

Item No.

As per PMR : Type of Pipeline, OD, Grade & PSL, W.T, Service Condition, Type of pipe end

Priority

Rev. No. Originated

Manufacturer

Manufacturer

Logo

Manufacturer Name :

Supplier Name :

Client Name :

Document Name :

Dec. 2020 IPS

100

APPENDIX 6

(Informative)

Typical MPS/QCP-ITP document

Typical MPS/QCP-ITP document

MPS/QCP-ITP (SEAMLESS & WELDED LINE PIPE)

PECIFICATION / QUALITY CONTROL PLAN - INSPECTION AND

Product Description

As per PMR : Type of Pipeline, OD, Grade & PSL, W.T, Service Condition, Type of pipe end

Applicable References

As per PMR : Title of Reference, Edition, Date

Date Checked Date Approved

Supplier

Client

Order No: Item No:

Contract No: Rev:

Page : of Date:

Ref / Doc No:

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

NSPECTION AND TEST PLAN)

As per PMR : Type of Pipeline, OD, Grade & PSL, W.T, Service Condition, Type of pipe end-finished

Approved Date

Client or AM

Item No:

Supplier

Logo

Rev:

Date:

General

G.1. Scope

This document specifies requirements for manufacturing of seamless and welded pipe for use in pipeline transportation systems in the petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries.

• This specification gives the acceptance criteria for the manufacturing, inspection and testithe referenced order.

• Product inspection level for this order is LEVEL 1, which in product manufacturing shall carried out in presence of owner inspector according to this document.

G.2. Priority of documents

1. This MPS/QCP-ITP

2. IPS-M-PI-190

3. API 5L

• Any probable conflict shall confirm with

G.3. First-day tests

Fulfill according to relevant contract standards/documents and COMPANY's requirements.

G.4. Calibration

Fulfill according to relevant contract standards/documents and

G.5. Test unit


G.6. ITP Legend

• Hold Point (H): Inspector invited to observe a specific operation. If inspector fail to attend, the operation can not proceed without Inspector Presence.

• Witness Point (W): Inspector invited to observe a specific operation. If inspector fail to attend, the operation can proceed without Inspector Presence.

• Document Review (R):available on request.

Any other inspection activity shall be defined as COMPANY's requirements.

G.7. MPS Information


Generally, the manufacturer shall supply the purchaser with summary information or identification of the control documents, as applicable, on the main characteristics of the manufactThis information shall include at least the following:

Dec. 2020 IPS

101

requirements for manufacturing of seamless and welded pipe for use in pipeline transportation systems in the petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries.

This specification gives the acceptance criteria for the manufacturing, inspection and testi

Product inspection level for this order is LEVEL 1, which in product manufacturing shall carried out in presence of owner inspector according to this document.

Any probable conflict shall confirm with COMPANY.




Inspector invited to observe a specific operation. If inspector fail to attend, the operation can not proceed without Inspector Presence.

Inspector invited to observe a specific operation. If inspector fail to an proceed without Inspector Presence.

Document Review (R): No invitation to inspector. Established records and reports are

Any other inspection activity shall be defined as COMPANY's requirements.

ding to relevant contract standards/documents and COMPANY's requirements.

he manufacturer shall supply the purchaser with summary information or identification of the control documents, as applicable, on the main characteristics of the manufactThis information shall include at least the following:

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

requirements for manufacturing of seamless and welded pipe for use in pipeline transportation systems in the petroleum, petrochemical and natural gas industries.

This specification gives the acceptance criteria for the manufacturing, inspection and testing of

Product inspection level for this order is LEVEL 1, which in product manufacturing shall carried


COMPANY's requirements.


Inspector invited to observe a specific operation. If inspector fail to attend,

Inspector invited to observe a specific operation. If inspector fail to

No invitation to inspector. Established records and reports are

ding to relevant contract standards/documents and COMPANY's requirements.

he manufacturer shall supply the purchaser with summary information or identification of the control documents, as applicable, on the main characteristics of the manufacturing procedure.

a) Steelmaking and casting (For all Pipe):

1. Name/location of manufacturing facility;

2. Equipment and process description includincontrol practices, casting method

3. Chemical composition ranges including all elements intentionally added;

4. Steelmaking and casting process control;

5. Hydrogen control practices (where applicable);

6. Product identification and traceability practices;

7. Product rework/retest/release controls for nonpractices including grade intermixes/transitions and process/chemistry deviations;

8. Centerline segregation controls and acceptance criteria, as applicable.

b) Pipe manufacturing (For all


2. Equipment and process description;

3. Hydrostatic testing practices including calibration/verifi

4. Non-destructive inspection methods and practices including instrument standardization practices;

5. Chemical/mechanical property test and retest sample location(s) and specimen specification;

6. Dimensional control methods including

7. For full body normalized and quenched and tempered pipe, the aim and control tolerances for theaustenitizing and tempering times and temperatures and a description of the temperature monitoring and control methods;

8. Pipe marking process and details;

9. Product traceability practices from starting release;

10. Product rework/retest/release controls for nonpractices;

11. Pipe storage, handling, loading and shipping practices.

c) For SMLS Pipe:

1. Pipe-forming process for as-rolled pipe:

o applicable rolling practice control temperature tolerances (reheating, rolling and cooling);

o applicable time tolerances

2. Pipe heat-treatment practice.

d) For welded pipe:

1. Pipe-forming procedures, including preparation of edges, control of alignment and shape;

2. Pipe heat-treatment procedure, where applicable, including inseam;

3. Welding procedure specification with previous qualification records for this procedure, ifThis shall include sufficient information of the following kind:

Dec. 2020 IPS

102

a) Steelmaking and casting (For all Pipe):

Name/location of manufacturing facility;

Equipment and process description including steelmaking method, heat sizecasting method and vacuum degassing and deoxidation practice

Chemical composition ranges including all elements intentionally added;

Steelmaking and casting process control;

where applicable);

duct identification and traceability practices;

Product rework/retest/release controls for non-conformances to manufacturer’s documentedpractices including grade intermixes/transitions and process/chemistry deviations;

Centerline segregation controls and acceptance criteria, as applicable.

b) Pipe manufacturing (For all pipes):


Equipment and process description;

Hydrostatic testing practices including calibration/verification of equipment;

destructive inspection methods and practices including instrument standardization practices;

Chemical/mechanical property test and retest sample location(s) and specimen specification;

Dimensional control methods including methods to straighten pipe or correct dimensions;

For full body normalized and quenched and tempered pipe, the aim and control tolerances for theaustenitizing and tempering times and temperatures and a description of the temperature

trol methods;

Pipe marking process and details;

practices from starting material (as billet, coil, and plate

Product rework/retest/release controls for non-conformances from manufacturer’s documented

Pipe storage, handling, loading and shipping practices.

rolled pipe:

applicable rolling practice control temperature tolerances (reheating, rolling and cooling);

applicable time tolerances (reheating, rolling and cooling);

treatment practice.

forming procedures, including preparation of edges, control of alignment and shape;

treatment procedure, where applicable, including in-line heat treatment of the weld

Welding procedure specification with previous qualification records for this procedure, ifThis shall include sufficient information of the following kind:

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

g steelmaking method, heat size, inclusion shape and vacuum degassing and deoxidation practice;

conformances to manufacturer’s documented practices including grade intermixes/transitions and process/chemistry deviations;

destructive inspection methods and practices including instrument standardization practices;

Chemical/mechanical property test and retest sample location(s) and specimen specification;

methods to straighten pipe or correct dimensions;

For full body normalized and quenched and tempered pipe, the aim and control tolerances for the austenitizing and tempering times and temperatures and a description of the temperature

and plate) receipt to pipe

conformances from manufacturer’s documented

applicable rolling practice control temperature tolerances (reheating, rolling and cooling);

forming procedures, including preparation of edges, control of alignment and shape;

reatment of the weld

Welding procedure specification with previous qualification records for this procedure, if available.

i) For HFW seam welding:

o confirmation of adequate weld seam

o description and controls of welding process;

ii) For SAW seam, repair, coil/plate end, and jointer welding, as applicable:

o wire/flux consumable manufacturer(s), classification and wire diameter(s);

o welding parameters and ranges including current, voltage, travel speed, heat input;

4. For SAW pipes:

i) Seam welding bevel dimensional tolerances;

ii) Method of tack welding and spacing of tack welds (if applicable);

iii) Procedures for wire and flux storage and handling inrecycling flux, as applicable;

iv) Weld defect removal methods.

e) Hot rolling - for welded pipe:


2. Equipment and process description, including heat

3. Applicable rolling practice control temperature tolerances (reheating, rolling and cooling);

4. Applicable time tolerances (reheating, rolling, and cooling);

5. Applicable non-destructive inspection methods and practices for the coil/plate includinginstrument standardization practices;

6. Dimensional and mechanical property control limits;

7. End cropping practices;

8. Product traceability practices from slab re

9. Product rework/retest/release controls for nonpractices (including process, chemical/ mechanical, and dimensional deviations),

10. Storage, handling, loading and shipping practices

f) Secondary processing (if applicable)


2. Equipment and process description;

3. Product identification and traceability practices from plate/coil receipt to plate/coil delivery;

4. Product rework/recoil/retest/release controls for nondocumented practices (including process, chemical/ mechanical, and dimensional deviations),

5. Storage, handling, loading and shipping practices.

g) For HFW pipe:

The seam welding procedure shall also in

1. Methods to be used for heating strip edges and for the control and monitoring of power input in relation to the temperature of the pipe sur

2. Frequency (in kHz) of the welding power supply;

3. Welding speed;

Dec. 2020 IPS

103

confirmation of adequate weld seam heat treatment through metallography;

description and controls of welding process;

seam, repair, coil/plate end, and jointer welding, as applicable:

wire/flux consumable manufacturer(s), classification and wire diameter(s);

and ranges including current, voltage, travel speed, heat input;

i) Seam welding bevel dimensional tolerances;

ii) Method of tack welding and spacing of tack welds (if applicable);

iii) Procedures for wire and flux storage and handling including moisture control and practices

Weld defect removal methods.

for welded pipe:


Equipment and process description, including heat-treatment method (N or Q) if applicable;

Applicable rolling practice control temperature tolerances (reheating, rolling and cooling);

Applicable time tolerances (reheating, rolling, and cooling);

destructive inspection methods and practices for the coil/plate includinginstrument standardization practices;

Dimensional and mechanical property control limits;

Product traceability practices from slab receipt to plate/coil delivery;

Product rework/retest/release controls for non-conformances to manufacturer’s documentedpractices (including process, chemical/ mechanical, and dimensional deviations),

Storage, handling, loading and shipping practices.

f) Secondary processing (if applicable) – for welded pipe:


Equipment and process description;

Product identification and traceability practices from plate/coil receipt to plate/coil delivery;

Product rework/recoil/retest/release controls for non-conformances from manufacturer’sdocumented practices (including process, chemical/ mechanical, and dimensional deviations),

Storage, handling, loading and shipping practices.

seam welding procedure shall also include details of the following:

Methods to be used for heating strip edges and for the control and monitoring of power input in relation to the temperature of the pipe surface and the speed of the pipe;

z) of the welding power supply;

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

heat treatment through metallography;

wire/flux consumable manufacturer(s), classification and wire diameter(s);

and ranges including current, voltage, travel speed, heat input;

cluding moisture control and practices for

(N or Q) if applicable;

Applicable rolling practice control temperature tolerances (reheating, rolling and cooling);

destructive inspection methods and practices for the coil/plate including

conformances to manufacturer’s documented practices (including process, chemical/ mechanical, and dimensional deviations),

Product identification and traceability practices from plate/coil receipt to plate/coil delivery;

conformances from manufacturer’s documented practices (including process, chemical/ mechanical, and dimensional deviations),

Methods to be used for heating strip edges and for the control and monitoring of power input in

4. Welding Temperature;

5. Welding power;

6. Compressive force or displacement used in welding;

7. Temperature of in-line normalizing (if applied);

8. Details of any protective atmosphere used for

9. Methods used to accomplish and control the upset we

10. Methods used for trimming of the weld bead.

h) For SAW pipe:

1. Plate manufacturing method including details

2. Plate NDT procedures;

3. Pipe forming procedure;

4. Seam welding procedure including details

o Method of alignment, clamping and tack welding (if any) of the joints to be welded together with details of runattachment to the pipe;

o For pipe made by the cagealignment of the inside and outside welds;

o Welding process;

o Brand name, classification, size and

o Speed of welding;

o Number of electrodes and polarity for each electrode;

o Welding current for each wire;

o Welding voltage for each wire;

o Dimensions of welding preparation;

o Number of weld passes and their

o Details of tracking system for both inside and outside welding and also method for checking the set up of the system;

o Limits on internal and external weld reinforcement;

o Repair welding procedure;

o The method and degree of expansion to be applie

o Pipe heat treatment procedure (when appropriate);

o Hydrostatic test procedure;

o NDT procedure.

G.8 QCP-ITP Information


Inspection and Test Plan shall include at least

1. Relevant standard for each test.

2. Inspection activity and Inspection points

Dec. 2020 IPS

104

r displacement used in welding;

line normalizing (if applied);

Details of any protective atmosphere used for welding;

Methods used to accomplish and control the upset welding of the heated pipe edges;

for trimming of the weld bead.

Plate manufacturing method including details of specialized cooling and heat treatment;

Seam welding procedure including details of the following:

Method of alignment, clamping and tack welding (if any) of the joints to be welded tails of run-on and run-off tabs to be used and the method of their

attachment to the pipe;

For pipe made by the cage-forming process, details of the methods used to maintain the alignment of the inside and outside welds;

ification, size and grade of filler metal and flux;

Number of electrodes and polarity for each electrode;

Welding current for each wire;

Welding voltage for each wire;

ensions of welding preparation;

Number of weld passes and their disposition;

Details of tracking system for both inside and outside welding and also method for checking the set up of the system;

Limits on internal and external weld reinforcement;

Repair welding procedure;

The method and degree of expansion to be applied;

Pipe heat treatment procedure (when appropriate);

Hydrostatic test procedure;


Inspection and Test Plan shall include at least the following:

Relevant standard for each test.

and Inspection points;

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

lding of the heated pipe edges;

zed cooling and heat treatment;

Method of alignment, clamping and tack welding (if any) of the joints to be welded off tabs to be used and the method of their

forming process, details of the methods used to maintain the

Details of tracking system for both inside and outside welding and also method for


3. Organization or individuals responsible for performing the inspection activity (including manufacturer, subcontractor, purchaser

4. Inspection/test and calibration practices, as applicable;

5. Frequency of inspection;

6. Acceptance criteria;

7. Actions to non-conformances;

8. Result recording, as applicable;

9. Identification of processes requiring validation;

Description and Acceptance CriteriaItem. Title

Pre-Inspection Any following parts shall be Fulfilled according to relevant contract standards/documents and other supplementary COMPANY's requirements.

1.

2.

In addition to information in part Ginclude minimum requirements as follow� Reference document:� Steel is made by: (Manufacturer of starting material).� Type of furnace and Process� Casting method: � Refining technique:� Steel condition: (fully killed, Fine grain...).� Heat treatment condition� Dimension and type of starting

Plate...). � Traceability and label

Plate...) containing heat No., material name, weight, related documents and certificates.

� Starting material Inspection and Quality Length, Dimension, Weight, Marking, Surface quality, Repair, NDT, Chemical composition, Mechanical properties...).

� Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Remarks:

2.1: Steel Making

For all pipes

In addition to information in part Ginclude minimum requirements as follow� Reference document:� Manufacturing method for SMLS

Process: Piercing, Rolling, Plug Mill, Mandrel Mill, Reeling .../ Extrusion Process.../ Forging Process...).

� Heating the starting Temperature, ...).

� Pipe forming: (As rolled, � Hot operations: (Such as sizing, Finish, Rolling...).� Cold operations: (Such as Straightening, sizing, Finishing, Expanding,

Drawing, Stretch reducing...).� Sizing ratio for cold expanded pipe� Traceability, Inspection, Quality control and Repair:� Manufacturing Process C� Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Remarks:

2.2: Pipe Manufacturing

Process

For SMLS pipe

Dec. 2020 IPS

105

Organization or individuals responsible for performing the inspection activity (including manufacturer, subcontractor, purchaser or third party representative);

ation practices, as applicable;

conformances;

Result recording, as applicable;

Identification of processes requiring validation;

FrequencyDescription and Acceptance Criteria

Inspection Meeting: Discussion including all requirements. Any following parts shall be Fulfilled according to relevant contract standards/documents and

supplementary COMPANY's requirements.

Pipe Manufacturing

FirstIn addition to information in part G of this document, this section shall include minimum requirements as follow:

document: (Standard, Procedure...). (Manufacturer of starting material).

Type of furnace and Process:

: Steel condition: (fully killed, Fine grain...). Heat treatment condition: Dimension and type of starting material: (Ingot, Billet, Bloom, Coil or

label of starting material (Billet, Bloom, Coil or Plate...) containing heat No., material name, weight, related documents and certificates. Starting material Inspection and Quality control: (Including Heat No., Length, Dimension, Weight, Marking, Surface quality, Repair, NDT, Chemical composition, Mechanical properties...). Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).

Production

Firstition to information in part G of this document, this section shall

include minimum requirements as follow: document: (Standard, Procedure...).

Manufacturing method for SMLS pipe: (Such as Mannesmann Piercing, Rolling, Plug Mill, Mandrel Mill, Reeling .../

Extrusion Process.../ Forging Process...). Heating the starting material: (Equipment and type of furnace,

(As rolled, hot forming...). (Such as sizing, Finish, Rolling...).

(Such as Straightening, sizing, Finishing, Expanding, reducing...).

Sizing ratio for cold expanded pipe: , Inspection, Quality control and Repair:

Manufacturing Process Chart of SMLS Pipe shall illustrate in Annex I. Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).

Production

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

Organization or individuals responsible for performing the inspection activity (including

Inspection

Frequency

Inspector Mill

Any following parts shall be Fulfilled according to relevant contract standards/documents and

First-day

Production

First-day

Production

In addition to information in part Ginclude minimum requirements as follow� Reference document:� Manufacturing method for welded

welding and acceptable� Heating the starting

Temperature, ...). � Pipe forming: (As rolled, � Hot operations: (Such as sizing, Finish, Rolling...).� Cold operations: (Such as Straightening, sizing, Finishing,

Drawing, Stretch reducing...).� Sizing ratio for cold expanded pipe� Traceability, Inspection, Quality control and Repair:� Manufacturing Process Chart of welded Pipe shall illustrate in Annex � Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) for welded

in Annex III. � Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) for welded

in Annex IV. � Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Remarks

2.3: Pipe Manufacturing

Process

For welded pipe

This section shall include minimum requirements as follow� Reference document:� Heat treatment process:

Equipment and type of furnace, Temperature, Holding time...).� Heat treatment Process Chart of Pipe shall illustrate in Annex � Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Remarks:

2.4:

Heat Treatment

For all pipes

3.

For first-day & production, this sectionrequirements as follow

� Reference document:� Equipment and Method of analysis:� Location, Orientation, Number and Dimensions of samples:� Heat analysis and Product analysis:� Tolerance for chemical composition:� Ratios & sum of element contents:� CEIIW, CEPcm Equations (whichever is needed):� Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Retest: � Remarks:

3.1: Heat and

Product Analysis

For all pipes

For first-day & production, requirements as follow:

� Reference document:� Equipment and Method of analysis:� Location, Orientation, Number and Dimensions of samples:� Microstructure examination

criteria: � Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...)� Retest: � Remarks:

3.2: Metallographic Examination

(Micro & Macro)

For all pipes

Dec. 2020 IPS

106

Firstition to information in part G of this document, this section shall

include minimum requirements as follow: document: (Standard, Procedure...).

Manufacturing method for welded pipe: (Preparation of edges for acceptable criteria for machining or shearing...).

Heating the starting material: (Equipment and type of furnace,

(As rolled, hot forming...). (Such as sizing, Finish, Rolling...).

(Such as Straightening, sizing, Finishing, Expanding, reducing...).

Sizing ratio for cold expanded pipe: Traceability, Inspection, Quality control and Repair: Manufacturing Process Chart of welded Pipe shall illustrate in Annex I. Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) for welded pipe shall illustrate

Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) for welded pipe shall illustrate

Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).

Production

Firstshall include minimum requirements as follow:

document: (Standard, Procedure...) process: (Method and Delivery condition of pipes,

Equipment and type of furnace, Temperature, Holding time...). Heat treatment Process Chart of Pipe shall illustrate in Annex II. Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).

Production

Chemical Composition

Firstday & production, this section shall include minimum

requirements as follow:

document: (Standard, Procedure...) Equipment and Method of analysis: Location, Orientation, Number and Dimensions of samples: Heat analysis and Product analysis: Tolerance for chemical composition: Ratios & sum of element contents:

Equations (whichever is needed): Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).

Production



document: (Standard, Procedure...) Equipment and Method of analysis: Location, Orientation, Number and Dimensions of samples: Microstructure examination, Banding, Inclusion rate & Acceptance

ts/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...)

Production

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

First-day

Production

First-day

Production

First-day

Production

First-day

Production

4.

For first-day & production, this section shall requirements as follow:

� Reference document:� Equipment and Test method:� Location, Orientation, Number and Dimensions of samples:� Min & Max of Yield strength (� Min & Max of Tensile strength (� Ratio = (Rt0.5/Rm): � Elongation(Af):(According to gauge length:50 mm)� Af Equation: � Tensile strength of weld seam (� Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Retest : � Remarks :

4.1: Tensile Properties

Pipe body:

For all pipes

Seam weld: For welded pipes

For first-day & production, this section shall include minimum requirements as follow :

� Reference document:� Equipment and Test method� Location, Orientation, Number and

and interval of indentation, Distance to surface of traverses)� Range of hardness value & Acceptance criteria:� Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Retest : � Remarks:

4.2: Hardness Properties Pipe body:

For all pipes Seam weld & HAZ: For welded pipes

Hard Spots:


� Reference document:� Equipment and Test � Location, Orientation, Number and Dimensions of samples :� CVN absorbed energy (Individual, Min average) :� Test temperature: � Shear fracture area :� Full transition temperature curve :� Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Retest : � Remarks:

4.3: CVN - Impact

Properties Pipe body:

For all pipes

Seam weld and HAZ:

For welded pipes


� Reference document:� Equipment and Test method :� Location, Orientation, Number and Dimensions of samples :� Average shear fracture area :� individual and average test results for each test :� Test temperature : � Full transition curves :� Acceptance criteria :� Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Retest: � Remarks:

4.4:

Drop-weight tear test

Pipe body:

For welded pipes

Dec. 2020 IPS

107

Mechanical Testing



document: (Standard, Procedure...) Equipment and Test method: Location, Orientation, Number and Dimensions of samples: Min & Max of Yield strength (Rt0.5): Min & Max of Tensile strength (Rm):

):(According to gauge length:50 mm)

Tensile strength of weld seam (Only for welded pipe): Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).

Production

Firstday & production, this section shall include minimum requirements as follow :

document: (Standard, Procedure...) Equipment and Test method: Location, Orientation, Number and Dimensions of samples: (Number and interval of indentation, Distance to surface of traverses) Range of hardness value & Acceptance criteria: Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).

Production


requirements as follow :

document: (Standard, Procedure...) Equipment and Test method : Location, Orientation, Number and Dimensions of samples : CVN absorbed energy (Individual, Min average) :

Shear fracture area : Full transition temperature curve : Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).

Production



document: (Standard, Procedure...) Equipment and Test method : Location, Orientation, Number and Dimensions of samples : Average shear fracture area : individual and average test results for each test :

Full transition curves :

ia : Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).

Production

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

First-day

Production

First-day

oduction

First-day

Production

First-day

Production


� Reference document:� Equipment and Test method :� Location, Orientation, Number and Dimensions of samples :� Acceptance criteria :� Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Retest : � Remarks :

4.5: Flattening test

Pipe body & weld

For HFW pipe


� Reference document:� Equipment and Test method :� Location, Orientation, Number and � Acceptance criteria :� Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Retest : � Remarks :

4.6:

Guided-bend testing

Seam weld:

For SAW

For first-day and productionrequirements as follow :

� Reference document:� Equipment and Test method :� Location, Orientation, Number and Dimensions of samples :� Acceptance criteria :� Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Retest : � Remarks :

4.7:

CTOD For all pipes

For first-day and production, this section shall include minimum requirements as follow :

� Reference document:� Equipment and Test method :� Location, Orientation, Number� Acceptance criteria :� Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Retest :

Remarks :

4.8:

Spring back For HFW and

SAWH

Dec. 2020 IPS

108

First

day & production, this section shall include minimum requirements as follow :

document: (Standard, Procedure...) Equipment and Test method : Location, Orientation, Number and Dimensions of samples : Acceptance criteria : Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).

Production

First

day & production, this section shall include minimum requirements as follow :


Production

Firstand production, this section shall include minimum requirements as follow :


Production

Firstday and production, this section shall include minimum requirements as follow :


Production

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

First-day

Production

First-day

Production

First-day

Production

First-day

Production

5.

For first-day & production, this requirements as follow :

� Reference document:� Equipment and Test method :� Test pressure value :� Holding time under pressure :� Parameters & equation for calculation of pressure:� Produced reports/Doc: � Retest : � Remarks :

� Note: Test pressure shall be calculated on the basis of the specified

wall thickness which is ordered wall thickness.

5.1: Hydrostatic

Test

For all pipes

6.

For first-day & production, this section shall include minimum requirements as follow:

� Reference document:� Equipment and Test method:� Location, Orientation, wide zone and inspection length (full & end of

pipe), repaired areas and overlaps for scanning coverage:� Ultrasonic inspection for longitudinal and transversal imperfections

inside & outside: � Ultrasonic inspection for Lamination:� Ultrasonic wall thickness measurements:� Acceptance criteria for defect & imperfe� Acceptance criteria for laminar imperfections including Maximum

individual imperfection (Area, Length),Minimum imperfection size considered (Area, ength,width), Maximum population density.

� Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Retest : � Remarks : � Note: The required non

place after all heat treating and cold

6.1:

Ultrasonic Inspection

Pipe Body & End: For all pipes

Coil/strip/plate body, end, edge or areas adjacent to the weld seam: For welded pipe

Weld seam:

For welded pipe

For first-day & production, this section shall include minimum requirements as follow:

� Reference document:� Equipment and Test method (technique):� Location, Orientation, wide zone and inspection length (full & end of

pipe), repaired areas and overlaps for scanning coverage:� Image quality indicators (IQIs)� Traceability of radiographic images� Inspection for longitudinal and transversal imperfections inside &

outside: � Acceptance criteria for defect & imperfections:� Inspection for Lamination:� Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Retest: � Remarks: � Note: The required

place after all heat treating and cold

6.2:

Radiographic Inspection

Weld seam:

For SAW pipe

weld seam at the pipe end:

For SAW pipes

Dec. 2020 IPS

109

Pressure Testing


document: (Standard, Procedure...) Equipment and Test method : Test pressure value : Holding time under pressure : Parameters & equation for calculation of pressure: Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).

Test pressure shall be calculated on the basis of the specified wall thickness which is ordered wall thickness.

Production

Non-Destructive Inspection



document: (Standard, Procedure...) Equipment and Test method: Location, Orientation, wide zone and inspection length (full & end of

repaired areas and overlaps for scanning coverage: Ultrasonic inspection for longitudinal and transversal imperfections

Ultrasonic inspection for Lamination: Ultrasonic wall thickness measurements: Acceptance criteria for defect & imperfections: Acceptance criteria for laminar imperfections including Maximum individual imperfection (Area, Length), Minimum imperfection size considered (Area, ength,width), Maximum


The required non-destructive inspections of pipe shall take place after all heat treating and cold-expansion operations.

Production



document: (Standard, Procedure...) Equipment and Test method (technique): Location, Orientation, wide zone and inspection length (full & end of pipe), repaired areas and overlaps for scanning coverage: Image quality indicators (IQIs):

radiographic images: Inspection for longitudinal and transversal imperfections inside &

Acceptance criteria for defect & imperfections: Inspection for Lamination: Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).

: The required non-destructive inspections of pipe shall take place after all heat treating and cold-expansion operations. Production

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

First-day

Production

First-day

Production

First-day

Production


� Reference document:� Equipment and Test method :� Location, Orientation, wide zone and inspection length (full &

pipe), repaired areas and overlaps for scanning of samples: � Electromagnetic inspection for longitudinal and transversal surface

imperfections (outside):� Acceptance criteria for imperfections :� Residual Magnetism : (Number, Average and Maximum of r� Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Retest : � Remarks : � Note: The required non

place after all heat treating

6.3: Electromagnetic

Inspection

Pipe Body & End: For SMLS pipes with W.T< 6 mm


� Reference document:� Equipment and Test method :� Location, Orientation, wide zone and inspection length (full & end of

pipe), repaired areas and overlaps for scanning of samples :� Magnetic particle inspection for laminar imperfections� Acceptance criteria for imperfections :� Residual Magnetism : (Number, Average an� Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Retest : � Remarks : � Note: If UT has not been performed from the outside and if UT from

the inside is not feasible due to dimensional limitations, the end face/bevel at each pipe end sthe detection of laminar imperfections.

� Note: The required nonplace after all heat treating and cold

6.4: Magnetic Particle

Inspection

Pipe end face, bevel:

For all pipes


� Reference document:� Equipment and Test method :� Location, Orientation,

pipe), repaired areas and overlaps for scanning of samples :� Acceptance criteria for discontinuities:� Residual Magnetism : (Number, Average and Maximum of readings)� Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...� Retest: � Remarks:

6.5:

Penetrant Test or Magnetic Particle

Weld seam:

For welded pipe

Pipe Body: For SMLS pipes

7.

For first-day & production, this section shall include requirements as follow :

� Reference document:� Equipment and Test method :� Location for examination of samples (Pipe body,

outside & inside...): � Illuminance for examination :� Examination for imperfections and

leaks, lamination, hard spots, dents and other geometric deviations...� Acceptance criteria for undercut and arc burn (� Acceptance criteria for imperfections and defects :� Produced reports/Doc: (Tab� Retest : � Repair : � Remarks:

7.1:

Surface condition

For all pipe

Dec. 2020 IPS

110


requirements as follow : document: (Standard, Procedure...)

Equipment and Test method : Location, Orientation, wide zone and inspection length (full & end of pipe), repaired areas and overlaps for scanning of samples: Electromagnetic inspection for longitudinal and transversal surface imperfections (outside): Acceptance criteria for imperfections : Residual Magnetism : (Number, Average and Maximum of readings) Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).

: The required non-destructive inspections of pipe shall take place after all heat treating and cold-expansion operations.

Production



document: (Standard, Procedure...) Equipment and Test method :

Orientation, wide zone and inspection length (full & end of pipe), repaired areas and overlaps for scanning of samples : Magnetic particle inspection for laminar imperfections Acceptance criteria for imperfections : Residual Magnetism : (Number, Average and Maximum of readings) Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).

: If UT has not been performed from the outside and if UT from the inside is not feasible due to dimensional limitations, the end face/bevel at each pipe end shall be magnetic particle inspected for the detection of laminar imperfections.

: The required non-destructive inspections of pipe shall take place after all heat treating and cold-expansion operations. Production


document: (Standard, Procedure...) Equipment and Test method : Location, Orientation, wide zone and inspection length (full & end of pipe), repaired areas and overlaps for scanning of samples : Acceptance criteria for discontinuities: Residual Magnetism : (Number, Average and Maximum of readings) Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).

Production

Visual and Dimensional Inspection


requirements as follow : document: (Standard, Procedure...)

Equipment and Test method : Location for examination of samples (Pipe body, Pipe end, Pipe

uminance for examination :

Examination for imperfections and defects (such as cracks, sweats, leaks, lamination, hard spots, dents and other geometric deviations...): Acceptance criteria for undercut and arc burn (only for welded pipe) : Acceptance criteria for imperfections and defects : Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).

Production

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

First-day

Production

First-day

Production

First-day

Production

First-day

Production


� Reference document:� Equipment and Test method :� Location for examination of samples (Pipe

outside & inside...): � Diameter tolerances (Pipe except the end & Pipe end):� Out-of-roundness tolerances (Pipe except the end & Pipe end) :� Tolerances for wall thickness :� Average length of pipes, minimum percent of pipes in specified range

of length, Min & Max of pipe length:� Tolerances for straightness (Total deviation from a straight line, Local

deviation from a straight line):� Tolerances for Mass (Weight): � Out-of-squareness: � Bevel angle and tolerance :� Width of the root face and tolerance :� Tolerances for the weld seam (

(Including Radial offset of strip/plate edges, Height of the flash or weld bead/reinforcement, Misalignment of the wel

� Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Retest: � Repair: � Remarks:

7.2: Dimensional

Condition

For all pipe

8.


� Reference document:� Equipment and Test

as temperature, H2S concentration, pH...)� Location, Orientation, Number and Dimensions of samples :� Acceptance criteria ( CLR, CSR, CTR

...): � Test duration : � Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Retest: � Remarks:

8.1: Hydrogen-induced cracking (HIC) Test

For all pipe


� Reference document:� Equipment and Test

as temperature, H2S concentration, pH...)� Location, Orientation, � Acceptance criteria :� Test duration : � Samples under load stress value :� Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Retest: � Remarks:

8.2: Sulfide stress cracking (SSC)

Test For all pipe

9.

This section shall include minimum requirements as follow : � Reference document:� Equipment and method :� Location of marking on pipe :� Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Remarks:

Pipe marking shallsequentially :

9.1: Paint stenciling

For all pipe

Dec. 2020 IPS

111



document: (Standard, Procedure...) Equipment and Test method : Location for examination of samples (Pipe body, Pipe end, Pipe

Diameter tolerances (Pipe except the end & Pipe end):

roundness tolerances (Pipe except the end & Pipe end) : thickness :

Average length of pipes, minimum percent of pipes in specified range of length, Min & Max of pipe length: Tolerances for straightness (Total deviation from a straight line, Local deviation from a straight line): Tolerances for Mass (Weight):

Bevel angle and tolerance : Width of the root face and tolerance : Tolerances for the weld seam (only for welded pipe): (Including Radial offset of strip/plate edges, Height of the flash or weld bead/reinforcement, Misalignment of the weld beads of SAW). Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).

Production

Corrosion Testing



document: (Standard, Procedure...) Equipment and Test method: (Test solution and solution control such as temperature, H2S concentration, pH...) Location, Orientation, Number and Dimensions of samples :

ria ( CLR, CSR, CTR, Crack length, Blistering area


Production

Firstproduction, this section shall include minimum


document: (Standard, Procedure...) Equipment and Test method: (Test solution and solution control such as temperature, H2S concentration, pH...) Location, Orientation, Number and Dimensions of samples : Acceptance criteria :

Samples under load stress value : Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).

Production

Marking

ProductionThis section shall include minimum requirements as follow :

document: (Standard, Procedure...) Equipment and method : Location of marking on pipe : Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).

Pipe marking shall include at least the following information

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

First-day

Production

First-day

Production

First-day

Production

Production

� Name or mark of the manufacturer of the pipe :� "API Spec 5L" and "IPS� Specified outside diameter:� Specified wall thickness:� Pipe steel grade : � Product specification le� Type of pipe (SMLS...):� Mark of the customer's inspection representative :� Pipe No. � TESTED shall be marked for specified hydrostatic test pressure:� Heat number of pipe:� Pipe marking shall carry "sour service" or "Non

indicate pipe service condition. � Order No. : � Length of pipe: � Weight:

This section shall include minimum requirements as follow : � Reference document:� Equipment and method :� Location and width of paint strip on pipe :� Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Remarks: � Note: On HFW pipe, the manufacturer shall apply a 50 mm wide daub

of heat resistant white paint on the inside surface at each end of each pipe to mark the location of the weld line.

9.2: Paint Colour

For all pipe

10.

This section shall include minimum requirements as follow :� Reference document: (Standard, Procedure...) � Equipment and method :� Delivery Condition of � Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Remarks:

10.1: Packing

Requirements

For all pipe

This section shall include minimum requirements as follow :� Reference document:� Equipment and method :� Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Remarks:

10.2:

Storage Requirements

For all pipe

This section shall include minimum requirements as follow :� Reference document:� Equipment and method :� Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Remarks:

10.3:

Shipping Requirements

For all pipe

11.

This section shall include minimum requirements� Requisition/PMR� Purchase order� Approved MPS/QCP� Technical agreements between purchaser and manufacturer� Material/Mill Certificates� Manufacturer specification/procedure/data sheet� Including all WPSs/

qualification reports, NDT reports, VT reports, mechanical & chemical reports, Heat treatment reports, hydrostatic test reports, HIC & SSC reports and other special, daily or laboratory test reports.

� Deviations (NCR)� Calibration List� Traceable packing list

11.1: Documents

For all pipe

Dec. 2020 IPS

112

Name or mark of the manufacturer of the pipe : "API Spec 5L" and "IPS-M-PI-190 ()"shall be marked: Specified outside diameter: Specified wall thickness:

Product specification level designation (PSL ()): Type of pipe (SMLS...): Mark of the customer's inspection representative :

TESTED shall be marked for specified hydrostatic test pressure: Heat number of pipe: Pipe marking shall carry "sour service" or "Non-Sour service" to indicate pipe service condition.

Production This section shall include minimum requirements as follow :

document: (Standard, Procedure...) and method :

Location and width of paint strip on pipe : Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).

: On HFW pipe, the manufacturer shall apply a 50 mm wide daub of heat resistant white paint on the inside surface at each end of each ipe to mark the location of the weld line.

Packing, Storage and Shipping


Reference document: (Standard, Procedure...) method :

Delivery Condition of pipe: (Bare, Unoiled, end protected caps...) Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).


document: (Standard, Procedure...) Equipment and method : Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).

ProductiThis section shall include minimum requirements as follow : document: (Standard, Procedure...)

Equipment and method : Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).

Documentation


Requisition/PMR Purchase order Approved MPS/QCP-ITP Technical agreements between purchaser and manufacturer Material/Mill Certificates Manufacturer specification/procedure/data sheet

all WPSs/PQRs, progress inspection reports, NDT ualification reports, NDT reports, VT reports, mechanical &

chemical reports, Heat treatment reports, hydrostatic test reports, HIC & SSC reports and other special, daily or laboratory

Deviations (NCR) Calibration List Traceable packing list

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

Production

Production

Production

Production

Production

� Manufacturer Certificates (

reports and traceability cards positive results of all tests and check steps)

� Owner inspector Release Note� Inspection Certificate by owner inspector� Remarks

This section shall include minimum requirements as follow :� Reference document:� Equipment and method:� Traceability by heat number and lot number shall be maintained until

the finished product. � Heat number and lot

and testing reports/charts.� Traceability shall be maintained on all the manufacturing processes,

according to that, any movement for the pipes between different mills shall be accompanied with tally lists shoconcerning traceability.

� Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).� Remarks :

11.2:

Traceability

For all pipe

12. ANNEX I: Manufacturing Process Chart of Pipe

13. ANNEX II: Heat treatment Process Chart of Pipe

14. ANNEX III: Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) for Welded pipe

15. ANNEX IV: Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) for Welded pipe

Dec. 2020 IPS

113

Manufacturer Certificates (Consistency of inspection and test reports and traceability cards positive results of all tests and

Owner inspector Release Note Inspection Certificate by owner inspector


document: (Standard, Procedure...) Equipment and method: Traceability by heat number and lot number shall be maintained until the finished product. Heat number and lot number shall be traceable on all the inspection and testing reports/charts. Traceability shall be maintained on all the manufacturing processes, according to that, any movement for the pipes between different mills shall be accompanied with tally lists showing all information concerning traceability. Produced reports/Doc: (Table, Chart, Data...).

Manufacturing Process Chart of Pipe

Heat treatment Process Chart of Pipe

Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) for Welded pipe

Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) for Welded pipe

IPS-M-PI-190(4)

Production

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARD FOR LINE PIPE FOURTH ...

Documents

Transcript of MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARD FOR LINE PIPE FOURTH ...